Syllabus for PPL, SPL, BPL

Based on EASA AMC1 FCL.115, .120, .210 and .215, AMC1 SFCL.135 and AMC1 BFCL.135
Applicable for PPL(A), PPL(H), SPL and BPL
As well as corresponding LAP-Licences

Developed by AIRCADEMY

V23.1
 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
SPL/BPL: 1.1 International law:
10.1 International law: conventions, agreements and organisations x x x x conventions, agreements and
organisations
10.1.1 The Convention on international civil aviation (Chicago) Doc. 7300/6 x x x x
Part I Air Navigation: Recall the general contents of relevant parts of the following
10.1.1.1 x x x x
chapters:
10.1.1.1.1 (a) general principles and application of the convention x x x x
10.1.1.1.2 (b) flight over territory of Contracting States x x x x
10.1.1.1.3 (c) nationality of aircraft x x x x
10.1.1.1.4 (d) measures to facilitate air navigation x x x x
10.1.1.1.5 (e) conditions to be fulfilled on aircraft x x x x
10.1.1.1.6 (f) international standards and recommended practices x x x x
10.1.1.1.7 (g) validity of endorsed certificates and licences x x x x
10.1.1.1.8 (h) notification of differences x x x x
Part II The International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO): objectives and
10.1.1.2 x x x x
composition
10.1.1.2.1 Describe the objectives of ICAO x x x x

10.1.1.2.2 Explain the most important effects of the Chicago Convention on General Aviation x x x x

Describe the application of international standards and laws (non-binding/

10.1.1.2.3 x x x x
translation into national law)
10.1.2 European Organisations x x x x
10.1.2.1 EASA x x x x
10.1.2.1.1 Describe the objectices of EASA, and the role of EASA in European civil aviation x x x x
State that EU regulations are binding throughout all EU member states without
10.1.2.1.2 x x x x
prior national legal translation
Explain the significance of regulations and AMC/GM material initiated/developed
10.1.2.1.3 x x x x
by EASA
List the most significant parts of EU aviation legislation for private pilots (e.g. FCL,
10.1.2.1.4 x x x x
SERA)
Describe how to find information about EU regulations/ be able to locate the EU
10.1.2.1.5 x x x x
regulations online (eur-lex or easa.europa.eu)
10.1.2.2 EUROCONOTROL x x x x
State the various roles of EUROCONTROL: Network Manager, Centralised Route
10.1.2.2.1 x x x x
Charges, ATM strategy, Training, etc.

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 1 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
SPL/BPL: 1.2 Airworthiness of
10.2 Annex 8: Airworthiness of aircraft x x x x aircraft, SPL: 8.9 Airworthiness
and maintenance
10.2.1 Certificate of airworthiness x x
10.2.1.1 Terms and definitions x x x x
Define 'Certificate of Airworthiness' (CofA) and 'Airworthyness Review Certificate'
10.2.1.1.1 x x x x
(ARC)
10.2.1.2 Procedures x x x x
10.2.1.2.1 State the issuing authority of a CofA x x x x
10.2.1.2.2 State who shall determine an aircraft's continuing airworthiness x x x x
10.2.1.2.3 Describe how a CofA can be renewed or may remain valid x x x x
Identify a certificate of airworthiness, and explain the reasons for issuing such
10.2.1.2.4 x x x x
certificates
10.2.1.2.5 Identify an airworthiness review certificate (ARC) and assess its validity x x x x
State which documents must be carried on board an aircraft during a local - and
10.2.1.2.6 x x x x
a X-country flight.
10.2.2 Aircraft Radio Station x x x x
10.2.2.1 General x x x x
State that any radio station is bound to a prior approval, and that approval must
10.2.2.1.1 x x x x
be carried along
10.2.3 Aircraft Logbook x x x x
10.2.3.1 Purpose x x x x
10.2.3.1.1 Explain why an aircraft logbook is required for any aircraft x x x x
10.2.3.2 Tracking defects x x x x
State that defects and their rectification have to be entered into the aircraft
10.2.3.2.1 x x x x
logbook and can be traced using the aircraft logbook
State that an aircraft may only be taken to flight by the pilot if all relevant defects
10.2.3.2.2 x x x x
have been rectified

SPL/BPL: 1.3 Aircraft nationality

10.3 Annex 7: Aircraft nationality and registration marks x x x x
and registration marks

10.3.1 Nationality marks, common marks and registration marks x x x x

10.3.1.1 Foreword and definitions x x x x
Recall the definition of the following terms: 'aircraft', 'heavier-than-air aircraft,
10.3.1.1.1 x x x x
'State of Registry'

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 2 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Recall the definition of the following terms: 'balloon', 'lighter-than-air aircraft,
10.3.1.1.2 x x x x
'State of Registry'
10.3.1.2 Common- and registration marks x x x x
State the location of nationality- and registration marks, and when they must be
10.3.1.2.1 x x x x
carried
State that National registration markings must be installed and that they
10.3.1.2.2 x x x x
include: registration, possible flag, fireproof registration plate
10.3.1.3 Certificate of registration and aircraft nationality x x x x
Explain who is responsible for assigning nationality marks, common marks and
10.3.1.3.1 x x x x
registration marks
Identify a certificate of registration as such and should be able to explain the
10.3.1.3.2 x x x x
reasons for issuing such certificates
10.4 Annex 1: Personnel licensing x x x x SPL/BPL: 1.4 Personnel licensing

10.4.1 Aircrew Regulation - Annex I (Part-FCL) x x x x

10.4.1.1 Definitions and responsibilities x x x x
Define the following: Category, class and type of aircraft, cross-country, flight
10.4.1.1.1 x x x -
time, night, private pilot, renewal, revalidation, skill test, solo flight time
Define 'block time', and state that this time is to be recorded in a pilot's personal
10.4.1.1.2 x x - -
flight logbook
10.4.1.1.3 Define the term 'PIC' x x x x
State who (in case of General Aviation) designates the PIC with regard to Commission Regulation (EU) No
10.4.1.1.4 x x x x
Commission Regulation (EU) No 923/2012 Art. 2 (100) 923/2012 Art. 2 (100)
10.4.1.1.5 List the duties and responsibilities of the PIC with regard to NCO.GEN.105 x x x x NCO.GEN.105
10.4.1.1.6 Explain the difference between a 'commercial' and 'non-commercial' flight x x x x
Explain for given examples, which kinds of flights (e.g. introductory flights, cost-
10.4.1.1.7 x x x x
sharing flights, aerial work/SPO operation) a private pilot is allowed to perform
10.4.2 Relevant parts of Annex 1 connected to Part-FCL and Part-Medical x x x x
10.4.2.1 Part FCL x x x x
Source: Aircrew Regulation,
10.4.2.1.1 Explain the structure of relevant parts of FLC (Part FCL, BFCL, SFCL) x x x x
Article 1 Subject matter

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 3 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Source: Regulation (EU)
2018/1139, Article 21 and point
Describe the general principles of the licensing system (Light Aircraft Pilot Licence 2 of Annex IV 'Essential
10.4.2.1.2 x x - -
(LAPL) and Private Pilot Licence (PPL) requirements for aircrew' to this
Regulation, Aircrew Regulation,
point FCL.015
Source: Aircrew Regulation,
10.4.2.1.3 List the factors that are relevant to the exercise of the privileges of a licence x x x x point FCL.040 Exercise of the
privileges of licences
Source: Aircrew Regulation,
10.4.2.1.4 State the circumstances in which a language proficiency endorsement is required x x x x point FCL.055 Language
proficiency
Source: Aircrew Regulation,
10.4.2.1.5 Explain the term 'competent authority' x x x x point FCL.001 Competent
authority
Source: Aircrew Regulation,
10.4.2.1.6 Name and identify personal documents required to be carried on board x x x x point FCL.045 Obligation to
carry and present documents
10.4.2.1.7 State which documents may be kept at the airfield during local flights x x x x
10.4.2.2 Part MED x x x x
State the requirements for the
10.4.2.2.1 State the requirements for the issue of a medical certificate x x x x
issue of a medical certificate
Source: Aircrew Regulation,
Name the class of medical certificate required when exercising the privileges of a
10.4.2.2.2 x x x x point MED.A.030 Medical
LAPL, PPL, SPL or BPL
certificates
10.4.2.2.3 State the period of validity of a Medical class 2 for a pilot with given age x x x x
10.4.2.3 Validity and priviledges of licences and ratings x x x x
Requirements and privileges x x
10.4.2.3.1 State the requirements for the issue of a PPL, SPL or BPL x x x x
10.4.2.3.2 State the privileges of a PPL, SPL or BPL x x x x
10.4.2.3.3 State the requirements for class ratings, their validity and privileges x x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 4 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Source: Aircrew Regulation,
point FCL.800 Aerobatic rating;
Aircrew Regulation, point
FCL.805 Sailplane towing and
State the requirements for other ratings, their validity and privileges according to
banner towing ratings; Aircrew
10.4.2.3.4 Part-FCL (e.g. Aerobatic rating, Sailplane towing and banner towing rating, x x x x
Regulation, point FCL.810 Night
Night rating, thetered balloon etc.)
rating; Aircrew Regulation,
point FCL.815 Mountain rating;
Aircrew Regulation, point
FCL.820 Flight test rating.
Explain with given examples, what aircraft types/variants can be operated with a
10.4.2.3.5 x - - -
SEP(land) or TMG class rating
Revalidation and Renewal x x x x
10.4.2.3.6 State the period of validity of a PPL, SPL or BPL x x x x
State the period of validity of a SEP(land) / TMG class rating or or helicopter type
10.4.2.3.7 x x - -
rating
State the requirements how revalidate a SEP(land) / TMG class rating or or
10.4.2.3.8 x x - -
helicopter type rating
State the requirements how to renew a SEP(land), TMG class rating or or
10.4.2.3.9 x x - -
helicopter type rating
Differences Training x x - -
10.4.2.3.10 Explain the terms 'differences training' and 'familiarization' x x - -
Explain for which variants within the SEP(land) class rating or helicopter type
10.4.2.3.11 x x - -
rating a differences training is required
10.4.2.3.12 State the period of validity of a differences training x x - -
Recency x x x x
10.4.2.3.13 State the flight experience required for a pilot to act as a PIC x x x x
10.4.2.3.14 State the flight experience required for a pilot to carry passengers x x x x
10.5 Annex 2: Rules of the air x x x x SPL/BPL: 1.5 Rules of the air
10.5.1 Essential definitions x x x x
10.5.1.1 Scope and definitions x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 2,
10.5.1.1.1 Explain the scope and purpose of ICAO Annex 2 x x x x
Foreword, Applicability
Source: SERA, Article 1 Subject
10.5.1.1.2 Define the term 'SERA' x x x x
matter and scope

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 5 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Source: SERA, Article 1 Subject
10.5.1.1.3 Explain the scope and main content of SERA x x x x
matter and scope
10.5.1.1.4 Explain the terms 'VMC', 'IMC' and 'VFR' / 'IFR' flights x x x x
10.5.1.1.5 Define the term 'ceiling' x x x x
10.5.2 Applicability x x x x
10.5.2.1 Applicability of the Rules of the Air x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Chapter
Explain the principle of territorial application of the various Rules of the Air, e.g. 2, 2.1 Territorial application of
10.5.2.1.1 x x x x
ICAO, SERA, national rules the rules of the air; SERA.1001
and SERA.2001
State the responsibilities of the PIC, and identify under what circumstances Source: SERA.2010
10.5.2.1.2 x x x x
departure from the Rules of the Air may be allowed Responsibilities

State that the PIC of an aircraft has final authority as to the disposition of the Source: SERA.2015 Authority of
10.5.2.1.3 x x x x
aircraft while in command pilot-in-command of an aircraft

10.5.3 General rules (except water operations) x x x x

10.5.3.1 Rules - SERA x x x x
Source: SERA Chapter 2
10.5.3.1.1 Describe the rules for the avoidance of collisions x x x x Avoidance of collisions (except
water operations)

Source: SERA.3215 Lights to be

displayed by aircraft; ICAO
Annex 2, Chapter 3, 3.2.3; ICAO
10.5.3.1.2 Describe the lights, including their angles, to be displayed by aircraft x x x x
Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 6, 6.10
and Appendix 1; and ICAO
Annex 6, Part III, Chapter 4, 4.42

Explain when the cruising levels shall be expressed in terms of altitude (ALT) or Source: SERA.3110 Cruising
10.5.3.1.3 x x x x
flight levels (FLs) levels
State the minimum flight altitude with regard to SERA, for flights over populated Source: SERA.3105 Minimum
10.5.3.1.4 x x x x
and unpopulated areas heights
10.5.3.1.5 Explain the difference between 'populated' and 'unpopulated areas' x x x x
10.5.3.1.6 List example cases in which the minimum flight altitude does not apply x x x x
Source: SERA.8015 Air traffic
10.5.3.1.7 State for which flights an air traffic control (ATC) clearance shall be obtained x x x x
control clearances
10.5.4 Visual flight rules x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 6 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
10.5.4.1 Visual flight rules (VFR) - SERA x x x x
SERA.5001 VMC visibility and
distance from cloud minima;
10.5.4.1.1 State the flight visibility to be maintained during VFR flight in a given airspace x x x x SERA.5005 Visual flight rules;
SERA.5010 Special VFR in
control zones
SERA.5001 VMC visibility and
distance from cloud minima;
State the horizontal and vertical distance to clouds to be maintained during VFR
10.5.4.1.2 x x x x SERA.5005 Visual flight rules;
flight in a given airspace
SERA.5010 Special VFR in
control zones
10.5.4.1.3 Apply the right-of-way- and collision aviodance rules to given examples x x x x SERA.3210
Determine the right of way when other categories of aircraft (gliders, hang-
10.5.4.1.4 x x x x
gliders, balloons, etc.) are involved
10.5.4.2 Special VFR flights (SVFR) x x x x
10.5.4.2.1 Explain the term 'Special VFR flight' x x x x
State the restrictions and minimum weather conditions for Special VFR (SVFR)
10.5.4.2.2 x x x x
flights
Explain that the possibility to execute SVFR flights exists only within CTRs, and
10.5.4.2.3 that this restriction has to be linked to the minimum weather conditions for VFR x x x x
flights in airspace GOLF
10.5.4.2.4 State sthat Special VFR (SVFR) flights are bound to a specific clearance x x x x
10.5.4.3 VFR Night Flights x x x x x
10.5.4.3.1 State under which conditions a VFR flight may be conducted during night time x x x x x
10.5.4.3.2 State the requirements to acquire a rating for VFR night flights x x x x x
10.5.5 Signals and interception of civil aircraft x x x x
10.5.5.1 Interception of civil aircraft - SERA x x x x
Source: SERA.11015
10.5.5.1.1 State what primary action should be carried out by an intercepted aircraft x x x x
Interception
State which frequency should primarily be tried in order to contact an Source: SERA.11015
10.5.5.1.2 x x x x
intercepting aircraft Interception
State on which mode and code a transponder on board the intercepted aircraft Source: SERA.11015
10.5.5.1.3 x x x x
should be operated Interception
Source: SERA.11015
10.5.5.1.4 Recall the interception signals and phrases x x x x Interception, Tables S11-1, S11-
2, S11-3

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 7 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
SPL/BPL: 1.6 Procedures for air
10.6 Procedures for air navigation: aircraft operations doc. 8168- ops/611, volume 1 x x x x
navigation: aircraft operations
Altimeter setting procedures (including IACO doc. 7030 – regional supplementary
10.6.1 x x x x
procedures)
10.6.1.1 Basic requirements and definitions x x x x
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.1.1.1 Describe the two main objectives of altimeter settings x x x x
Volume III, Section 2, Chapter 1
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume I, Part I, Section 2,
10.6.1.1.2 Define the terms 'QNH' and 'QFE' x x x x
Chapter 2; ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume III, Section 2, Chapter 1
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume I, Part I, Section 1
Define the terms 'flight level (FL)', 'transition altitude (TA)', 'transition level (TRL)'
10.6.1.1.3 x x x x Definitions, abbreviations and
and 'transition layer'
acronyms and units of
measurement
10.6.1.2 Procedures applicable (except tables) x x - -
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.1.2.1 State the interval by which consecutive FLs shall be separated x x - -
Volume III, Section 2, Chapter 2
Explain when a flight altitude should be selected in terms of ALT and when in Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.1.2.2 x x - -
terms of FLs, and when to switch between ALT and FL Volume III, Section 2, Chapter 3
10.6.1.2.3 Explain the purpose of 'semi-circular rules' x x - -
State the correct flight altitude with regard to semi-circular rules for a given
10.6.1.2.4 x x - -
routing
Secondary surveillance radar transponder operating procedures (including ICAO
10.6.2 x x x x
Doc. 7030 – regional supplementary procedures)
10.6.2.1 Operation of transponders x x x x
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.2.1.1 State when and where the pilot shall operate the transponder x x x x
Volume III, Section 4, Chapter 1
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.2.1.2 State the standard squawk to be used by VFR flights is 7000 and 2000 and their use x x x x
Volume III, Section 4, Chapter 1
Explain the available modes (Mode A / C / S) and their use, and when the pilot shall Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.2.1.3 x x x x
operate the transponder Volume III, Section 4, Chapter 1
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.2.1.4 State when the pilot shall 'SQUAWK IDENT' x x x x
Volume III, Section 4, Chapter 1

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 8 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.2.1.5 Explain the use of the codes 7500, 7600, 7700 x x x x
Volume III, Section 4, Chapter 1
Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.2.1.6 Describe the consequences of a transponder failure in flight x x x x
Volume III, Section 4, Chapter 1
State the primary action in case of an unserviceable transponder before departure Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
10.6.2.1.7 x x x x
when no repair or replacement is possible Volume III, Section 4, Chapter 1
SPL/BPL: 1.8 Air traffic services
10.7 Annex 11: Air Traffic Managent and Services x x x x (ATS) and air traffic
management (ATM)
10.7.1 Doc. 4444: Air Traffic Management x x x x
10.7.1.1 Definitions x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 11,
10.7.1.1.1 Recall the definitions given in ICAO Annex 11 x x x x
Chapter 1 Definitions
10.7.1.2 General provisions for air traffic services x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 11,
10.7.1.2.1 State the objectives of ATS x x x x
Chapter 2, 2.2 Objectives of ATS

Explain the pilot's responsibilities in respect of ATC-communication, especially the

10.7.1.2.2 obligation to 'read-back', follow ATC instructions, the right to request a changed x x x x
clearance or rejection of a given clearance
SPL/BPL: 1.7 Air traffic
10.7.1.3 Airspace structure x x x x
regulations: airspace structure
General x x
10.7.1.3.1 Explain the difference between controlled and uncontrolled airspace x x x x
Describe the general structure of the airspace with classes of airspace A-G and
10.7.1.3.2 x x x x
their lower/upper horizontal limits
State that VFR flights can only be executed up to FL195, and that an approval is
10.7.1.3.3 x x x x
required for higher VFR flights
Describe specialities and associated dangers of airspace ECHO (collision
10.7.1.3.4 x x x x
avoidance, transponder mandatory, IFR and VFR traffic)
10.7.1.3.5 List the available air traffic services for different types of airspace x x x x
CTR x x x x
Describe the dimension and significance of Control Zones (CTR) and the pilot's
10.7.1.3.6 x x x x
obigations before/at entering a CTR
Restricted Areas x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 9 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Explain the implications of danger-, restricted- and prohibited areas to the
10.7.1.3.7 x x x x
planned routing
Extract the associated restrictions of an airspace (if any) from given material (AIP,
10.7.1.3.8 x x x x
VFR charts)
Describe how to obtain information about activation status of restricted areas
10.7.1.3.9 x x x x
(e.g. NOTAMs and interpretation thereof)
TMZ, RMZ and TRA x x x x
Describe the characteristics of a Transponder Mandatory Zone (TMZ) and the
10.7.1.3.10 x x x x
pilot's obigations before/at entering a TMZ
Describe the characteristics of a Radio Mandatory Zone (RMZ) and the pilot's
10.7.1.3.11 x x x x
obigations before/at entering a RMZ
Describe the characteristics of a Temporary Reserved Area (TRA), a Temporary
10.7.1.3.12 x x x x
Segregated Area (TSA) and the pilot's obigations before/at entering a TRA or TSA
FIR x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 11,
10.7.1.3.13 Describe the purpose for establishing flight information regions (FIRs) x x x x
Chapter 2: 2.10; 2.11.
10.7.1.3.14 Describe the possibility and advantages of contacting FIS before entering an FIR x x x x
10.7.1.4 Visual separation in the vicinity of aerodromes x x x x
10.7.1.4.1 Describe the categories of wake-turbulence 'light', 'medium' and 'heavy' x x x x
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
Chapter 5, 5.8 Time-based
wake turbulence longitudinal
10.7.1.4.2 Describe the consequences of clearance to 'maintain own separation' while in VMC x x - -
separation minima, 5.8.1; ICAO
Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.3
Visual approach
10.7.1.5 Procedures for aerodrome control services x x x x
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
10.7.1.5.1 Explain the term 'RWY-in-use' x x x x Chapter 7, 7.2 Selection of
runway-in-use
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
State that a report of surface wind direction given to a pilot by the TWR is Chapter 11, 11.4.3.2 Messages
10.7.1.5.2 x x x x
magnetic (MAG) containing meteorological
information
10.7.1.6 Radar services x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 10 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
Describe the circumstances under which an aircraft provided with radar service
10.7.1.6.1 x x x x Chapter 8, 8.6.4 Position
should be informed of its position
information
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
10.7.1.6.2 Explain the principle of 'radar vectoring' x x - -
Chapter 8, 8.6.5 Vectoring
Describe the actions (concerning the transponder) to be taken by the pilot in case
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
10.7.1.6.3 of emergency if previously been directed by ATC to operate the transponder on a x x x x
Chapter 8, 8.8.1 Emergencies
specific code
10.7.1.7 Flight information service and alerting service x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 11,
10.7.1.7.1 State for which aircraft FIS shall be provided x x x x
Chapter 4, 4.1 Application
Source: ICAO Annex 11,
Chapter 4, 4.3.4 Voice-
10.7.1.7.2 State the meaning of the term 'ATIS' in plain language x x x x
automatic terminal information
service (Voice-ATIS) broadcasts
Source: ICAO Annex 11,
10.7.1.7.3 Describe the content of an ATIS message x x x x Chapter 4, 4.3.7 ATIS for
arriving and departing aircraft
10.7.1.8 Procedures related to emergencies, communication failure and contingencies x x x x
10.7.1.8.1 Explain the procedure for communication failure x x x x
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
State the mode and code of SSR equipment a pilot might operate in case of
10.7.1.8.2 x x x x Chapter 15, 15.1 Emergency
communiction (COM) failure
procedures
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
State the mode and code of SSR equipment a pilot might operate in a state of
10.7.1.8.3 x x x x Chapter 15, 15.1 Emergency
emergency
procedures
Source: ICAO Doc 4444,
Chapter 15, 15.1.1 General;
10.7.1.8.4 State the special rights an aircraft in a state of emergency can expect from ATC x x x x 15.1.2 Priority; 15.1.3 Unlawful
interference and aircraft bomb
threat
SPL/BPL: 1.9 Aeronautical
10.8 Annex 15: Aeronautical information service x x x x
information services (AIS)
10.8.1 Introduction, essential definitions x x x x
10.8.1.1 Definitions x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
10.8.1.1.1 State, in general terms, the objective of an AIS x x x x
Chapter 1, Note 1

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 11 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Recall the following definitions aeronautical information circular (AIC),
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
10.8.1.1.2 aeronautical information publication (AIP), aeronautical information regulation x x x x
Chapter 1, 1.1 Definitions
and control (AIRAC), NOTAM, pre-flight information bulletin (PIB)
10.8.2 Integrated Aeronautical Information Package x x x x
10.8.2.1 Aeronautical information publication (AIP) x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
10.8.2.1.1 State the primary purpose of the AIP x x x x
Chapter 5, 5.2.2, Notes 1 and 2
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
Chapter 5, 5.2.1, Note 1; PANS-
10.8.2.1.2 Name and explain the contents of the different parts of the AIP x x x x
AIM (ICAO Doc 10066), Chapter
5, 5.2.1.2.5
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
Chapter 6, 6.3.1 AIP updates,
Explain what kind of information shall be published in the form of AIP 6.3.1.3; PANS-AIM (ICAO Doc
10.8.2.1.3 x x x x
Supplements 10066), Chapter 5, 5.2.1.4
Specifications for AIP
Supplements
10.8.2.2 Notices to airmen (NOTAMs) x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
10.8.2.2.1 Summarise the essential information which leads to the issue of a NOTAM x x x x
Chapter 6, 6.3.2.3
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
Chapter 5, 5.4 Distribution
10.8.2.2.2 Describe the means by which NOTAMs shall be distributed x x x x services; PANS-AIM (ICAO Doc
10066), 5.2.5 NOTAM,
5.2.5.1.3, and Appendix 7
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
Chapter 5, 5.4 Distribution
10.8.2.2.3 Read and interpret information from NOTAMs goven by example x x x x services; PANS-AIM (ICAO Doc
10066), 5.2.5 NOTAM,
5.2.5.1.3, and Appendix 7
10.8.2.3 Aeronautical information regulation and control (AIRAC) x x x x
List the circumstances under which the information concerned shall or should be Source: ICAO Annex 15,
10.8.2.3.1 x x x x
distributed as an AIRAC Chapter 6, 6.2
10.8.2.4 Aeronautical information circulars (AICs) x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 12 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
Chapter 5, 5.2.4 Aeronautical
Information Circulars; PANS-
10.8.2.4.1 Describe the type of information that may be published in AICs x x x x
AIM (ICAO Doc 10066), Chapter
5, 5.2.2 Aeronautical
Information Circulars (AIC)
Source: ICAO Annex 15,
Chapter 5, 5.2.4, Note; PANS-
AIM (ICAO Doc 10066), Chapter
10.8.2.4.2 Explain the organisation of AICs x x x x
5, 5.2.2 Aeronautical
Information Circulars (AIC),
5.2.2.3 to 5.2.2.9
SPL/BPL: 1.10 Aerodromes,
10.9 Annex 14, Volume 1 and 2: Aerodromes x x x x
external take-off sites
10.9.1 Introduction, essential definitions x x x x
10.9.1.1 General x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Define the terms 'aerdrome traffic', 'aerodrome elevation', 'runway', 'taxi holding
10.9.1.1.1 x x x x Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.2
point'
Aerodrome reference point
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.1.1.2 State the different parts of the 'traffic pattern' (or 'traffic circuit') x x x x Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.2
Aerodrome reference point
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Recall the definitions for the four main declared distances TORA, TODA, ASDA and
10.9.1.1.3 x x - - Volume 1, Chapter 1, 1.1
LDA
Definitions
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Define the 'AD reference point' and describe where it shall be located and where it
10.9.1.1.4 x x x x Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.2
shall normally remain
Aerodrome reference point
10.9.2 Aerodrome data x x - -
10.9.2.1 Conditions of the movement area and related facilities x x - -
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Describe the different types of water deposit on RWYs (DAMP, WET, STANDING Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.9
10.9.2.1.1 x x - -
WATER) Condition of the movement
area and related facilities

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 13 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Volume 1, Chapter 1, 1.1
Explain the different types of frozen water on the RWY (snow, slush, ice or frost)
10.9.2.1.2 x x - - Definitions and Chapter 2, 2.9
and their impact on aircraft braking performance
Condition of the movement
area and related facilities
10.9.3 Visual aids for navigation x x x x
10.9.3.1 (a) indicators and signalling devices x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.1.1
10.9.3.1.1 Describe the wind-direction indicators with which ADs shall be equipped x x x x Wind dire ction indicator
(Application, Location and
Characteristics)
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.3.1.2 Describe a landing-direction indicator x x x x Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.1.2
Landing direction indicator
Source: Commission
Implementing Regulation (EU)
Explain the use and capabilities of a signalling lamp, and state the meaning of
10.9.3.1.3 x x x x No 923/2012 (SERA) - Appendix
various light signals from TWR to aircraft on ground and in flight
1 Signals, 3.2 Visual ground
signals
Source: Commission
Implementing Regulation (EU)
Describe how lights from a signalling lamp should be confirmed by aircraft on
10.9.3.1.4 x x x x No 923/2012 (SERA) - Appendix
ground and in flight
1 Signals, 3.2 Visual ground
signals
Source: Commission
Implementing Regulation (EU)
10.9.3.1.5 Interpret indications and signals that may be used in a signal area x x x x No 923/2012 (SERA) - Appendix
1 Signals, 3.2 Visual ground
signals
10.9.3.2 (b) markings x x - -
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.3.2.1 Name the colours used for the various markings (RWY, TWY, aircraft stands) x x - - Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.2
Markings
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
State where a RWY designation marking shall be provided and describe the
10.9.3.2.2 x x - - Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.2
different layouts (excluding dimensions)
Markings

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 14 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Describe the characteristics of: RWY-centre-line markings, THR markings, Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.3.2.3 touchdown-zone (TDZ) markings, RWY-side-stripe markings; TWY-centre-line x x - - Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.2
markings, RWY holding position markings, aircraft-stand markings Markings
10.9.3.3 (c) lights x x - - x
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Describe the precision approach path indicator (PAPI) and interpret what the
10.9.3.3.1 x x - - x Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.5.24
pilot will see during the approach using PAPI
to 5.3.5.27 PAPI and APAPI
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Interpret what the pilot will see during an approach using a helicopter approach
10.9.3.3.2 x x - - x Volume II, Chapter 5, 5.3.6
path indicator (HAPI)
Visual approach slope indicator
10.9.3.3.3 Describe the characteristics of an 'Aerodrome Beacon' x x - - x
Explain the characteristics (color and fixed/flashing) of: RWY-edge lights; RWY-
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.3.3.4 THR and wing-bar lights, RWY-end lights, RWY-centre-line lights, RWY-lead-in x x - - x
Volume 1, Chapter 5
lights, RWY-TDZ lights, TWY-centre-line lights, TWY-edge lights, stop bars
10.9.3.4 (d) signs x x - -
Describe and identify a RWY/TWY designation sign at a TWY/RWY intersection, a Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.3.4.1 x x - -
'NO ENTRY' sign, a RWY holding position sign Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
Describe and identify a intersection take-off sign at a TWY/RWY intersection, Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.3.4.2 x x - -
indicating the remaining runway length available Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.3.4.3 Describe the colours and inscriptions used in connection with information signs x x - -
Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
10.9.3.4.4 Describe the meaning of a sign 'C' as a reporting point for air traffic services x x - -
10.9.3.5 (e) markers x x - -
Describe the characteristics of: unpaved RWY-edge markers, TWY-edge markers, Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.3.5.1 x x - -
TWY-centre-line markers, unpaved TWY-edge markers Volume 1, Chapter 5.5 Markers
10.9.4 Visual aids for denoting obstacles x x x x
10.9.4.1 (a) marking of objects x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.4.1.1 State how fixed or mobile objects shall be marked if colouring is not practicable x x x x Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.3.1
Marking

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 15 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.2
Mobile objects: 6.2.2.1,
10.9.4.1.2 Describe marking by colours (fixed or mobile objects) x x x x 6.2.2.2; 6.2.2.3; 6.2.2.4; ICAO
Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6,
6.2.3 Fixed objects: 6.2.3.1;
6.2.3.2; 6.2.3.3
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.5
10.9.4.1.3 Explain the use of markers for the marking of objects, overhead wires, cables, etc. x x x x
Overhead wires, cables, etc.,
and supporting towers
10.9.4.2 (b) lighting of objects x x x x

Source: ICAO Annex 14,

Describe the colour and sequence of low-intensity obstacle lights, medium-
10.9.4.2.1 x x x x Volume 1, Chapter 6: Table 6-1.
intensity obstacle lights and high-intensity obstacle lights
Characteristics of obstacle lights

10.9.5 Visual aids for denoting restricted use of areas x x - -

10.9.5.1 Visual aids for denoting restricted use of areas on RWYs and TWYs x x - -
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Volume 1, Chapter 7, 7.1
10.9.5.1.1 Describe the colours and meaning of 'closed markings' on RWYs and TWYs x x - -
Closed runways and taxiways, or
parts thereof
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
Describe the pre-THR marking (including colours) when the surface before the THR
10.9.5.1.2 x x - - Volume 1, Chapter 7, 7.3 Pre-
should not be used
threshold area
10.9.6 Emergency and other services x x - -
10.9.6.1 (a) rescue and fire fighting x x - -
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.6.1.1 Explain the basic information the AD category (for RFF) depends upon x x - - Volume 1, Chapter 9, 9.2
Rescue and firefighting
10.9.6.2 (b) apron management service x x - -
Source: ICAO Annex 14,
10.9.6.2.1 State who has a right-of-way against vehicles operating on an apron x x - - Volume 1, Chapter 9, 9.5 Apron
management service
SPL/BPL: 1.10 Aerodromes,
10.9.7 BPL+SPL: External take-off sites - - x x
external take-off sites
10.9.7.1 Take-off sites - - x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 16 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
State under which conditions a BPL flight can be started from outside an
10.9.7.1.1 - - - x
aerodrome
10.9.7.2 Outlanding sites - - x x
State under which conditions a SPL or BPL flight can be perform landing outside
10.9.7.2.1 - - x x
an aerodrome
SPL/BPL: 1.11 Search and
10.10 Annex 12: Search and rescue x x x x
rescue
10.10.1 Essential definitions x x x x
10.10.1.1 Definitions and responsibilities x x x x

10.10.1.1.1 State which organisations provide Search And Rescue Services (civil and military) x x x x

Source: ICAO Annex 12,

10.10.1.1.2 Recall the definitions of the following terms: INCERFA, ALERFA, DETRESFA x x x x
Chapter 1 Definitions
Describe the consequences in case of forgetting to close a flight plan, resulting in
10.10.1.1.3 x x x x
an unjustified SAR search mission
10.10.2 Operating procedures x x x x
10.10.2.1 (a) procedures for PIC at the scene of an accident x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 12,
Explain the SAR operating procedures for the PIC who arrives first at the scene of
10.10.2.1.1 x x x x Chapter 5, 5.6 Procedures at
an accident
thescene of an accident
10.10.2.2 (b) procedures for PIC intercepting a distress transmission x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 12,
Explain the SAR operating procedures for the PIC intercepting a distress Chapter 5, 5.7 Procedures for a
10.10.2.2.1 x x x x
transmission pilot-in-command intercepting a
distress transmission
10.10.3 Search and rescue signals x x x x
10.10.3.1 Search and rescue signals - Survivors x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 12,
10.10.3.1.1 Explain the 'ground-air visual signal code' for use by survivors x x x x Chapter 5.8 Search and rescue
signals and Appendix
Source: ICAO Annex 12,
10.10.3.1.2 Recognise the SAR 'air-to-ground signals' for use by survivors x x x x Chapter 5.8 Search and rescue
signals and Appendix
Source: ICAO Annex 12,
Describe how an aircraft should confirm to have received the information from
10.10.3.1.3 x x x x Chapter 5.8 Search and rescue
ground-air signals
signals and Appendix

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 17 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
10.11 Annex 17: Security x x x x SPL/BPL: 1.12 Security
10.11.1 General x x x x
10.11.1.1 Aims and objectives x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 17,
10.11.1.1.1 State the objectives of security x x x x
Chapter 2, 2.1 Objectives
SPL/BPL: 1.13 Accident
10.12 Annex 13: Aircraft accident investigation x x x x
reporting
10.12.1 Essential definitions and applicability x x x x
10.12.1.1 Definitions x x x x
Recall the definitions of the following terms: accident, incident, investigation, Source: ICAO Annex 13,
10.12.1.1.1 x x x x
serious incident, serious injury Chapter 1 Definitions
Source: ICAO Annex 13,
Chapter 1 Definitions and
10.12.1.1.2 Explain the difference between 'serious incident' and 'accident' x x x x
Attachment C 'List of examples
of serious incidents'
10.12.1.2 Applicability x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 13,
10.12.1.2.1 State the objective(s) of the investigation of an accident or incident x x x x Chapter 3, 3.1 Objective of the
investigation
Source: Regulation (EU) No
Identify an occurrence as being either an accident, incident or serious incident in 996/2010, Article 2(1), (7) and
10.12.1.2.2 x x x x
Regulation (EU) No 996/2010 (16) and Annex ‘List of
examples of serious incidents’
10.12.1.3 Objectives and procedures x x x x
Source: ICAO Annex 13,
10.12.1.3.1 State the objective(s) of the investigation of an accident or incident x x x x Chapter 4, 4.1; ICAO Annex 13,
Chapter 5, 5.1 to 5.4.1
Source: ICAO Annex 13,
10.12.1.3.2 Describe the general procedures for the investigation of an accident or incident x x x x Chapter 4, 4.1; ICAO Annex 13,
Chapter 5, 5.1 to 5.4.1
10.13 National law x x x x SPL/BPL: 1.14 National law
National law and differences to relevant ICAO Annexes and relevant EU
10.13.1 x x x x
regulations
10.13.1.1 National regulations x x x x
10.13.1.1.1 List the most important national regulations and laws concerning aviation x x x x
10.13.1.1.2 Explain how to find national laws and regulations x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 18 of 167

 10 ALW

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

AIR LAW AND ATC PROCEDURES x x x x
Name and describe the relevance of the national competent authority for his/her
10.13.1.1.3 x x x x
pilot licensing
10.13.1.2 Differences from ICAO Annexes x x x x
Describe situations and list examples in which national legislation may differ
10.13.1.2.1 x x x x
from ICAO Annexes
10.13.1.3 Differences from EU-Regulations x x x x
10.13.1.3.1 Describe the primacy of application of EU law x x x x
Describe situations and list examples in which national legislation of member
10.13.1.3.2 x x x x
states may differ from EU Regulations

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 19 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
20.1 Human factors: basic concepts x x x x
20.1.1 Human factors in aviation x x x x
20.1.1.1 Becoming a competent pilot x x x x
20.1.1.1.1 State that competence is based on knowledge, skills and attitudes of the individual pilot x x x x
State that the ICAO core competencies include: application of procedures, communication,
20.1.1.1.2 aircraft flight path management (automation and manual control), leadership and teamwork, x x x x
problem-solving and decision-making, situation awareness and workload management
20.2 Basic aviation physiology and health maintenance x x x x
20.2.1 Basic aviation physiology x x x x
20.2.1.1 The atmosphere x x x x
(a) composition x x x x
State that the volume percentage of the gases in ambient air will remain constant at all altitudes
20.2.1.1.1 x x x x
at which conventional aircraft operate
20.2.1.1.2 State in terms of % the parts of Oxygen, Nitrogen and other gases present in the atmosphere x x x x
State the effects of increasing altitude on the overall pressure and partial pressures of the various
20.2.1.1.3 x x x x
gases in the atmosphere
(b) gas laws x x x x
State the physiological significance of the following laws: Boyle's Law, Dalton's Law, Henry's Laws,
20.2.1.1.4 x x x x
the General Gas Law
20.2.1.2 Respiratory and circulatory systems x x x x
(a) oxygen requirement of tissues x x x x
20.2.1.2.1 List the main components of the respiratory system and their function x x x x
20.2.1.2.2 Explain the function of haemoglobin in the circulatory system x x x x
20.2.1.2.3 Explain the role of carbon dioxide in the control and regulation of respiration x x x x
20.2.1.2.4 State that the body starts to react on decreasing atmospheric pressure at approx. 5000 - 7000 ft x x x x
State that healthy people are able to compensate for altitudes up to approximately 10.000-
20.2.1.2.5 x x x x
12.000 ft ('disturbence threshold')
20.2.1.2.6 Explain which body functions are impaired above the disturbence threshold x x x x
(b) functional anatomy x x x x
20.2.1.2.7 Name the major components of the circulatory system and describe their function x x x x
(c) main forms of hypoxia (hypoxic and anaemic) x x x x
20.2.1.2.8 Name the two major forms of hypoxia (hypoxic and anaemic), and the common causes of both x x x x
(1) sources, effects and countermeasures of carbon monoxide x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 20 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
20.2.1.2.9 List possible sources of carbon monoxide in the cockpit x x x x
20.2.1.2.10 List the sources and symptoms of carbon-monoxide poisoning x x x x
20.2.1.2.11 Describe immediate countermeasures on suspicion of carbon-monoxide poisoning x x x x
(2) counter measures and hypoxia x x
Name factors influencing the body's tolerance to altitude and hypoxia (e.g. smoking, tiredness,
20.2.1.2.12 x x x x
sickness, etc.)
(3) symptoms of hypoxia x x
20.2.1.2.13 State the symptoms of hypoxia x x x x
(d) hyperventilation x x x x
20.2.1.2.14 Define the term 'hyperventilation' x x x x
20.2.1.2.15 List the factors that cause hyperventilation x x x x
20.2.1.2.16 List the signs and symptoms of hyperventilation x x x x
List the measures to counteract hyperventilation: breath slowly, close one opening of the nose,
20.2.1.2.17 x x x x
speak loudly, place a paper bag over nose and mouth
(e) the effects of accelerations on the circulatory system x x x x
20.2.1.2.18 Explain the terms 'linear acceleration' and 'angular acceleration' x x x x
20.2.1.2.19 State situations in which linear and angular acceleration can occur x x x x
20.2.1.2.20 List the effects of positive and negative acceleration (G-load) x x x x
(f) hypertension and coronary heart disease x x x x
20.2.1.2.21 Explain the term 'hypertension' x x x x
20.2.1.2.22 List the effects that high blood pressure will have on functions of the human body x x x x
20.2.1.2.23 Explain the major risk factors for coronary disease x x x x
20.2.1.2.24 Explain the role of physical exercise in reducing chances for developing coronary disease x x x x
20.2.2 People and environment x x x x
20.2.2.1 Central, peripheral and autonomic nervous systems x x x x
20.2.2.1.1 Describe the role of the autonomic nervous system x x x x
20.2.2.1.2 Describe the term 'sensitivity', especially in the context of vision x x x x
20.2.2.1.3 State examples of sensory adaptation x x x x
20.2.2.1.4 Describe the term 'reflex' x x x x
20.2.2.2 Vision x x x x
(a) functional anatomy x x x x
20.2.2.2.1 Name and identify the most important parts of the eye x x x x
20.2.2.2.2 Explain the functions of the rod and cone cells x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 21 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
20.2.2.2.3 Define 'accommodation' x x x x
(b) visual field, foveal and peripheral vision x x x x
Explain the terms 'visual acuity', 'central vision', 'peripheral vision' and 'fovea', and explain their
20.2.2.2.4 x x x x
function in the process of vision
(c) binocular and monocular vision x x x x
20.2.2.2.5 Explain the 'parallax error' x x x x
20.2.2.2.6 Describe the effect of UV ray protection of the retina by wearing sunglasses x x x x
20.2.2.2.7 Explain the differences and limitations between seeing with one eye or both eyes x x x x
(d) monocular vision cues x x x x
20.2.2.2.8 List the possible monocular cues for depth perception x x x x
(e) night vision x x x x
20.2.2.2.9 State the limitations of night vision and the different scanning techniques at both night and day x x x x
20.2.2.2.10 State the time necessary for the eye to adapt to bright light and to the dark x x x x
(f) visual scanning and detection techniques and importance of 'look-out' x x x x
20.2.2.2.11 List the factors that may degrade visual acuity and the importance of 'lookout' x x x x
(g) defective vision x x x x
20.2.2.2.12 Decribe the nature and effects of colour blindness x x x x
20.2.2.3 Hearing x x x x
(a) descriptive and functional anatomy x x x x
20.2.2.3.1 State the basic parts and functions of the outer, the middle and the inner ear x x x x
(b) flight related hazards to hearing x x x x
Explain the value of headsets as a means to prevent hearing defects caused by environmental noise
20.2.2.3.2 x x x x
(e.g. from engine, burner etc.)
20.2.2.3.3 Explain the difference between a standard headset and an active noise reduction headset x x x x
20.2.2.3.4 Explain the use of ear plugs for noise protection and consequences for verbal communication - - - x
(c) hearing loss x x x x
20.2.2.3.4 Describe possible damages caused by continued exposure to loud noise x x x x
20.2.2.3.5 List the main sources of hearing loss in the flying environment x x x x
20.2.2.3.6 Describe the level of noise that will cause 'noise-induced hearing loss' (NIHL) x x x x
20.2.2.4 Equilibrium x x x x
(a) functional anatomy x x x x
20.2.2.4.1 List the main elements of the vestibular apparatus x x x x
20.2.2.4.2 Describe the functions of the vestibular apparatus and possible problems in flight x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 22 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
(b) motion and acceleration x x x x
20.2.2.4.3 Describe the causes and symptoms of 'air sickness' x x x x
(c) motion sickness x x x x
20.2.2.4.4 Describe suitable actions to counteract the symptoms of air sickness x x x x
20.2.2.5 Integration of sensory inputs x x x x
(a) spatial disorientation: forms, recognition and avoidance x x x x
State the interaction between vision, equilibrium and proprioception and hearing to obtain
20.2.2.5.1 x x x x
spatial orientation in flight
Describe the cause of 'vertigo' as a mismatch between the vestibular organ inputs and
20.2.2.5.2 x x x x
optical/visual inputs

20.2.2.5.3 State that when entering clouds optical as well as sensory inputs immediately become unreliable x x x x

(b) illusions: forms, recognition and avoidance:

(1) physical origin;
x x x x
(2) physiological origin;
(3) psychological origin.
20.2.2.5.4 Describe the term 'illusion' and give examples x x x x

20.2.2.5.5 Explain how optical illusions typically occur due to misinterpretation of visual inputs by the brain x x x x

Explain that the vestibular organ accommodates to steady loads and accelerations - e.g. during
20.2.2.5.6 x x x x
banked turns - and that illusions might arise when ending the turn
20.2.2.5.7 List the measures to prevent or overcome spatial disorientation x x x x
(c) approach and landing problems x x x x
List approach and landing illusions for slope of the runway, black-hole approach and terrain
20.2.2.5.8 x x x x
around runway
20.2.3 Health and hygiene x x x x
20.2.3.1 Personal hygiene: personal fitness x x x x
20.2.3.1.1 State the pilot's responsibility of assessing his/her own health status before attempting the flight x x x x
20.2.3.2 Body rhythm and sleep x x x x
(a) rhythm disturbances x x x x
20.2.3.2.1 Name some internal body rhythms and their relevance to sleep x x x x
(b) symptoms, effects and management x x x x
20.2.3.2.2 Explain the function of sleep and describe the effects of insufficient sleep on performance x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 23 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
20.2.3.3 Problem areas for pilots: x x x x
(a) common minor ailments including cold, influenza and gastro-intestinal upset x x x x
Explain the role of the 'Eustachian tube' in equalising pressure between the middle ear and the
20.2.3.3.1 x x x x
environment
List the negative effects of suffering from colds or flu on flight operations, with regard to the
20.2.3.3.2 x x x x
middle ear, the sinuses and the teeth
20.2.3.3.3 Describe the measures to prevent or clear problems due to pressure changes during flight x x x x
20.2.3.3.4 Describe the sources and effects of gastrointestinal upsets that may occur during flight x x x x
20.2.3.3.5 List precautions to reduce the occurrence of gastrointestinal upsets x x x x
(b) entrapped gases and barotrauma, (scuba diving) x x x x
20.2.3.3.6 Describe the term 'barotrauma' x x x x
20.2.3.3.7 Explain why the effects of otic barotrauma can be worse in the descent x x x x
(c) obesity x x x x
20.2.3.3.8 Describe the term 'obesity' x x x x
State that harmful effects obesity can cause: developing coronary problems, developing diabetes,
20.2.3.3.9 reduced ability to withstand G-forces, problems with the joints of the limbs, general circulatory x x x x
problems
(d) food hygiene x x x x
20.2.3.3.10 State the importance of adequate hydration x x x x
(f) nutrition x x x x
20.2.3.3.11 State the major constituents of a healthy diet x x x x
20.2.3.4 Intoxication x x x x
(a) prescribed medication x x x x
Interpret the general rule that 'if a pilot is so unwell that they require any medication, then they
20.2.3.4.1 x x x x
should consider themselves unfit to fly'
(b) tobacco x x x x
20.2.3.4.2 State that smoking reduces the body's tolerance to compensate for higher altitudes x x x x
(c) alcohol and drugs x x x x
20.2.3.4.3 State the ‘unit’ of alcohol and state the approximate elimination rate from the blood x x x x
State the effects of alcohol consumption on: the ability to reason, inhibitions and self-control,
20.2.3.4.4 x x x x
vision, the sense of balance and sensory illusions, sleep patterns, hypoxia
(d) caffeine x x x x
20.2.3.4.5 Indicate other beverages besides coffee containing caffeine x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 24 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
(e) self-medication x x x x
State considerations to be made when using self-medication, e.g. prior contact to an aeromedical
20.2.3.4.6 x x x x
examiner
20.3 Basic aviation psychology x x x x
20.3.1 Human information processing x x x x
20.3.1.1 Attention and vigilance x x x x
(a) selectivity of attention
x x x x
(b) divided attention
20.3.1.1.1 Differentiate between 'attention' and 'vigilance' x x x x
20.3.1.1.2 Differentiate between 'selective' and 'divided' attention x x x x
20.3.1.1.3 List the factors that affect a person's level of attention x x x x
20.3.1.1.4 Indicate the signs of reduced vigilance x x x x
20.3.1.2 Perception x x x x
(A) perceptual illusions x x x x
20.3.1.2.1 Describe some basic perceptual illusions x x x x
(B) subjectivity of perception x x x x
Illustrate why perception is subjective and state the relevant factors that influence interpretation
20.3.1.2.2 x x x x
of perceived information
(C) processes of perception. x x x x
20.3.1.2.3 Describe the mechanism of perception ('bottom-up'/'top-down' process) x x x x
20.3.1.3 Memory x x x x
(a) sensory memory x x x x
Explain the link between the types of memory (sensory, working/short-term and long-term
20.3.1.3.1 x x x x
memory)
(b) working or short term memory x x x x
State the average maximum number of separate items that may be held in working memory: 7
20.3.1.3.2 x x x x
plus/minus 2 (Miller's number)
20.3.1.3.3 Describe how interruption can affect short-term/working memory x x x x
(c) long term memory to include motor memory (skills) x x x x
20.3.1.3.4 State the subdivisions of long-term memory and give examples of their content x x x x
20.3.1.3.5 Explain that skills are kept primarily in the long-term memory x x x x
20.3.2 Human error and reliability x x x x
20.3.2.1 Reliability of human behaviour x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 25 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
20.3.2.1.1 Name and explain the factors that influence human reliability x x x x
20.3.2.1.2 Explain the effect of 'confirmation bias' x x x x
20.3.2.2 Error generation: social environment (group, organisation) x x x x
Swiss cheese model x x x x
20.3.2.2.1 Explain the concept of the 'error chain' ('swiss cheese' model) x x x x
20.3.2.2.2 State the meaning and consequences of 'latent errors' x x x x
Error generation: social environment (group, organisation) x x x x
20.3.2.2.3 Describe social (group) effects on error generation x x x x
20.3.3 Decision making x x x x
Decision-making concepts
(a) structure (phases)
20.3.3.1 (b) limits x x x x
(d) practical application
(c) risk assessment
20.3.3.1.1 Explain the terms 'deciding' and 'decision-making' x x x x
20.3.3.1.2 Describe the process of decision-making in the cockpit x x x x
20.3.3.1.3 Describe the main error sources and limits in an individual's decision-making mechanism x x x x
Describe the influences exerted by other group members on an individuals decision-making
20.3.3.1.4 x x x x
process ('risky shift')
20.3.4 Avoiding and managing errors: cockpit management x x x x
20.3.4.1 Safety awareness x x x x
(a) risk area awareness x x x x
Explain the need for being aware of not only one's own performance but that of others before and
20.3.4.1.1 x x x x
during a flight and the possible consequences or risks
(b) situational awareness x x x x
20.3.4.1.2 Describe the term 'situation awareness' x x x x
20.3.4.1.3 Identify factors that influence one's situation awareness both positively and negatively x x x x
20.3.4.1.4 Describe the importance of situation awareness in the context of flight safety x x x x
20.3.4.2 Communication: verbal and non-verbal communication x x x x
20.3.4.2.1 Define the terms 'communication' and 'closed-loop' x x x x
20.3.4.2.2 State the importance and problems of non-verbal communication x x x x
Describe the advantages and possible problems of using 'social' and 'professional' language in
20.3.4.2.3 x x x x
high- and low-workload situations

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 26 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
20.3.5 Human behaviour x x x x
20.3.5.1 Personality and attitudes x x x x
(a) development x x x x
20.3.5.1.1 Define and distinguish between 'personality', 'attitude' and 'behaviour' x x x x
(b) environmental influences x x x x
20.3.5.1.2 Describe the factors that determine an individual's behaviour x x x x
20.3.5.2 Identification of hazardous attitudes (error proneness) x x x x
Explain dangerous attitudes in aviation, e.g. impulsivity, invulnerability, complacency,
20.3.5.2.1 x x x x
resignation
20.3.6 Human overload and underload x x x x
20.3.6.1 Stress x x x x
(a) definition(s) x x x x
20.3.6.1.1 Explain the term 'stress' and why stress is a natural human reaction x x x x
(b) anxiety and stress x x x x
20.3.6.1.2 Explain the relationship between stress and anxiety x x x x
(c) effects of stress x x x x
20.3.6.1.3 Describe the relationship between stress and performance x x x x
20.3.6.1.4 List human properties that are affectd by stress x x x x
20.3.6.1.5 State that the stress experienced as a result of particular demands varies among individuals x x x x
Explain how stress is cumulative and how stress from one situation can be transferred to a
20.3.6.1.6 x x x x
different situation
20.3.6.1.7 Describe the effect of human underload/overload on cockpit performance x x x x
20.3.6.2 Fatigue and stress management x x x x
(a) types, causes and symptoms of fatigue x x x x
Explain the term 'fatigue' and differentiate between the two types of fatigue (short-term and
20.3.6.2.1 x x x x
chronic fatigue)
20.3.6.2.2 Name the causes of short-term and chronic fatigue x x x x
(b) effects of fatigue; x x x x
20.3.6.2.3 Identify the symptoms and describe the effects of fatigue x x x x
(c) coping strategies x x x x
20.3.6.2.4 List and describe strategies for coping with stress factors and stress reactions x x x x
(d) management techniques x x x x
20.3.6.2.5 Give examples of short-term methods of stress management x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 27 of 167

 20 HPL

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

HUMAN PERFORMANCE x x x x
20.3.6.2.6 Give examples of long-term methods of coping with stress x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 28 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
30.1 THE ATMOSPHERE (AND PHYSICAL BASICS) x x x x
30.1.1 Composition, extend and vertical division x x x x
30.1.1.1 Structure of the atmosphere (Basics) x x x x
List the composition of gases in dry air with 78% Nitrogen, 21% Oxygen and 1% CO2 and other
30.1.1.1.1 x x x x
gases
30.1.1.1.2 List the different layers of the atmosphere and know their approximate extent x x x x
30.1.1.1.3 Describe the temperature profile within the troposphere and stratosphere x x x x
30.1.1.1.4 Explain the relationship between air pressure, air density and air temperature x x x x
30.1.1.2 Troposphere x x x x
30.1.1.2.1 State that the troposphere contains water vapour responsible for weather phenomena x x x x
30.1.1.2.2 Describe the Tropopause as the boundary area between Troposphere and Stratosphere x x x x
State that temperature remains constant with altitude above the tropopause (up to approx. FL
30.1.1.2.3 x x x x
650)
30.1.2 Air temperature x x x x
30.1.2.1 Definition and units x x x x
30.1.2.1.1 State the unit for air temperature used in flight meteorology: degrees Celsius x x x x
30.1.2.1.2 Describe the physical character of air temperature x x x x
30.1.2.2 Vertical distribution of temperature x x x x
Describe the environmental temperature lapse with altitude within in the Tropopshere and
30.1.2.2.1 x x x x
Stratosphere
30.1.2.3 Transfer of heat x x x x
30.1.2.3.1 State conduction and latent heat as primary factors for tranfer of heat within the Troposphere x x x x
30.1.2.4 Lapse rates, stability and instability x x x x
State that adiabatic processes in the atmosphere assume no exchange of energy or heat with
30.1.2.4.1 x x x x
environmental air
Explain how the rate at which an air mass cools/heats when rising/descending depends on the
30.1.2.4.2 x x x x
relative humidity
State the dry adiabatic lapse rate as 3 deg C/1000 ft (or 1 deg C/100 m) and saturated adiabatic
30.1.2.4.3 x x x x
lapse rate with an average of 1.8 deg C/1000 ft (or 0.6 deg C/100 m)
30.1.2.4.4 Describe the terms 'stable', 'unstable' or 'conditionally unstable' in atmospheric conditions x x x x
30.1.2.5 Development of inversions and types of inversions x x x x
30.1.2.5.1 Describe an 'inversion' as a layer with increasing temperature with increasing height x x x x
30.1.2.5.2 Describe an 'isothermal layer' as a layer with constant temperature with increasing height x x x x
30.1.2.5.3 State that inversions may occur from ground up as ground inversions, or at any higher altitude x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 29 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
Temperature near the earth’s surface, surface effects, diurnal and seasonal variation, effect of
30.1.2.6 x x x x
clouds and effect of wind
30.1.2.6.1 Explain the effect of solar insolation on ground heating depending on latitude and seasons x x x x
Explain the differences in rate of temperature change of ground surfaces depending on the
30.1.2.6.2 x x x x
amount of water content
30.1.3 Atmospheric pressure x x x x
30.1.3.1 Barometric pressure and isobars x x x x
30.1.3.1.1 Define pressure and list units of pressure used in flight meteorology (mbar, hPa, inHg) x x x x

30.1.3.1.2 Describe the origin of atmospheric pressure from the gravitational force acting on the mass of air x x x x

Define isobars as lines connecting positions of equal barometric pressure at MSL, as shown on
30.1.3.1.3 x x x x
surface (analytic) charts
30.1.3.2 Pressure variation with height x x x x
State the decrease in air pressure with increasing altitude as approximately by 1/2 every 5.500 m
30.1.3.2.1 x x x x
or 18.000 ft
30.1.3.3 Reduction of pressure to mean sea level x x x x
Define QFF as air pressure measured on ground or airport elevation, reduced to MSL by assuming
30.1.3.3.1 x x x x
actual atmospheric parameters
Define QNH as air pressure measured on ground or airport elevation, reduced to MSL by assuming
30.1.3.3.2 x x x x
ISA conditions
30.1.3.4 Relationship between surface pressure centres and pressure centres aloft x x x x
Describe a high pressure center as an area where air pressure is higher than at any surrounding
30.1.3.4.1 x x x x
area, and where pressure levels bulge upwards
Describe a low pressure center as an area where air pressure is lower than at any surrounding
30.1.3.4.2 x x x x
area, and where pressure levels bulge downwards
30.1.3.4.3 State that the bulge in pressure levels (up- or downwards) may be different at different altitudes x x x x
30.1.4 Air density x x x x
30.1.4.1 Relationship between pressure, temperature and density x x x x
30.1.4.1.1 Define 'air density' x x x x
30.1.4.1.2 Describe the relationship between air density, temperature and pressure x x x x
30.1.5 ICAO standard atmosphere x x x x
30.1.5.1 Standard values x x x x
State the rate of decrease in temperature with altitude altitude in the ISA Troposphere as 0.65 deg
30.1.5.1.1 x x x x
C/100 m or 2 deg C/1000 ft

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 30 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
List the values of the ICAO standard atmosphere at MSL with +15 deg C, 1013.25 hPa, 1.225 kg/m3
30.1.5.1.2 x x x x
and 0% relative humidity
30.1.5.1.3 State the height of the tropopause in ISA with 11 km or 36.000 ft x x x x
30.1.6 Altimetry x x x x
30.1.6.1 Terminology and definitions x x x x
30.1.6.1.1 Define and describe the terms 'pressure altitude', 'QNH altitude' and 'true altitude' x x x x
30.1.6.2 Altimeter and altimeter settings x x x x
Describe the indication of the barometric altimeter as height above selected reference pressure
30.1.6.2.1 x x x x
level
Interpret the indication on the barometric altimeter when selecting QNH, QFE or 1013 hPa as
30.1.6.2.2 x x x x
reference pressure level
30.1.6.2.3 Convert QFE into QNH, using airfield elevation and MSL barometric lapse rate of 30 ft/hPa x x x x
Explain the difference between the altimeter settings and describe in which situations they are
30.1.6.2.4 x x x x
used
Explain why true altitude, indicated altitude and the height indication on a GNSS system might
30.1.6.2.5 x x x x
differ
30.1.6.2.6 Explain how temperatures lower than ISA affect the altimeter indication x x x x
30.1.6.2.7 Assess the hazards when flying from high to low pressure with constant altimeter setting x x x x
30.1.6.3 Calculations x x x x
Determine true altitude from pressure altitude or QNH altitude with QNH and temperature
30.1.6.3.1 x x x x
deviation from ISA given, using 30 ft/hPa and 4% per 10 deg deviation from ISA
Determine lowest usable flight level or lowest QNH altitude for given obstacle clearance, QNH and
30.1.6.3.2 x x x x
temperature deviation from ISA; using 30 ft/hPa and 4% per 10 deg deviation from ISA
30.1.6.4 Effect of accelerated airflow due to topography x x x x
Explain how altimeter indication may be affected from accelerated airflow through a valley or
30.1.6.4.1 x x x x
narrowed mountain ridge
30.2 Wind x x x x
30.2.1 Definition and measurement of wind x x x x
30.2.1.1 Definition and measurement x x x x
30.2.1.1.1 Describe how wind is measured for flight meteorological purposes x x x x
30.2.1.1.2 List the units used for reporting wind speed in flight meteorology as kt or m/s x x x x
30.2.2 Primary cause of wind x x x x
30.2.2.1 Primary cause of wind, pressure gradient, coriolis force and gradient wind x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 31 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
List the forces acting on air in the presence of pressure differences: gradient force and geostrophic
30.2.2.1.1 x x x x
(Coriolis) force
Describe the effect of the geostrophic force on airflow as deflecting to the right on the northern
30.2.2.1.2 x x x x
hemisphere

30.2.2.1.3 Describe the resulting airflow above the friction layer as parallel to the isobars (geostrophic wind) x x x x

30.2.2.2 Variation of wind in the friction layer x x x x

30.2.2.2.1 Explain the influence of surface friction on wind direction in the friction layer x x x x
Describe the approximate change in wind direction and speed in the ground layer compared to
30.2.2.2.2 friction-free layers over land: airflow directed approx. 30 degrees into low pressure compared with x x x x
isobar-parallel direction, wind speed approx. 50% of frictionless speed
State that the effects from friction depend on topographic conditions and are usually less above
30.2.2.2.3 x x x x
the sea
30.2.2.3 Effects of convergence and divergence x x x x
State that along low pressure troughs, deflection from isobar-parallel wind direction due to
30.2.2.3.1 x x x x
friction may lead to convergence effects
30.2.3 General global circulation x x x x
30.2.3.1 General circulation around the globe x x x x
30.2.3.1.1 Define the terms 'convergence' and 'divergence' and describe associated weather conditions x x x x
Describe the mid-latitudes (50 - 70N/S) as an area where polar air and subtropical air form the
30.2.3.1.2 x x x x
Polar Front as a wave-like boundary line around the globe
30.2.3.1.3 List the typical latitudes for High- and Low pressure areas resulting from global circulation x x x x
30.2.4 Local winds x x x x
30.2.4.1 Anabatic and katabatic winds, mountain and valley winds, Venturi effects, land and sea breezes x x x x
30.2.4.1.1 Define the terms 'anabatic' and 'katabatic winds', and 'mountain' and 'valley winds' x x x x

30.2.4.1.2 Describe possible hazards associated with strong winds perpendicular to a mountain ridge / range x x x x

Describe how local topography may effect the prevailling wind direction and speed through
30.2.4.1.3 x x x x
valleys
Describe how properties of ground surface may form local wind systems in absence of a prevailling
30.2.4.1.4 x x x x
wind direction (flat pressure pattern)
30.2.4.1.5 Explain the effect of sea breeze and land breeze with change of daytime x x x x
30.2.5 Mountain waves (standing waves, lee waves) x x x x
30.2.5.1 Origin and characteristics x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 32 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x

30.2.5.1.1 Explain possible hazards associated with strong winds perpendicular to a mountain ridge / range x x x x

30.2.5.1.2 Describe the formation of rotors and associated hazards x x x x

30.2.5.1.3 Describe the formation of lenticularis clouds and associated hazards x x x x
Describe the possible hazards and correct procedure when approaching a mountain ridge (never
30.2.5.1.4 x x x x
perpendicular)
30.2.6 Turbulence x x x x
30.2.6.1 Description and types of turbulence x x x x
30.2.6.1.1 Define turbulence conditions 'light' / 'medium' / 'severe' x x x x
30.2.6.2 Formation and location of turbulence x x x x
30.2.6.2.1 Describe typical zones with turbulence, and how they can be avoided x x x x
Describe hazards from turbulence close to the ground (e.g. when approaching, rows of trees,
30.2.6.2.2 x x x x
heating of surfaces)
30.3 THERMODYNAMICS x x x x
30.3.1 Humidity x x x x
30.3.1.1 Water vapour in the atmosphere x x x x
30.3.1.1.1 Describe air humidity as water molecules in gaseous form mixed with dry air x x x x
30.3.1.2 Temperature/dew point, relative humidity x x x x
30.3.1.2.1 Define 'absolute humidity' as mass of water vapour per volume of air, given in kg per cubic m x x x x
Define 'saturation humidity' as the maximum mass of water vapour per volume of air, given in kg
30.3.1.2.2 x x x x
per cubic m
30.3.1.2.3 Define 'relative humidity' as ratio of absolute to saturation humidity, ranging from 0 to 100% x x x x
30.3.1.2.4 Describe the dependence of saturation humidity on air temperature x x x x
Define 'dew point' as the temperature that air with given humidity must be cooled to reach
30.3.1.2.5 x x x x
saturation
30.3.1.2.6 Define 'temperature-dewpoint spread (TDS)' as difference between temperature and dew point
Describe the relationship between relative humidity, dew point and spread with change in
30.3.1.2.7 x x x x
temperature
30.3.2 Change of state of aggregation x x x x
30.3.2.1 Condensation, evaporation, sublimation, freezing and melting, latent heat x x x x
Explain the change between aggretation states of water (solid, liquid, gaseous) with respect to
30.3.2.1.1 x x x x
heat released or required
Define 'latent heat' as heat or energy released during phase transition from gaseous to liquid (or
30.3.2.1.2 x x x x
solid) state of water

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 33 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
30.3.3 Adiabatic processes x x x x
30.3.3.1 Adiabatic processes, stability of the atmosphere
Explain that ascending or descending air changes its temperature by expansion (or compression)
30.3.3.1.1 x x x x
due to changing ambient air pressure
Describe atmospheric stability with respect to environmental temperature lapse rate compared to
30.3.3.1.2 x x x x
dry and saturated adiabatic lapse rate
30.4 CLOUDS AND FOG x x x x
30.4.1 Cloud formation and description x x x x
30.4.1.1 Cooling by adiabatic expansion and by advection x x x x
30.4.1.1.1 State that any clound formation requires a lifting process x x x x
Describe thermal cloud formation process as sequence of dry adiabatic ascension and saturated
30.4.1.1.2 x x x x
adiabatic ascension with condensation and cloud formation

30.4.1.1.3 Explain the height of the cloud base with regard to the spread of the ascending air (at ground level) x x x x

30.4.1.1.4 Describe the effect of an upper level inversion on the height of the cloud tops x x x x
30.4.1.1.5 State that convection processes usually result in cloud formation x x x x
30.4.1.2 Cloud types and cloud classification x x x x
Describe the two basic cloud types Cumulus (Cu) and Stratus (St) with regard to flight hazards
30.4.1.2.1 x x x x
(turbulence and visibility)
30.4.1.2.2 Describe cloud types based on type of water content as liquid, supercooled (alto) and ice (cirrus) x x x x
30.4.1.2.3 Identify cumulus/stratus clouds on a given picture x x x x
30.4.1.2.4 Identifiy low/alto/cirro clouds on a given picture x x x x
30.4.1.2.5 Identify clouds forming across multiple layers (nimbo) x x x x
30.4.1.2.6 List the lettercodes for typical cloud types, e.g. Cu, Ac, St, As, Cb, Ci, Ns x x x x
30.4.1.3 Influence of inversions on cloud development x x x x
Describe the effect of an inversion layer on the lifting process with cloud development and
30.4.1.3.1 x x x x
atmospheric stability
30.4.2 Fog, mist, haze x x x x
30.4.2.1 General aspects x x x x
30.4.2.1.1 Describe the general conditions for fog formation with low spread and descending temperature x x x x
30.4.2.1.2 Associate 'fog' with visibility lower than 1000 m x x x x
30.4.2.1.3 Explain the difference between 'haze' (HZ) and 'mist' (BR) x x x x
30.4.2.1.4 Interpret spread information from ATIS with regard to propability of fog formation x x x x
30.4.2.2 Radiation fog x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 34 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
30.4.2.2.1 Explain the formation of radiation fog x x x x
List conditions likely for the formation of radiation fog with regard to wind, cloud cover and
30.4.2.2.2 x x x x
spread
30.4.2.2.3 State that formation and dissipation of radiation depends on time of day and year x x x x
State that formation and dissipation of radiation depends over larger areas can be monitored via
30.4.2.2.4 x x x x
satellite pictures (visual channel)
30.4.2.3 Advection fog x x x x
30.4.2.3.1 Explain the formation of advection fog x x x x
30.4.2.3.2 State example situations in which advection fog may occur x x x x
30.4.2.4 Steaming fog x x x x
30.4.2.4.1 Explain the formation of steaming fog (or arctic smoke) x x x x
30.4.2.4.2 State example situations in which steaming fog may occur x x x x
30.4.2.5 Frontal fog x x x x
30.4.2.5.1 Explain the formation of frontal (or mixing) fog x x x x
30.4.2.5.2 State example situations in which frontal fog may occur x x x x
30.4.2.6 Orographic fog (hill fog) x x x x
30.4.2.6.1 Explain the formation of orographic (or hill) fog x x x x
30.4.2.6.2 State example situations in which hill fog may occur x x x x
30.5 PRECIPITATION x x x x
30.5.1 Development of precipitation x x x x
30.5.1.1 Processes of development of precipitation x x x x
30.5.1.1.1 Describe the process of precipitation develepment as a combination of coalescence and icing x x x x
30.5.2 Types of precipitation x x x
30.5.2.1 Types of precipitation, relationship with cloud types x x x x
Explain the correlation of different types of precipitation (rain or showers of rain) with cloud type
30.5.2.1.1 x x x x
(St or Cu)
List and characterize different types of precipitation (e.g. drizzle, rain, showers of rain or snow)
30.5.2.1.2 x x x x
with regard to turbulence, visibility, duration and movement, assiciated clouds
30.6 AIR MASSES AND FRONTS x x x x
30.6.1 Air masses x x x x
30.6.1.1 Description, classification and source regions of air masses x x x x
30.6.1.1.1 List the air masses usually affecting the weather in mid Europe x x x x
Describe and identify air masses with respect to origin (tropical/polar) and track
30.6.1.1.2 x x x x
(maritime/continental)

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 35 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
30.6.1.2 Modifications of air masses x x x x
Describe how properties of air masses (humidity, temperature and stability) may change along
30.6.1.2.1 x x x x
their tracks
30.6.2 Fronts x x x x
30.6.2.1 General aspects x x x x
30.6.2.1.1 Describe a 'front' as a boundary between different air masses with active weather phenomena x x x x
30.6.2.2 Warm front, associated clouds, and weather x x x x
30.6.2.2.1 Describe the behavior of warm air approaching cold air (vertical profile) x x x x
30.6.2.2.2 List typical clouds and precipitation associated with a warm front x x x x
30.6.2.2.3 Describe typical visual meteorological flight conditions associated with warm fronts x x x x
30.6.2.2.4 List and explain the possible hazards to aviation, associated with a warm front x x x x
30.6.2.2.5 State the horizontal extension of the frontal area of a warm front x x x x
30.6.2.2.6 Name and identify warm fronts on surface weather charts x x x x
30.6.2.3 Cold front, associated clouds, and weather x x x x
30.6.2.3.1 Describe the behavior of cold air approaching warm air (vertical profile) x x x x
30.6.2.3.2 List typical clouds and precipitation associated with a cold front x x x x
30.6.2.3.3 Describe typical visual meteorological flight conditions associated with cold fronts x x x x
30.6.2.3.4 List and explain the possible hazards to aviation, associated with a cold front x x x x
30.6.2.3.5 State the horizontal extension of the frontal area of a cold front x x x x
30.6.2.3.6 Name and identify cold fronts on surface weather charts x x x x
30.6.2.4 Warm sector, associated clouds, and weather x x x x
Describe the typical weather phenomena and visual meteorological flight conditions after a
30.6.2.4.1 x x x x
warm front has passed with regards to clouds, precipitation, turbulence and visibility
30.6.2.5 Weather behind the cold front x x x x
Describe the typical weather phenomena and visual meteorological flight conditions after a cold
30.6.2.5.1 x x x x
front has passed with regards to clouds, precipitation, turbulence and visibility
30.6.2.6 Occlusions, associated clouds, and weather x x x x
Describe how the polar air mass ahead of the warm front re-combines with polar air behind the
30.6.2.6.1 x x x x
cold front
30.6.2.6.2 Describe typical visual meteorological flight conditions associated with occlusions x x x x
30.6.2.6.3 List possible hazards to aviation, associated with occlusions x x x x
30.6.2.6.4 Name and identify occlusion lines on surface weather charts x x x x
30.6.2.7 Stationary front, associated clouds, and weather x x x x
30.6.2.7.1 Describe a 'stationary front' as a front not showing any horizontal displacement x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 36 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
30.6.2.7.2 Describe typical visual meteorological flight conditions associated with stationary fronts x x x x
30.6.2.7.3 Name and identify stationary fronts on surface weather charts x x x x
30.6.2.8 Movement of fronts and pressure systems, life cycle x x x x
Describe the typical path of movement of a polar front low as in direction of the warm sector
30.6.2.8.1 x x x x
isobars
30.6.2.8.2 State the life cycle of a polar front low as in order of a few days x x x x
30.6.2.9 Changes of meteorological elements at a frontal wave x x x x
Describe the changes in air pressure, temperature and approximate wind direction with the
30.6.2.9.1 x x x x
passage of a polar front low
30.7 PRESSURE SYSTEMS x x x x
30.7.1 Anticyclone x x x x
Anticyclones, types, general properties, cold and warm anticyclones, ridges and wedges,
30.7.1.1 x x x x
subsidence
30.7.1.1.1 State that high pressure results from wide-area increase or inflow of air mass x x x x
Describe the atmospheric processes that result in subsidence and adiabatic warming (dynamic or
30.7.1.1.2 x x x x
warm high)
Describe the atmospheric processes that result in extreme cooling of air and increased air density
30.7.1.1.3 x x x x
(cold high)
30.7.2 Non-frontal depressions x x x x
30.7.2.1 Thermal, orographic and polar depressions, troughs x x x x
State that low pressure areas on different scale are usually associated with convergence and
30.7.2.1.1 x x x x
ascending air with formation of cloud and weather
Describe visual meteorological conditions typically found around depression and throughs (with
30.7.2.1.2 x x x x
showers and thunderstorms)
30.8 CLIMATOLOGY x x x x
30.8.1 Climatic zones x x x x
30.8.1.1 General seasonal circulation in the troposphere x x x x
30.8.1.1.1 Describe the seasonal variation of the polar front x x x x
30.8.1.1.2 List the typical locations of high and low pressure areas (e.g. Azores High, Iceland Low) x x x x
30.8.2 Typical weather situations in the mid-latitudes x x x x
30.8.2.1 Westerly situation x x x x
Describe the prevailing weather situation / phenomenas within the westerlies (prevailing westerly
30.8.2.1.1 x x x x
wind, passing of cyclones and frontal systems)
30.8.2.2 High-pressure area x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 37 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
Describe the prevailing weather situation with high pressure areas (warm and cold high) in
30.8.2.2.1 x x x x
summer and winter
30.8.2.3 Flat-pressure pattern x x x x
30.8.2.3.1 State that high pressure areas in summer are usually associated with flat pressure pattern x x x x
30.8.2.3.2 Describe the prevailing weather situation with flat pressure pattern x x x x
30.8.2.3.3 State that with a flat pressure pattern local wind systems may form x x x x
30.8.3 Local winds and associated weather x x x x
30.8.3.1 Mountain waves, e.g. Foehn x x x x
30.8.3.1.1 Explain the typical conditions and development of a mountain wave over the alps ('Foehn') x x x x
Identify the different zones with downdrafts, updrafts, rotors and lenticular clouds of a mountain
30.8.3.1.2 x x x x
wave (foehn system)
Describe the approximate magnitude of downdrafts associates with foehn (or similar) conditions
30.8.3.1.3 x x - -
with regard to maximum climb performance of aircraft
30.9 FLIGHT HAZARDS x x x x
30.9.1 Icing x x x x
30.9.1.1 Conditions for ice accretion x x x x
List meteorological conditions (humidity, temperature, precipitation) that affecting type and
30.9.1.1.1 x x x x
intensity of airframe icing
30.9.1.2 Types of ice accretion x x x x
30.9.1.2.1 List and describe different forms of ice build up (clear ice, rime ice and mixed ice) x x x x
30.9.1.2.2 List the different levels of icing intensity (light, moderate, severe) x x
30.9.1.3 Hazards of ice accretion, avoidance x x - -
Describe how airframe icing affects aircraft performance with regard to: lift, drag, mass, engine
30.9.1.3.1 x x - -
power, operational limits
30.9.1.3.2 Describe typical situations with possible hazards of airframe icing x x - -
30.9.1.3.3 Recall strategies / flight paths to leave a zone of icing on the fastest / most effective way x x - -
Describe the capabilities of 'ice prevention' or 'de-icing' systems commonly used in general
30.9.1.3.4 x x - -
aviation aircraft, also with regard to medium/severe icing
30.9.1.3.5 Explain under which conditions flight into known icing is approved / possible x x - -
30.9.2 Turbulence x x x x
30.9.2.1 Effects on flight, avoidance x x x x
30.9.2.1.1 Describe effects of of different types turbulence (light, moderate, severe) on the aircraft x x x x
List typical zones with turbulence and how to avoid them, e.g. below Cu clouds, shower
30.9.2.1.2 x x x x
downdrafts, mountain waves, inversions

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 38 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
30.9.3 Wind shear x x x x
30.9.3.1 Definition of wind shear x x x x
Define the term 'wind shear' as a significant change of wind speed and/or direction over a
30.9.3.1.1 x x x x
horizontal or vertical interval
30.9.3.1.2 Explain the possible hazards associated with horizontal or vertical wind sheer x x x x
30.9.3.2 Weather conditions for wind shear x x x x
30.9.3.2.1 Describe wind sheer associated with rain showers and vertical downdrafts x x x x
30.9.3.2.2 Describe wind sheer associated with strong inversion layers x x x x
Describe wind sheer associated with strong winds blowing cross mountain ridges ('Foehn'
30.9.3.2.3 x x x x
conditions)
30.9.3.3 Effects on flight, avoidance x x - -
Explain the effects of horizontal or vertical wind sheer on airspeed, glide path and climb
30.9.3.3.1 x x - -
performance
Explain how to identify and avoid hazards associated with wind shears from rain showers during
30.9.3.3.2 x x - -
final approach
Explain how to avoid hazards associated with wind shears with strong inversion layers during
30.9.3.3.3 x x - -
climb
30.9.4 Thunderstorms x x x x
30.9.4.1 Conditions for, and process of, development, forecast, location, type specification x x x x
List the conditions favourable for thunderstorm formation with regard to temperature, humidity
30.9.4.1.1 x x x x
and atmospheric stability
List typical weather situations where thunderstorms are likely to occur as single-cell storm or
30.9.4.1.2 x x x x
along frontal and squall lines
30.9.4.1.3 Explain the effect of topography on the formation of thunderstorms x x x x
30.9.4.2 Structure of thunderstorms, life cycle, squall lines, electricity in the atmosphere, static charges x x x x
30.9.4.2.1 Describe the formation and life-cycle of single-cell thunderstorms x x x x
30.9.4.2.2 List Ac Castellanis and Cb clouds as early indications for the onset of thunderstorm formation x x x x
Describe the possible hazards from thunderstorm with regard to turbulence, wind shear and
30.9.4.2.3 x x x x
eletrical discharges
30.9.4.3 Electrical discharges x x x x
30.9.4.3.1 Explain the possible hazards from lightning strikes to aircrafts in flight x x x x
30.9.4.3.2 Describe crackling noises on the radio as a result of lightning strikes in the immediate vicinity x x x x
30.9.4.4 Development and effects of downbursts x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 39 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
Describe the vertical outflow of air below thunderstorms resulting in vertical and horizontal wind
30.9.4.4.1 x x x x
shear as possible hazard to aircrafts in flight
30.9.4.5 Thunderstorm avoidance x x x x
Identify the stages of a thunderstorm / Cb cloud (initial stage, mature stage, dissipating stage)
30.9.4.5.1 x x x x
and possible hazards to aviation in each phase
30.9.4.5.2 Explain how to avoid thunderstorms by delaying take-off or final approach x x - -
30.9.4.5.3 Explain how to avoid single-cell thunderstorm enroute by small changes of heading x x - -
30.9.5 Inversions x x x x
30.9.5.1 Influence on aircraft performance x x - x
30.9.5.1.1 Explain the possible hazards from strong inversion layers with regard to aircraft performance x x - x
30.9.6 Hazards in mountainous areas x x x x
30.9.6.1 Influence of terrain on clouds and precipitation, frontal passage x x x x
30.9.6.1.1 Describe the effect of topography on frontal activity and formation of clouds x x x x
Describe possible hazards from stable air mass lifted due to horizontal movement against a
30.9.6.1.2 x x x x
mountain range with regard to visibility and cloud base
30.9.6.2 Vertical movements, mountain waves, wind shear, turbulence, ice accretion x x x x
30.9.6.2.1 Explain the hazards from flying into a valley with no meteorological possibility to get out of it x x x x

30.9.6.2.2 Describe possible hazards associated with strong winds perpendicular to a mountain ridge / range x x x x

30.9.6.3 Development and effect of valley inversions x x x x

30.9.6.3.1 Describe the development of valley inversions x x x x
30.9.6.3.2 Explain the hazards when departing through a strong valley inversion x x x x
30.9.7 Visibility-reducing phenomena x x x x
30.9.7.1 Reduction of visibility caused by precipitation and obscuration x x x x
30.9.7.1.1 List possible reasons for reduced visibility x x x x
30.9.7.1.2 Explain possible hazards from a reduction in visibility x x x x
30.9.7.2 Reduction of visibility caused by other phenomena x x x x
30.9.7.2.1 Explain why flying below an inversion layer visibility may be reduced x x x x
30.10 METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION x x x x
30.10.1 Observation x x x x
30.10.1.1 Surface observations x x x x
30.10.1.1.1 State that 'surface observation' shows various atmospheric parameters taken on a specific time x x x x
30.10.1.1.2 Identify the VALID TIME from a given synoptic chart or observation message x x x x
30.10.1.2 Radiosonde observations x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 40 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
30.10.1.2.1 Determine the temperature and dew point at a given altitude from a radio sonde plot x x x x
30.10.1.2.2 Determine cloud or fog layers by interpretation of temperature / dew point plots x x x x
30.10.1.3 Satellite observations x x x x
30.10.1.3.1 Explain the purpose of meteorological satellite imagery x x x x
30.10.1.3.2 Describe different types of satellity image construction (VIS / IR) x x x x
30.10.1.3.3 Describe and interpret data from meteorological satellite imagery x x x x
30.10.1.4 Weather radar observations x x x x
30.10.1.4.1 Explain the purpose of ground-based WX radar x x x x
30.10.1.4.2 Describe the operating principle of WX radar x x x x
30.10.1.4.3 Describe and interpret information from WX radar images x x x x
30.10.1.5 Aircraft observations and reporting x x x x
State that pilot reports provide the most detailled and timely accurate information about
30.10.1.5.1 x x x x
possible hazardous situations enroute
30.10.2 Weather charts x x x x
30.10.2.1 Significant weather charts x x x x
30.10.2.1.1 Define the term 'significant weather' as potential hazards relevant for flight planning decisions x x x x
30.10.2.1.2 Describe the structure of Significant Weather Charts (SWC) with chart and legend part x x x x
Interpret chart symbolics for significant weather, weather areas ('bubbles') and lower and upper
30.10.2.1.3 x x x x
interval limits of turbulence and icing
30.10.2.1.4 Identify areas from a significant weather chart which may impose hazards to a planned flight x x x x
30.10.2.2 Surface charts x x x x
30.10.2.2.1 Describe the basic contents shown in surface weather charts (synoptic or analytic charts) x x x x
30.10.2.2.2 Interpret chart symbolic from surface weather charts with regard to pressure areas and fronts x x x x
30.10.2.2.3 Identify areas from a weather chart which may impose hazards to a planned flight x x x x
Describe the wind direction to be expected on a chart showing high and low pressure areas and
30.10.2.2.4 x x x x
isobars
30.10.3 Information for flight planning x x x x
30.10.3.1 Aviation weather messages x x x x
30.10.3.1.1 Define METAR and describe content with structure, time of issue and validity period x x x x
30.10.3.1.2 Define TAF and describe content with structure, time of issue and validity period x x x x
30.10.3.1.3 Define ATIS and describe content with structure, time of issue and validity period x x x x
30.10.3.1.4 List and interpret the lettergroups for METAR and TAF commonly used in Europe x x x x
30.10.3.1.5 Extract the validity period of a TAF message from a given TAF message x x x x
30.10.3.1.6 Decide if indicated weather conditions allow a VFR or SVFR flight x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 41 of 167

 30 MET

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

METEOROLOGY x x x x
30.10.3.2 Meteorological broadcasts for aviation x x x x
30.10.3.2.1 Describe VOLMET service and possible application on enroute flights x x x x
30.10.3.3 Use of meteorological documents x x x x
List type of weather charts and reports suitable for pre-flight (flight planning) and and enroute
30.10.3.3.1 x x x x
phases of flight
30.10.3.4 Meteorological warnings x x x x
30.10.3.4.1 Describe SIGMET and list criteria for issueing x x x x
Describe PIREPs and their relevance for providing most accurate information about flight hazards
30.10.3.4.2 x x x x
currently observed
30.10.4 Meteorological services x x - -
30.10.4.1 World area forecast system (WAFS) and meteorological offices x x - -
Refereence:
https://www.ica
State the purpose of WAFS as to provide the worldwide aviation community with operational
o.int/APAC/Docu
30.10.4.1.1 meteorological forecasts and information about meteorological phenomena required for flight x x - -
ments/edocs/WA
planning and safe, economic, and efficient air navigation
FS_Service_Refere
nce_v2.pdf
Refereence:
https://www.ica
State that models provided by WAFS mainly provide global gridded forecasts of upper levels (FL
o.int/APAC/Docu
30.10.4.1.2 100 and above) including winds, temperature and humidity, and speed and flight level of x x - -
ments/edocs/WA
maximum wind
FS_Service_Refere
nce_v2.pdf
30.10.4.1.3 Describe how data from numerical weather prediction models can be used during flight x x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 42 of 167

 40 COM

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

COMMUNICATION x x x x
40.1 VFR COMMUNICATIONS x x x x
40.1.1 Definitions x x x x
40.1.1.1 Meanings and significance of associated terms x x x x
40.1.1.1.1 Define commonly used air traffic services (ATS) terms for stations x x x x
40.1.1.2 ATS abbreviations x x x x
Define commonly used ATS abbreviations: flight conditions, airspace, services, time, VFR-related
40.1.1.2.1 x x x x
terms
40.1.1.3 Q-code groups commonly used in RTF airground communications x x x x
Define Q-code groups commonly used in RT air-ground communications: pressure settings (QNH,
40.1.1.3.1 x x x x
QFE, Standard)
Define Q-code groups commonly used in RT air-ground communications: directions (Magnetic)
40.1.1.3.2 x x x x
and bearings (QDM, QDR)
40.1.1.3.3 Give example situations for obtaining bearing information in flight x x x x
40.1.1.4 Categories of messages x x x x
40.1.1.4.1 Name different categories of radio messages x x x x
40.1.1.4.2 Name the correct priority of radio messages x x x x
Identify to which category of messages a type of message belongs and identify the associated
40.1.1.4.3 x x x x
priority indicator
40.1.2 General operating procedures x x x x
40.1.2.1 Transmission of letters x x x x
40.1.2.1.1 Know and use the phonetic alphabet used in RT ('ICAO alphabet') x x x x
Explain which names are transmitted phonetically (e.g. VOR, NDB, QNH) and which have to be
40.1.2.1.2 x x x x
spelled
40.1.2.2 Transmission of numbers (including level information) x x x x
Describe the method of transmission of numbers: pronunciation, single digits, whole hundreds
40.1.2.2.1 x x x x
and whole thousands
40.1.2.2.2 Describe the abbreviation numbers using the words 'triple' or 'double' x x x x
40.1.2.2.3 State how to transmit altitudes, flight levels and heights correctly x x x x
40.1.2.2.4 State how to transmit headings and bearings correctly x x x x
40.1.2.2.5 State how to transmit frequencies correctly x x x x
40.1.2.2.6 State how to transmit QNH correctly x x x x
40.1.2.2.7 State how to transmit visibility correctly, and which units used x x x x
40.1.2.3 Transmission of time x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 43 of 167

 40 COM

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

COMMUNICATION x x x x
40.1.2.3.1 State that UTC is used as standard time reference in RT x x x x

40.1.2.3.2 Describe the ways of transmitting time: using only minutes, or minutes and hours, when required x x x x

40.1.2.4 Transmission technique x x x x

40.1.2.4.1 Explain the causes and possible safety impacts of a blocked frequency x x x x
Explain why, after switching to a certain frequency, the frequency should be monitored before
40.1.2.4.2 x x x x
making an initial call
40.1.2.5 Standard words and phrases (relevant RTF phraseology included) x x x x
40.1.2.5.1 Define the meaning of standard words and phrases x x x x
Recognise, describe and use the correct standard phraseology for each phase of a VFR flight:
40.1.2.5.2 x x x x
before taxi, taxi, departure, en route, circuit, final, landing, after landing
40.1.2.5.3 State how to affirm or negate questions correctly x x x x
40.1.2.5.4 State how to make use of radio phraseology to correct errors x x x x
40.1.2.5.5 State how to request the repetition of a certain part of a message x x x x
40.1.2.5.6 Describe the procedure for 'blind transmissions' x x x x
40.1.2.6 R/T call signs for aeronautical stations including use of abbreviated call signs x x x x
40.1.2.6.1 Name the two parts of the call sign of an aeronautical station x x x x
40.1.2.6.2 Identify the call-sign suffixes for aeronautical stations x x x x
40.1.2.6.3 Explain when the call sign may be omitted or abbreviated to the use of suffix only x x x x
40.1.2.7 R/T call signs for aircraft including use of abbreviated call signs x x x x
40.1.2.7.1 Describe the composition and transmission of an aircraft call sign x x x x
40.1.2.7.2 Describe the abbreviated forms for aircraft call signs x x x x
40.1.2.7.3 State that upon initial contact all characters of an aircraft have to be transmitted x x x x
State that an abbreviated call sign must only be used if it was already abbreviated by the ground
40.1.2.7.4 x x x x
station
40.1.2.8 Transfer of communication x x x x
40.1.2.8.1 Describe the procedure for transfer of communication: by ground station, or by aircraft x x x x
40.1.2.9 Test procedures including readability scale x x x x
40.1.2.9.1 Explain how to test radio transmission and reception x x x x
40.1.2.9.2 State the readability scale and explain its meaning x x x x
40.1.2.10 Read back and acknowledgement requirements x x x x
40.1.2.10.1 Describe the requirement to read back ATC clearances x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 44 of 167

 40 COM

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

COMMUNICATION x x x x
Describe the requirement to read back other data such as runway, secondary surveillance radar
40.1.2.10.2 x x x x
(SSR) codes, etc.
40.1.2.10.3 Give examples of how to correctly read back ATC instructions x x x x
40.1.2.10.4 Give examples of data that shall NOT be read back (e.g. wind, traffic information, etc.) x x x x
40.1.2.10.5 State in which cases leaving frequency has to be approved or reported x x x x
40.1.3 Relevant weather information terms (VFR) x x x x
40.1.3.1 Aerodrome weather x x x x
List the contents of aerodrome weather reports and state units of measurement used: wind,
40.1.3.1.1 x x x x
visibility, cloud, temperture, dew point, pressure, supplementary information
Define meteorological terms used with aviation weather messages (e.g. 'ceiling', 'CAVOK', 'FEW',
40.1.3.1.2 x x x x
'SCT', 'BKN', 'OVC')
40.1.3.2 Weather broadcast x x x x
40.1.3.2.1 List the sources (VOLMET and ATIS units) of weather information available for aircraft in flight x x x x
40.1.3.2.2 Describe situations in which a pilot can obtain weather broadcasts x x x x
40.1.3.2.3 Explain the terms 'ATIS' and 'VOLMET' and their relevant content x x x x
40.1.3.2.4 Explain and demonstrate how to decode ATIS messages x x x x
40.1.4 Action required to be taken in case of communication failure x x x x
40.1.4.1 Procedures x x x x
40.1.4.1.1 Describe procedures in case of communication failure in uncontrolled airspace x x x x
Describe procedures in case of communication failure when approaching or in controlled airspace
40.1.4.1.2 x x x x
(e.g. CTR)
40.1.4.1.3 Identify frequencies to be used in attempt to establish communication x x x x
40.1.4.1.4 State the SSR code that may be used to indicate communication failure x x x x
40.1.5 Distress and urgency procedures x x x x
Distress (definition, frequencies, watch of distress frequencies, distress signal and distress
40.1.5.1 x x x x
message)
40.1.5.1.1 Define 'DISTRESS' x x x x
40.1.5.1.2 State the wording used with distress messages ('MAYDAY') x x x x
40.1.5.1.3 State the frequencies that should be used by aircraft in DISTRESS x x x x
40.1.5.1.4 State the SSR codes that may be used by aircraft in emergency x x x x
40.1.5.1.5 Describe the action to be taken by the station which receives a DISTRESS message x x x x
40.1.5.1.6 Describe the action to be taken by all other stations when a DISTRESS procedure is in progress x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 45 of 167

 40 COM

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

COMMUNICATION x x x x
List the correctly sequenced elements of a DISTRESS signal/message and describe the message
40.1.5.1.7 x x x x
content
40.1.5.2 Urgency (definition, frequencies, urgency signal and urgency message) x x x x
40.1.5.2.1 Define 'URGENCY' x x x x
40.1.5.2.2 State the wording used with urgency messages ('PAN PAN') x x x x
40.1.5.2.3 State the frequencies that should be used by aircraft in URGENCY x x x x
40.1.5.2.4 State that URGENCY messages take priority over all other messages except DISTRESS x x x x
40.1.5.2.5 Describe the action to be taken by the station which receives an URGENCY message x x x x
40.1.5.2.6 Describe the action to be taken by all other stations when an URGENCY procedure is in progress x x x x
List the correctly sequenced elements of an URGENCY signal/message and describe the message
40.1.5.2.7 x x x x
content
General principles of VHF propagation and allocation of x
40.1.6 x x x x
frequencies
40.1.6.1 General principles: spectrum, bands, range x x x x

40.1.6.1.1 State the properties of electromagnetic waves (e.g. frequency, wavelength, speed of propagation) x x x x

Describe the radio-frequency spectrum of the bands into which the radio-frequency spectrum is
40.1.6.1.2 x x x x
divided
State the frequency range of the VHF band, and identify frequency used for VHF voice
40.1.6.1.3 x x x x
communication
40.1.6.1.4 State the frequency band and channel spacing for VHF radio communications x x x x
List factors which reduce the effective range and quality of VHF radio transmissions (e.g.
40.1.6.1.5 x x x x
tranmission power, altitude, thunderstorms etc.)
40.1.6.1.6 Describe the difference between a 'channel' and a 'frequency' x x x x
40.1.6.1.7 Describe the difference between 8,33 kHz and 25 kHz channel spacing x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 46 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
SPL: chapter 5.1
51.1 Subsonic aerodynamics x - x - - Aerodynamics
(airflow)
51.1.1 Basic concepts, laws and definitions x - x - -
51.1.1.1 Laws and definitions x - x - -
(a) conversion of units x - x - -
(b) Newton´s laws x - x - -
(c) Bernoulli’s equation and venturi x - x - -
(d) static pressure, dynamic pressure and total pressure x - x - -
(e) density x - x - -
(f) IAS and TAS x - x - -
51.1.1.1.1 Define 'static pressure', 'dynamic pressure' and 'total pressure' x - x - -
Describe the relationship of total, static and dynamic pressure with airflow through a narrowed
51.1.1.1.2 x - x - -
cross section (Bernoulli' law)
51.1.1.1.3 Describe the relationship of IAS and TAS with dynamic pressure x - x - -
51.1.1.2 Basics about airflow x - x - -
(a) streamline x - x - -
(b) two-dimensional airflow x - x - -
(c) three-dimensional airflow x - x - -
Explain the concept of 'streamline pattern' with regard to airflow speed, static and dynamic
51.1.1.2.1 x - x - -
pressure
Apply Bernoulli's law to the airflow around an aerofoil with regard to speed and change in static
51.1.1.2.2 x - x - -
and dynamic pressure
51.1.1.3 Aerodynamic forces on surfaces x - x - -
(a) resulting airforce x - x - -
51.1.1.3.1 Describe the total aerodynamic force on a wing as a vectorized sum of drag and lift force x - x - -
(b) lift x - x - -

51.1.1.3.2 Describe the 'lift force' resulting from pressure differences on the upper and lower side of the wing x - x - -
51.1.1.3.3 State that the lift force acts perpendicular to the airflow x - x - -
(c) drag x - x - -
51.1.1.3.4 State that the drag force acts opposite to the direction of the flight path x - x - -
(d) angle of attack x - x - -
51.1.1.3.5 Define the term 'angle of attack (AOA)' x - x - -
Describe how lift and drag change with changing AOA or modifications of the airfoil (e.g. when
51.1.1.3.6 x - x - -
extending high-lift devices)
51.1.1.4 Shape of an aerofoil section x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 47 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
(a) thickness to chord ratio x - x - -
(b) chord line x - x - -
(c) camber line x - x - -
(d) camber x - x - -
(e) angle of attack x - x - -
Explain the basic reasons for designing an 'airfoil' in the typical way (round leading edge, camber,
51.1.1.4.1 x - x - -
pointed trailing edge)
Name and identify geometric properties of an airfoil (nose radius, chord, chamber, location of
51.1.1.4.2 x - x - -
max. thickness, angle of attack etc.)
51.1.1.4.3 Describe and identify laminar and symmetric airfoils x - x - -
51.1.1.4.4 State and explain the advantages and disadvantages of a laminar airfoil x - x - -
51.1.1.4.5 State and explain advantages and disadvantages of a symmetric airfoil and its common usage x - x - -
51.1.1.5 The wing shape x - x - -
(a) aspect ratio x - x - -
(b) root chord x - x - -
(c) tip chord x - x - -
(d) tapered wings x - x - -
(e) wing planform x - x - -
51.1.1.5.1 Define 'aspect ratio' x - x - -
51.1.1.5.2 Identify wings with high and wings with low aspect ratio x - x - -
51.1.1.5.3 Explain the influence of aspect ratio on flight characteristics x - x - -
51.1.1.5.4 Name and identify typical wing shapes (e.g. straight, tapered, delta or swept back wings) x - x - -
51.1.1.5.5 Define 'wing span' x - x - -
Name and identify the main geometric parameters of a wing (e.g. angle of incidence, tip and root
51.1.1.5.6 x - x - -
chord, taper ratio, chord at tip and wing root)
51.1.2 The two-dimensional airflow about an aerofoil x - x - -
51.1.2.1 Streamline pattern x - x - -
51.1.2.1.1 Describe the air flow around a streamline pattern (depiction with stream lines) x - x - -
51.1.2.1.2 Describe the changes in air flow velocity around an airplane’s wing x - x - -
51.1.2.2 Stagnation point x - x - -
51.1.2.2.1 Define and identify the stagnation point (from depictions) x - x - -
51.1.2.2.2 Describe the movement of the stagnation point with angle of attack x - x - -
51.1.2.3 Pressure distribution x - x - -
Apply Bernoulli’s law to the streamline pattern around an airfoil in terms of changes in flow
51.1.2.3.1 x - x - -
velocity and distribution of pressure (static / dynamic / total)
51.1.2.3.2 Describe lift generation in terms of pressure distribution x - x - -
51.1.2.4 Centre of pressure x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 48 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
51.1.2.4.1 Define and interpret 'center of pressure' as a point the resulting aeordynamic force acts on x - x - -
51.1.2.4.2 Explain the longitudinal movement of center of pressure with changing angle of attack x - x - -
51.1.2.5 Influence of angle of attack x - x - -
51.1.2.5.1 Describe the change in lift coefficient (cL) with angle of attack x - x - -
51.1.2.6 Flow separation at high angles of attack x - x - -

51.1.2.6.1 Explain the reduction in lift (cL) beyond a critical angle of attack by beginning of flow separation x - x - -
51.1.2.6.2 Describe the change in center of pressure with flow separation x - x - -
51.1.2.7 The lift – α graph x - x - -
Describe the relationship of angle of attack (AOA) with lift coefficient (cL) by use of the cL/AOA
51.1.2.7.1 x - x - -
graph
51.1.3 The coefficients x - x - -
51.1.3.1 The lift coefficient cL: the lift formula x - x - -
51.1.3.1.1 Explain the meaning of the coefficients of lift cL and its usage in the lift formula x - x - -
51.1.3.1.2 State the formula for lift qualitatively (factors, dependencies, no calculations) x - x - -
51.1.3.2 The drag coefficient Cd: the drag formula x - x - -
51.1.3.2.1 Explain the meaning of the coefficients of drag cD and its usage in the drag formula x - x - -
51.1.3.2.2 State the formula for drag qualitatively (factors, dependencies, no calculations) x - x - -
51.1.3.3 Correlation of cL with cD x - x - -
51.1.3.3.1 Explain the correlation of cL and cD for various flight phases using the cL-cD diagram x - x - -
51.1.4 The three-dimensional airflow round a wing and a fuselage x - x - -
51.1.4.1 Streamline pattern x - x - -
(a) span-wise flow and causes x - x - -
(b) tip vortices and angle of attack x - x - -
(c) upwash and downwash due to tip vortices x - x - -

(d) wake turbulence behind an aeroplane (causes, distribution and duration of the phenomenon) x - x - -

51.1.4.1.1 Describe the pressure equalization between upper and lower side of the wing x - x - -
Describe 'wake turbulence' as resulting from pressure equalization at the wing tips and downwash
51.1.4.1.2 x - x - -
effects behind an aeroplane
51.1.4.1.3 Explain possible hazards from wake turbulence for succeeding aircraft x - x - -
State the factors that affect the magnitude of wake turbulence: weight, speed and configuration
51.1.4.1.4 x - x - -
of the aircraft
51.1.4.1.5 State the most hazardous conditions for the magnitude of wake turbulence as 'heavy and slow' x - x - -
51.1.4.2 Induced drag x - x - -
(a) influence of tip vortices on the angle of attack x - x - -
(b) the induced local α x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 49 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
(c) influence of induced angle of attack on the diretion of the lift vector x - x - -
(d) induced drag and angle of attack x - x - -
(e) development of induced drag and influencing parameters x - x - -
51.1.4.2.1 Explain the formation of induced drag and tip vortices x - x - -
51.1.4.2.2 Describe the change in induced drag in dependence of the aeroplane's angle of attack (air speed) x - x - -
51.1.4.2.3 Explain how the shape of a wing can affect the formation of induced drag x - x - -
51.1.4.2.4 Explain how using winglets can reduce induced drag x - x - -
51.1.5 Drag x - x - -
51.1.5.1 The parasite drag x - x - -
(a) pressure drag x - x - -
51.1.5.1.1 Describe the formation of pressure drag (form drag) x - x - -
51.1.5.1.2 Assess the drag of different shapes (e.g. ball, plate, drop, etc. with the same frontal area) x - x - -
(b) interference drag x - x - -
51.1.5.1.3 Describe the formation of interference drag x - x - -
51.1.5.1.4 State reasons for aerodynamic fairing of airframe parts, e.g. wheels x - x - -
State that the total drag of connected parts is usually greater than the drag of the single parts
51.1.5.1.5 x - x - -
(negative interference)
(c) friction drag x - x - -
51.1.5.1.6 Describe the formation of friction drag x - x - -
51.1.5.1.7 Explain the influence of ice, dirt and rough surfaces on friction drag and boundary layer x - x - -
51.1.5.2 The parasite drag and speed x - x - -
51.1.5.2.1 Describe the change in parasite drag with increasing air speed x - x - -
51.1.5.2.2 State that double airspeed results in four times the parasite drag (square law) x - x - -
51.1.5.3 The induced drag and speed x - x - -
51.1.5.3.1 Describe the change in induced drag with increasing air speed x - x - -
51.1.5.4 The total drag x - x - -
51.1.5.4.1 State that total drag is composed from parasite drag and induced drag x - x - -
51.1.5.4.2 Explain why total drag is lowest at a certain airspeed x - x - -
51.1.5.4.3 Identify curves for parasite drag, induced drag and total drag in drag vs. airspeed plots x - x - -
51.1.6 The ground effect x - x - -
51.1.6.1 Effect on take off and landing characteristics of an aeroplane x - x - -
51.1.6.1.1 Explain the effects of entering and leaving ground effect. x - x - -
SPL: chapter 5.6
51.1.7 The stall x - x - - Stalling and
spinning
51.1.7.1 Flow separation at increasing angles of attack
(a) the boundary layer x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 50 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
51.1.7.1.1 Explain the term 'boundary layer'
(1) laminar layer
51.1.7.1.2 Describe a laminar boundary layer and identify it on a streamline pattern x - x - -
(2) turbulent layer x - x - -
51.1.7.1.3 Describe a turbulent boundary layer and identify it on a streamline pattern x - x - -
51.1.7.1.4 Explain the different behaviour on flow separation with laminar or turbulent boundary layers x - x - -
(3) transition x - x - -
51.1.7.1.5 Describe the transition point and locate it in streamline pattern x - x - -
(b) separation point x - x - -
51.1.7.1.6 Describe the separation point and locate it in streamline pattern x - x - -
(c) influence of angle of attack x - x - -
State how the location of the transition- and separation point changes with increasing angle of
51.1.7.1.7 x - x - -
attack
(d) influence on x - x - -
(1) pressure distribution x - x - -
(2) location of centre of pressure x - x - -
(3) CL x - x - -
51.1.7.1.8 Explain the reduction in lift / cL at increasing AOA using the cL-alpha graph x - x - -
51.1.7.1.9 Describe the 'critical angle of attack' and factors affecting it x - x - -
(4) CD x - x - -
(5) pitch moments x - x - -
(e) buffet x - x - -
51.1.7.1.10 Describe the effects of flow separation onset ('buffeting') x - x - -
(f) use of controls x - x - -
Explain why pulling the yoke is not an adequate way to increase altitude when flying at a low air
51.1.7.1.11 x - - - -
speed
51.1.7.2 The stall speed x - x - -
(a) in the lift formula x - x - -
51.1.7.2.1 Explain the stall speed (IAS) from the factors speed and cL in the lift formula x - x - -
(b) 1g stall speed x - x - -
51.1.7.2.2 Describe the change in stall speed with varying mass x - x - -
51.1.7.2.3 Derive the stall speeds from markings at the air speed indicator x - x - -
51.1.7.2.4 State for which airplane weight the stall speed marking on the air speed indicator is applicable x - x - -
(c) influence of x - x - -
(1) the centre of gravity x - x - -
State that the load distribution inside the aircraft can have an influence on stall/spin
51.1.7.2.5 x - x - -
characteristics

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 51 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
(2) power setting x - x - -
(3) altitude (IAS) x - x - -
51.1.7.2.6 Explain why the stall speed (IAS) is independent of altitude x - x - -
(4) wing loading x - x - -
(5) load factor n: (i) definition, (ii) turns, (iii) forces x - x - -
51.1.7.2.7 Define 'load factor (n)' x - x - -
51.1.7.2.8 Explain the relationship between load factor and stall speed x - x - -
List situations during which the load factor increases, e.g. during stall recovery, aerobatics, turns
51.1.7.2.9 x - x - -
or gusts
51.1.7.2.10 Explain the increase in stall speeds during turns x - x - -
51.1.7.3 The initial stall in span-wise direction x - x - -
(a) influence of planform x - x - -
(b) geometric twist (wash out) x - x - -
51.1.7.3.1 Describe the influence of washout on an aircraft's stall characteristics x - x - -
51.1.7.3.2 Describe the difference between aerodynamic and geometric washout x - x -
(c) use of ailerons x - x - -
51.1.7.3.3 Explain the effect of washout on the effectiveness of ailerons at low speed x - x - -
51.1.7.4 Stall warning x - x - -
(a) importance of stall warning x - x - -
(b) speed margin x - x - -
51.1.7.4.1 State the approximate warning threshold of a stall warning (kt / % of stall speed) x - x - -
(c) buffet x - x - -
51.1.7.4.2 Explain the effect of low speed / stall buffeting x - x - -
(d) stall strip x - x - -
(e) flapper switch x - x - -
Describe typical stall warning systems commonly used on piston engine aeroplanes (e.g. via
51.1.7.4.3 x - - - -
movement of stagnation point with flapper switch, suction hole)
(f) recovery from stall x - x - -
51.1.7.4.4 Describe the general procedures for preventing imminant stall, if not stated other in AFM/POH x - x - -
51.1.7.5 Special phenomena of stall x - x - -
(a) the power-on stall x - x - -
(b) climbing and descending turns x - x - -
(c) t-tailed aeroplane x - x - -
(d) avoidance of spins x - x - -
(1) spin development x - x - -
51.1.7.5.1 Describe the 'spin' and 'spiral dive' flight states x - x - -
51.1.7.5.2 List flight situations that might lead to a spin x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 52 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
State that spinning usually is a stationary flight situation that does not impose heavy loads on the
51.1.7.5.3 x - x - -
airframe
State that intentional spinning is an aerobatic manoeuver and must not be executed without
51.1.7.5.4 x - x - -
aerobatic rating and/or aeroplane approved for the manoeuver
(2) spin recognition x - x - -
51.1.7.5.5 Describe the difference between a fully developed spin and a stall x - x - -
51.1.7.5.6 Explain the term 'flat spin' x - x - -
Explain the dangers imposed by flat spin and describe how to avoid such situations (e.g. by correct
51.1.7.5.7 x - x - -
loading)
(3) spin recovery x - x - -
51.1.7.5.8 State that recovery from a spin usually comes with greater loads on the aircraft structure x - x - -
51.1.7.5.9 Describe the general procedures for spin recovery, if not stated other in AFM/POH x - x - -
Explain the possible negative influences / uselessness of ailerons during spin recovery, and that the
51.1.7.5.10 x - x - -
rudder is still effective
Explain how, after the spinning turns have stopped, too sudden back-pressure on the elevator can
51.1.7.5.11 x - x - -
cause a secondary stall
(e) ice (in stagnation point and on surface) x - x - -
(1) absence of stall warning x - x - -
(2) abnormal behaviour of the aircraft during stall x - x - -
Explain how icing on the airframe and wings can cause different stall speeds and stall
51.1.7.5.12 x - x - -
characteristics
51.1.7.5.13 Describe how greater amounts of ice or rain can jam a stall warning x - - - -
51.1.8 CL augmentation x - - - -
51.1.8.1 Trailing edge flaps and the reasons for use in take-off and landing x - - - -
(a) influence on cL-alpha-graph x - - - -
State that high-lift devices are used to lower approach speed, to increase maximum cL and
51.1.8.1.1 x - - - -
decrease required take-off/landing distance
51.1.8.1.2 Describe the effect of extending flaps with regard to the cL-alpha-graph x - - - -
(b) different types of flaps x - - - -
Explain the general working principles of high-lift devices, e.g. increase of chamber, increase of
51.1.8.1.3 x - - - -
wing area
51.1.8.1.4 Describe how the stall speed changes by deploying / retracting flaps x - - - -
51.1.8.1.5 Describe and identify common trailing edge high-lift devices as such and explain their function x - - - -
51.1.8.1.6 Explain the usage of flaps for take-off and landing x - - - -
51.1.8.1.7 State the procedure to retract flaps after take-off or go-around x - - - -
(c) flap asymmetry x - - - -
51.1.8.1.8 Explain the effect of asymmetric deployment of flaps x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 53 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
51.1.8.1.9 Describe the correct actions in case of asymmetric flaps deployment x - - - -
(d) influence on pitch movement x - - - -
51.1.8.1.10 Explain the 'ballooning' effect when deploying flaps, and describe how to counteract x - - - -
51.1.8.2 Leading edge devices and the reasons for use in take-off and landing x - - - -
Explain the general working principles of leading edge high-lift devices, e.g. refreshing the
51.1.8.2.1 x - - - -
boundary layer
Describe the differences between leading- and trailing edge high-lift devices with regard to critical
51.1.8.2.2 x - - - -
angle of attack and drag
51.1.8.2.3 Identify common leading edge high-lift devices as such and be able to explain their function. x - - - -
51.1.9 The boundary layer x - x - -
51.1.9.1 Different types x - x - -
(a) laminar x - x - -
51.1.9.1.1 Describe a laminar boundary layer and identify it on a streamline pattern x - x - -
(b) turbulent x - x - -
51.1.9.1.2 Describe a turbulent layer and identify it on a streamline pattern x - x - -
51.1.9.1.3 Explain the different behaviour on flow separation with laminar or turbulent boundary layers x - x - -
51.1.10 Special circumstances x - - - -
51.1.10.1 Ice and other contamination x - - - -
(a) ice in stagnation point x - - - -
(b) ice on the surface (frost, snow and clear ice) x - - - -
(c) rain x - - - -
(d) contamination of the leading edge x - - - -
(e) effects on stall x - - - -
(f) effects on loss of controllability x - - - -
(g) effects on control surface moment x - - - -
(h) influence on high lift devices during takeoff, landing and
x - - - -
low speeds
51.1.10.1.1 Describe the effect of ice or other contamination of a wing on lift, drag and stall speed x - - - -
State that ice or other contamination on the wing results in undefined operational limits (i.e.
51.1.10.1.2 x - - - -
unknown stall speed)
State that ice, when undetected during pre-flight inspection, may result in blockage of control
51.1.10.1.3 x - - - -
surfaces
51.1.10.1.4 Explain how ice or other contamination may result in sudden stall when extending flaps x - - - -
SPL: chapter 5.3
51.2 Stability x - x - -
Stability
51.2.1 Condition of equilibrium in steady horizontal flight x - x - -
51.2.1.1 Precondition for static stability x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 54 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
Describe the principal behaviour of an aircraft showing static stability when experiencing a
51.2.1.1.1 x - x - -
disturbence from equilibrium in steady horizontal flight
51.2.1.2 Equilibrium x - x - -
(a) lift and weight x - x - -
51.2.1.2.1 Describe the effects of a gust on the equilibrium of forces x - x - -
(b) drag and thrust x - x - -
51.2.1.2.2 Describe the effects of a gust on the equilibrium of forces x - x - -
51.2.2 Methods of achieving balance x - x - -
51.2.2.1 Wing and empennage (tail and canard) x - x - -
Explain the balancing of moments between wing lift, weight and forces generated by the
51.2.2.1.1 x - x - -
elevator/horizontal stabilizer
51.2.2.1.2 Explain why the elevator of an aircraft (except canards) usually produces a force downward x - x - -
51.2.2.2 Control surfaces x - x - -
Explain how use of trim tabs helps to adjust the forces generated by the elevator/horizontal
51.2.2.2.1 x - x - -
stabilizer with varying longitudinal CG position
51.2.2.3 Ballast or weight trim x - x - -
Explain how ballast or trim weights can be used to establish the balancing of moment from wing
51.2.2.3.1 x - x - -
and empennage
51.2.3 Static and dynamic longitudinal stability x - x - -
51.2.3.1 Basics and definitions x - x - -
(a) static stability, positive, neutral and negative x - x - -
(b) precondition for dynamic stability x - x - -
(c) dynamic stability, positive, neutral and negative x - x - -
51.2.3.1.1 Explain 'static stability' x - x - -
51.2.3.1.2 Explain 'dynamic stability' x - x - -
51.2.3.1.3 Describe the requirement of static stability for dynamic stability x - x - -
51.2.3.2 Location of centre of gravity x - x - -
(a) aft limit and minimum stability margin x - x - -
(b) forward position x - x - -
(c) effects on static and dynamic stability x - x - -
51.2.3.2.1 State the importance for keeping CG in limits to maintain controllability x - x - -
51.2.3.2.2 Explain the effect of the CG location on pitch manoeuvrability and longitudinal stability x - x - -
51.2.4 Dynamic lateral or directional stability x - x - -
SPL: chapter 5.7
51.2.4.1 Spiral dive and corrective actions x - x - -
Spiral dive
51.2.4.1.1 Explain the influence of wing dihedral on roll stability x - x - -
51.2.4.1.2 Explain the influence of the vertical stabilizer on directional stability x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 55 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
51.2.4.1.3 Explain the term 'weather vaning' x - x - -
51.2.4.1.4 Explain the effect of wing sweep on directional stability x - x - -
SPL: chapter 5.4
51.3 Control x - x - -
Control
51.3.1 General x - x - -
51.3.1.1 Basics, the three planes and three axis x - x - -
51.3.1.1.1 Name the axis (Lon/Lat/V) and the corresponding movements (roll, yaw, pitch) of an aircraft x - x - -
51.3.1.2 Angle of attack change x - x - -
51.3.1.2.1 Explain the influence of local AOA change by movement of a control surface x - x - -
51.3.2 Pitch control x - x - -
51.3.2.1 Elevator x - x - -
51.3.2.1.1 Identify and name the 'horizontal stabilizer' and 'elevator' x - x - -
51.3.2.1.2 Explain the aerodynamic basics of pitch control x - x - -
51.3.2.1.3 Define the term 'longitudinal stability' x - x - -
51.3.2.1.4 Describe how the elevator influences flight attitude / flight path x - x - -
51.3.2.1.5 Explain the functions of a horizontal stabilizer in terms of longitudinal stability. x - x - -
51.3.2.2 Downwash effects x - x - -
51.3.2.2.1 Explain the effect of downwash on the tailplane angle of attack x - x - -
51.3.2.3 Location of centre of gravity x - x - -
51.3.2.3.1 Explain how the longitudinal stability changes with longitudinal CG position x - x - -
51.3.2.3.2 Explain how the manoeuvrability stability changes with longitudinal CG position x - x - -
51.3.3 Yaw control x - x - -
51.3.3.1 Pedal or rudder x - x - -
51.3.3.1.1 Identify and name the 'vertical stabilizer' and 'rudder' x - x - -
51.3.3.1.2 Explain the aerodynamic basics of yaw control x - x - -
51.3.3.1.3 List reasons for the lower significance of the rudder at higher airspeeds x - x - -
51.3.4 Roll control x - x - -
51.3.4.1 Ailerons: function in different phases of flight x - x - -
51.3.4.1.1 Identify and name the 'ailerons' x - x - -
51.3.4.1.2 Explain the aerodynamic basics of aileron / roll control x - x - -
51.3.4.1.3 Describe the correct method to fly 'coordinated turns' x - x - -
51.3.4.1.4 Describe the effects of slip / skid during turns. x - x - -
51.3.4.1.5 Describe the aileron / control reversal at low flight speeds x - x - -
51.3.4.2 Adverse yaw x - x - -
51.3.4.2.1 Explain the effect of 'adverse yaw' x - x - -
51.3.4.2.2 Describe the flight path / attitude when initiating turns without using the rudder x - x - -
Means to avoid adverse yaw x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 56 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
(a) frise ailerons x - - - -
51.3.4.2.3 Describe technical (aerodynamic) means to reduce adverse yaw by frise ailerons x - - - -
(b) differential ailerons deflection x - x - -
51.3.4.2.4 Describe technical (aerodynamic) means to reduce adverse yaw by differential aileron deflection x - x - -
51.3.5 Means to reduce control forces x - x - -
51.3.5.1 Aerodynamic balance x - x - -
(a) balance tab and anti-balance tab x - x - -
(b) servo tab x - x - -
51.3.5.1.1 Describe the effect of aerodynamic balance by use of balance tabs / servo tabs x - x - -
51.3.5.1.2 Explain the anti-balance tab x - x - -
51.3.6 Mass balance x - x - -
51.3.6.1 Reasons to balance x - x - -
51.3.6.1.1 Describe the effect of aerodynamic balance by use of mass balance x - x - -
51.3.7 Trimming x - x - -
51.3.7.1 Reasons to trim x - x - -
51.3.7.1.1 Explain why an elevator trim is fitted to the aircraft x - x - -
51.3.7.1.2 Describe the limitations of trim (e.g. with incorrect CG position) x - x - -
51.3.7.1.3 State that not all general aviation aeroplanes are fitted with an aileron / roll trim x - - - -
51.3.7.1.4 State that not all general aviation aircraft are fitted with rudder trim x - - - -
51.3.7.1.5 State that especially higher powered general aviation aircraft are fitted with rudder trim x - - - -
51.3.7.2 Trim tabs x - x - -
51.3.7.2.1 Name and describe the function of the most common types of trim x - x - -
51.3.7.2.2 Explain the function of a fixed trim tab x - x - -
51.3.7.2.3 Identify a trim tab at the rudder as such and explain its function to move the control surface x - x - -
SPL: chapter 5.5
Limitations (load
51.4 Limitations x - x - -
factor and
manoeuvres)
51.4.1 Operating limitations x - x - -
51.4.1.1 Flutter x - x - -
51.4.1.1.1 Describe flutter effects generally x - x - -
51.4.1.1.2 State in what speed range flutter can happen x - x - -
51.4.1.1.3 Describe methods to reduce flutter x - x - -
51.4.1.2 vFE x - - - -
51.4.1.2.1 State limits for operating high-lift devices (vFE) and describe how they are indicated x - - - -
51.4.1.3 vNO, vNE x - x - -
51.4.1.3.1 Describe the velocities vNO and vNE and how they are indicated x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 57 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
51.4.1.3.2 List possible consequences of exceeding vNE x - x - -
51.4.1.3.3 Explain the meaning of the 'yellow range' on the airspeed indicator x - x - -
51.4.2 Manoeuvring envelope x - x - -
51.4.2.1 Manoeuvring load diagram x - x - -
51.4.2.1.1 Identify and describe the manoeuvering envelope x - x - -
(a) load factor x - x - -
Explain why other operating limits (e.g. load factor) are affected when deploying / retracting high-
51.4.2.1.2 x - x - -
lift devices.
51.4.2.1.3 Explain the difference between negative and positive load factor. x - x - -
51.4.2.1.4 Derive the maximum allowed load factor from a given AFM/POH x - x - -
51.4.2.1.5 Derive the following data from the manoeuvering envelope: max. load factor x - x - -
(b) accelerated stall speed x - x - -
Explain how a stall is possible also at speeds above the stall speed, e.g. when encountering gusts or
51.4.2.1.6 x - x - -
after hard control inputs
(c) vA x - x - -
Explain why an aircraft will not exceed maximum allowed load factor after a hard control input
51.4.2.1.7 x - x - -
below vA
Explain why an aircraft will probably exceed maximum allowed load factor after a hard control
51.4.2.1.8 x - x - -
input above vA
51.4.2.1.9 Describe how to find out vA when in the cockpit x - x - -
51.4.2.1.10 Determine manoeuvering speed vA from AFM/POH x - x - -
(d) manoeuvring limit load factor or certification category x - x - -
List and describe different aircraft certification categories (aerobatic / normal / utility) with
51.4.2.1.11 x - x - -
different maximum load factor requirements
51.4.2.2 Contribution of mass x - x - -
51.4.2.2.1 State the relationship of mass to load-factor limits x - x - -
51.4.3 Gust envelope x - x - -
51.4.3.1 Gust load diagram x - x - -
51.4.3.1.1 Recognise and describe a typical gust-load diagram x - x - -
51.4.3.2 Factors contributing to gust loads x - x - -
51.4.3.2.1 Explain what speeds are safe when encountering gusts x - x - -
51.4.3.2.2 List factors additionally influence gust loads, such as: aspect ratio, speed, wing loading x - x - -
51.5 Propellers x - - x -
51.5.1 Conversion of engine torque to thrust x - - x -
51.5.1.1 Meaning of pitch x - - x -
51.5.1.1.1 Name and describe the geometric properties of a propeller x - - x -
51.5.1.1.2 Describe the movement (screw pattern) of a propeller, depending on its pitch x - - x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 58 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
51.5.1.1.3 Explain the propeller angle of attack depending on blade angle of incidence and air speed x - - x -
Describe the differences between a fixed pitch propeller, constant speed propeller and variable
51.5.1.1.4 x - - - -
pitch propeller
51.5.1.1.5 List flight phases in which a small or high propeller pitch is favorable x - - - -
51.5.1.1.6 Explain why the efficiency of a fixed pitch propeller decreases at high air speeds x - - - -
51.5.1.1.7 Explain the change of RPM of a fixed pitch propeller at constant throttle when varying air speed x - - - -
51.5.1.1.8 Explain how pitch and drag (sink rate) changes during glide when moving the propeller lever - - - -
51.5.1.2 Blade twist x - - x -
51.5.1.2.1 Describe the 'blade twist' and explain why it is used x - - x -
51.5.1.3 Effects of ice on propeller x - - - -
51.5.1.3.1 Explain the effect of ice accretion on the propeller blade x - - - -
51.5.1.3.2 List and describe systems to prevent ice accretion on the propeller blade (anti-ice) x - - - -
51.5.2 Engine failure or engine stop x - - x -
51.5.2.1 Windmilling drag x - - x -
51.5.2.1.1 Describe the term 'windmilling' and explain its influence on gliding performance x - - x -
51.5.3 Moments due to propeller operation x - - - -
51.5.3.1 Torque reaction x - - - -
51.5.3.1.1 Describe the effects caused by the torque of the propeller x - - - -
51.5.3.2 Asymmetric slipstream effect x - - - -
51.5.3.2.1 Determine the direction of effect, given the propeller’s sense of rotation x - - - -
51.5.3.2.2 Explain the effects caused by the slipstream of the propeller. x - - - -
51.5.3.2.3 Name phases of flight in which the 'slipstream effect' is most significant. x - - - -
51.5.3.2.4 Describe actions by the pilot to counteract the 'slipstream effect' x - - - -
51.5.3.2.5 State phases of flight in which the 'slipstream effect' is most significant x - - - -
51.5.3.3 Asymmetric blade effect x - - - -
51.5.3.3.1 Describe the 'asymmetric blade effect' (P-factor) and its effect on aircraft movement x - - - -
SPL: chapter 5.2
51.6 Flight mechanics x - x - -
Flight mechanics
51.6.1 Forces acting on an aeroplane x - x - -
51.6.1.1 Straight horizontal steady flight x - x x -
Describe straight and level flight as a flight without change in altitude, airspeed, density, without
51.6.1.1.1 x - - x -
gust influence and without any control inputs
Describe the equilibrium of forces (weight, lift, drag, thrust) and depict the forces from a
51.6.1.1.2 x - - x -
corresponding sketch
51.6.1.2 Straight steady climb x - - x -
51.6.1.2.1 State that forces are different during initiation of climb and steady climb x - - x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 59 of 167

 51 PFA

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: AEROPLANE x - x - -
Explain the equilibrium of forces (weight, lift, thrust, drag including the influence of weight on
51.6.1.2.2 x - - x -
thrust and lift) and depict the forces from a corresponding sketch
51.6.1.2.3 Describe the difference in angle of attack in climb when compared to straight and level flight x - - x -
51.6.1.3 Straight steady descent x - - x -
51.6.1.3.1 State that forces are different during initiation of descend and steady descend x - - x -
Explain the equilibrium of forces (weight, lift, thrust, drag including the influence of weight on
51.6.1.3.2 x - - x -
thrust and lift) and depict the forces from a corresponding sketch
51.6.1.4 Straight steady glide x - x - -
Explain the equilibrium of forces (weight, lift, drag slope driving force / thrust) and depict the
51.6.1.4.1 x - x - -
forces from a corresponding sketch
51.6.1.4.2 Describe how a component of the weight force substitutes the missing thrust x - x - -
51.6.1.4.3 Define and explain the terms 'glide path angle' and 'glide ratio' x - x - -
51.6.1.4.4 Derive glide path angle or glide ratio from an AFM/POH x - x - -
51.6.1.4.5 Explain the difference between the speeds for best glide ratio and lowest rate of descent x - x - -
51.6.1.4.6 Explain the change of speed for best glide with mass x - x - -
51.6.1.5 Steady coordinated turn x - x - -
(a) bank angle x - x - -
51.6.1.5.1 State that the necessary increase in lift mainly depends on bank angle x - x - -
(b) load factor x - x - -
51.6.1.5.2 Explain the increase in load factor during a turn x - x - -
Explain the equilibrium of forces (weight, lift, drag including the influence of weight on thrust and
51.6.1.5.3 x - x - -
lift) and depict the forces from a corresponding sketch
51.6.1.5.4 Explain why during level turns an increase in speed (and throttle) is neccessary x - x - -
51.6.1.5.5 Determine or state approximately the load factor during turns at 30°, 45° or 60° bank angle x - x - -
(c) turn radius x - - x -
51.6.1.5.6 Describe how the turn radius changes with TAS and bank angle x - - x -
(d) rate one turn x - - x -
51.6.1.5.7 Define 'rate-one-turn' x - - x -
51.6.1.5.8 Describe how the correct bank for a 'rate-one-turn' changes with TAS x - - x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 60 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
52.1 Subsonic aerodynamics - x - -
52.1.1 Basics concepts, laws and definitions - x - -
52.1.1.1 Conversion of units - x - -
52.1.1.1.1 List the units used in SI for as mass (kg), length (m), time (s) - x - -
52.1.1.2 Definitions and basic concepts about air: - x - -
(a) density - x - -
(b) influence of pressure and temperature on density - x - -
52.1.1.2.1 Define 'air density' - x - -
52.1.1.2.2 Define 'pressure altitude' and 'density altitude' - x - -
52.1.1.2.3 Explain the relationship between air density, pressure and temperature - x - -
52.1.1.3 Newton's laws: - x - -
(a) Newton's second law: Momentum equation - x - -
(b) Newton's third law: action and reaction - x - -
52.1.1.3.1 State and interpret Newton's laws of motion - x - -
52.1.1.3.2 Explain the relationship between 'mass' and 'force' (weight) - x - -
52.1.1.4 Basic concepts about airflow: - x - -
(a) steady airflow and unsteady airflow - x - -
(b) Bernoulli's equation - x - -
(c) static pressure, dynamic pressure, total pressure and stagnation point - x - -
(d) TAS, IAS and CAS - x - -
(e) two-dimensional airflow and three-dimensional airflow - x - -
(f) viscosity and boundary layer - x - -
52.1.1.4.1 Describe steady and unsteady airflow - x - -
52.1.1.4.2 Explain the principle of Bernoulli's continuity equation with regard to conservation of mass - x - -
52.1.1.4.3 Explain the relationship between static, dynamic and total pressure - x - -
Define 'stagnation point' in the flow around an airfoil, and explain the pressure obtained at the
52.1.1.4.4 - x - -
stagnation point
52.1.1.4.5 Define and explain the terms 'TAS', 'IAS' and 'CAS' - x - -
52.1.1.4.6 Describe the two-dimensional airflow around an airfoil of infinite span - x - -
52.1.1.4.7 Explain the difference between two- and three-dimensional airflow (span-wise flow, tip vortices) - x - -
52.1.1.4.8 Describe 'laminar' and 'turbulent' boundary layers, and the transition from laminar to turbulent - x - -
52.1.1.4.9 State where on a blade laminar or turbulent airflow can be observed - x - -
52.1.2 Two-dimensional airflow - x - -
52.1.2.1 airfoil section geometry: - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 61 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
(a) airfoil section - x - -
(b) chord line, thickness and thickness to chord ratio of a section - x - -
(c) camber line and camber - x - -
(d) symmetrical and asymmetrical airfoils sections - x - -
Define the following terms: 'airfoil section', 'airfoil element', 'chord line', 'chord', 'thickness', 'thickness-to-
52.1.2.1.1 - x - -
chord ratio, 'camber line', 'camber', 'leading-edge radius'
52.1.2.1.2 Describe symmetrical and asymmetrical airfoil sections, and state where they are used - x - -
52.1.2.2 Aerodynamic forces on airfoil elements: - x - -
(a) angle of attack - x - -
(b) pressure distribution - x - -
(c) lift and lift coefficient - x - -
(d) relation lift coefficient: angle of attack - x - -
(e) profile drag and drag coefficient - x - -
(f) relation drag coefficient: angle of attack - x - -
(g) resulting force, centre of pressure and pitching moment - x - -
52.1.2.2.1 Define 'angle of attack' (AOA, alpha) - x - -
52.1.2.2.2 Describe the resultant force from the pressure distribution around and airfoil - x - -
52.1.2.2.3 Resolve the aerodynamic force into the components of lift (L) and drag (D) - x - -
52.1.2.2.4 Describe the 'center of pressure' (CP) as the point the aerodynamic forces are acting on - x - -
State which factors 'lift coefficient' (CL) and 'drag coefficient' (CD) depend on, e.g. surface condition,
52.1.2.2.5 - x - -
profile shape, effective angle of attack
52.1.2.2.6 Describe CL as a function of AOA - x - -
Explain how drag is caused by pressure forces on the surfaces of an airfoil and by friction in the boundary
52.1.2.2.7 - x - -
layers
52.1.2.2.8 Define the term 'profile drag' - x - -
Explain the relationship of angle of attack, CL and CD, and airflow speed ('lift/drag formula') in
52.1.2.2.9 - x - -
qualitative terms

52.1.2.2.10 Explain the pitching moment resulting from varying locations of center of pressure with angle of attack - x - -

52.1.2.2.11 Describe the significance of 'lift-to-drag ratio', and state typical values used with helicopters - x - -
52.1.2.3 Stall: - x - -
(a) boundary layer and reasons for stalling - x - -
(b) variation of lift and drag as a function of angle of attack - x - -
(c) displacement of the centre of pressure and pitching moment - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 62 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
Describe the boundary layer separation when AOA increases beyond the onset of stall, and the decrease
52.1.2.3.1 - x - -
of lift and the increase of drag
Describe the effect of effective (vertical) airflow on the lift created with constant pitch and peripheral
52.1.2.3.2 - x - -
speed
52.1.2.4 Disturbances due to profile contamination: - x - -
(a) ice contamination
- x - -
(b) ice on the surface (frost, snow and clear ice)
Explain the effects of ice contamination on the section profile and surfaces (AOA at stall onset, effect of
52.1.2.4.1 - x - -
the increase in weight)
52.1.2.4.2 Explain the effect of erosion by heavy rain on the blade and subsequent increase in profile drag - x - -
52.1.3 The three-dimensional airflow - x - -
52.1.3.1 The blade: - x - -
52.1.3.1.1 Describe the various blade planforms and their properties - x - -
52.1.3.1.2 Define the terms 'aspect ratio' and 'blade twist' - x - -
52.1.3.2 Airflow pattern and influence on lift: - x - -
(a) span wise flow on upper and lower surface
(b) tip vortices - x - -
(c) span-wise lift distribution

52.1.3.2.1 Explain the spanwise flow around a blade and the appearance of blade tip vortices causing induced drag - x - -
52.1.3.2.2 Describe the relationship between spanwise flow, angle of attack and strength of blade tip vortices - x - -
52.1.3.2.3 Describe the spanwise lift distribution, and ways to be modified, e.g. by twist (washout) - x - -
52.1.3.3 Induced drag: causes and vortices - x - -
52.1.3.3.1 Explain 'induced drag' and the influence of AOA and aspect ratio - x - -
52.1.3.3.2 Describe the correlation between induced drag and the creation of lift - x - -
52.1.3.4 The airflow round a fuselage: - x - -
(a) components of a fuselage
(b) parasite drag - x - -
(c) variation with speed
52.1.3.4.1 Describe the fuselage and the external components that cause (parasite) drag - x - -
52.1.3.4.2 Describe the airflow around the fuselage, and the effect of the pitch angle of the fuselage - x - -
52.1.3.4.3 Describe fuselage shapes that minimise drag - x - -
52.1.3.4.4 Describe 'interference drag' - x - -
52.2 Transonic aerodynamics and compressibility effects - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 63 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
52.2.1 Airflow velocities - x - -
52.2.1.1 Airflow speeds: - x - -
(a) speed of sound
- x - -
(b) subsonic, high subsonic and supersonic flows
52.2.1.1.1 Define 'speed of sound', and describe ist dependency on air temperature - x - -
52.2.1.1.2 Explain the variation in the speed of sound with altitude - x - -
52.2.1.1.3 Define 'Mach number' as ratio of True Airspeed (TAS) and speed of sound - x - -
52.2.1.1.4 Define 'high subsonic', 'transonic' and 'supersonic flows' in relation to the value of the Mach number - x - -
52.2.1.2 Shock waves: - x - -
(a) compressibility and shock waves
(b) the reasons for their formation at upstream high subsonic airflow - x - -
(c) their effect on lift and drag
52.2.1.2.1 Describe shock waves in a supersonic flow and the changes in pressure and speed - x - -
52.2.1.2.2 Describe the appearance of local supersonic flows on the surfaces of a blade - x - -
52.2.1.3 Influence of airfoil section and blade planform - x - -
Explain the different shapes that allow higher Mach numbers without generating a shock wave on the
52.2.1.3.1 - x - -
upper surface, such as reducing the section thickness-to-chord ratio, or a planform with a sweep angle
52.3 Rotorcraft types - x - -
52.3.1 Rotorcraft - x - -
52.3.1.1 Rotorcraft types: - x - -
(a) autogyro
- x - -
(b) helicopter
52.3.1.1.1 Explain the difference between 'autogyro' and 'helicopter' - x - -
52.3.2 Helicopters - x - -
52.3.2.1 Helicopters configurations: the single main rotor helicopter - x - -
Describe the single-main-rotor helicopter, and give examples of other configurations (e.g. tandem,
52.3.2.1.1 - x - -
coaxial, side-by-side, synchrocopter, compound helicopter and tilt rotor)
52.3.2.2 The helicopter, characteristics and associated terminology: - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 64 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
(a) general lay-out, fuselage, engine and gearbox
(b) tail rotor, fenestron and NOTAR
(c) engines (reciprocating and turbo shaft engines)
(e) rotor shaft axis, rotor hub and rotor blades
(f) rotor disc and rotor disc area
(g) teetering rotor (two blades) and rotors with more than two blades - x - -
(d) power transmission
(h) skids and wheels
(i) helicopter axes and fuselage centre line
(j) roll axis, pitch axis and normal or yaw axis
(k) gross mass, gross weight and disc loading
52.3.2.2.1 Describe the tail rotor, the Fenestron, and the no tail rotor (NOTAR) - x - -
52.3.2.2.2 Define 'rotor disc area' and 'blade area' - x - -
Describe the teetering rotor with its hinge axis on the shaft axis, and rotors with more than two blades
52.3.2.2.3 - x - -
with offset hinge axes
52.3.2.2.4 Define the fuselage centre line and the three axes: roll, pitch, and normal (yaw) - x - -
52.4 Main rotor aerodynamics - x - -
52.4.1 Hover flight outside ground effect - x - -
52.4.1.1 Airflow through the rotor discs and round the blades: - x - -
(a) circumferential velocity of the blade sections
(b) induced airflow, through the disc and downstream
(c) downward fuselage drag
(d) equilibrium of rotor thrust, weight and fuselage drag
(e) rotor disc induced power
(f) relative airflow to the blade
- x - -
(g) pitch angle and angle of attack of a blade section
(h) lift and profile drag on the blade element
(i) resulting lift and thrust on the blade and rotor thrust
(j) collective pitch angle changes and necessity of blade feathering
(k) required total main rotor-torque and rotor-power
(l) influence of the air density
52.4.1.1.1 State the relationship between motor RPM and peripheral blade speed, and how it can be controlled - x - -
52.4.1.1.2 Describe the terms 'tip path plane' and 'virtual rotation axis' - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 65 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
Based on Newton's second law (momentum), explain that the upward vertical force from the disc (rotor
52.4.1.1.3 - x - -
thrust), is the result of vertical downward velocities inside the rotor disc
52.4.1.1.4 Define the 'pitch angle' and the AOA of a blade element - x - -
52.4.1.1.5 Explain lift and drag relating to a blade element, including induced and profile drag - x - -
Explain the necessity for collective pitch angle changes, the influence on the AOA and rotor thrust, and
52.4.1.1.6 - x - -
the need for blade feathering
52.4.1.1.7 Explain how profile drag on the blade elements generates a torque on the main shaft - x - -
52.4.1.1.8 Explain the influence of air density on the required power - x - -
52.4.1.1.9 State where the induced airflow is the highest with regard to the main rotor - x - -
52.4.1.1.10 Describe the change in pitch angle when the helicopter is hovering to the side - x - -
52.4.1.2 Anti-torque force and tail rotor: - x - -
(a) force of tail rotor as a function of main rotor-torque
(b) anti-torque rotor power - x - -
(c) necessity of blade feathering of tail rotor blades and yaw pedals
Using Newton's third law (motion), explain the need for tail-rotor thrust, the required value being
52.4.1.2.1 - x - -
proportional to main-rotor torque
Explain the necessity for feathering of the tail-rotor blades and their control by the yaw pedals, and the
52.4.1.2.2 - x - -
maximum and minimum values of the pitch angles of the blades
52.4.1.3 Total power required and hover outside ground effect (HOGE) - x - -
(a) total power required and power available
- x - -
(b) maximum hover altitude as a function of pressure altitude and OAT
52.4.1.3.1 Describe the influence of ambient pressure, temperature and moisture on the required power - x - -
52.4.2 Vertical climb - x - -
52.4.2.1 Relative airflow and angles of attack: - x - -
(a) climb velocity vC, induced and relative velocity and angle of attack
- x - -
(b) collective pitch angle and blade feathering
Describe the dependence of the vertical climb speed on the opposite vertical air velocity relative to the
52.4.2.1.1 - x - -
rotor disk
52.4.2.1.2 Explain how AOA is controlled by the collective pitch angle control - x - -
52.4.2.2 Power and vertical speed: - x - -
(a) induced power, climb power and profile power
(b) total main rotor power and main rotor torque
- x - -
(c) tail rotor power
(d) total power requirement in vertical flight

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 66 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
Describe total main-rotor power as the sum of parasite power, induced power, climb power and rotor
52.4.2.2.1 - x - -
profile power
52.4.2.2.2 Explain the initial increase and following decrease in vertical speed after increasing the pitch angle - x - -
52.4.2.2.3 Explain why the total main-rotor power required increases when the rate of climb increases - x - -
52.4.3 Forward flight - x - -
52.4.3.1 Airflow and forces in uniform inflow distribution: - x - -
(a) assumption of uniform inflow distribution on rotor disc
(b) advancing blade (90 deg) and retreating blade (270 deg)
(c) airflow velocity relative to the blade sections, area of reverse flow
(d) lift on the advancing and retreating blades at constant pitch angles
(e) necessity of cyclic pitch changes
- x - -
(f) compressibility effects on the advancing blade tip and speed limitations
(g) high angle of attack on the retreating blade, blade stall and speed limitations
(h) thrust on rotor disc and tilt of thrust vector
(i) vertical component of the thrust vector and gross weight equilibrium
(j) horizontal component of the thrust vector and drag equilibrium
Describe the upstream air velocities relative to the blade elements and the different effects on the
52.4.3.1.1 - x - -
advancing and retreating blades
52.4.3.1.2 Explain the influence of forward speed on the circumferential airspeed of the blade tip - x - -
Explain the 'lateral lift asymmetry' (roll moment) from the asymmetric distribution of lift due to different
52.4.3.1.3 - x - -
effective pitch angles at the advancing blade (90 deg) and retreating blade (270 deg)
Describe how cyclic feathering can eliminate the asymmetric lift distribution: by low AOA (low pitch
52.4.3.1.4 - x - -
angle) on the advancing blade, and high AOA (high pitch angle) on the retreating blade
52.4.3.1.5 Describe the differeces in induced airflow on the front and rear rotor plane - x - -
State that the total rotor thrust that is perpendicular to the rotor disc, and explain the need for tilting
52.4.3.1.6 - x - -
the thrust vector forward
52.4.3.1.7 Describe the relationship between motor RPM, thrust and tangential force - x - -
52.4.3.2 The flare (power flight): - x - -
(a) thrust reversal and increase in rotor thrust
- x - -
(b) increase of rotor RPM on non governed rotor
52.4.3.2.1 Explain the flare in powered flight, the rearward tilt of the rotor disc and the thrust vector - x - -
52.4.3.2.2 Explain the increase in thrust due to the upward inflow, and show the modifications in the AOA - x - -
52.4.3.3 Power and maximum speed: - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 67 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
(a) induced power as a function of helicopter speed
(b) rotor profile power as a function of helicopter speed
(c) fuselage drag and parasite power as a function of forward speed
(d) tail rotor power and power ancillary equipment - x - -
(e) total power requirement as a function of forward speed
(f) influence of helicopter mass, air density and drag of additional external equipment
(g) translational lift and influence on power required
52.4.3.3.1 State that the induced velocities and power values decrease as the speed of the helicopter increases - x - -
Define 'profile drag' and 'profile power', and explain the increase of their values with the speed of the
52.4.3.3.2 - x - -
helicopter
52.4.3.3.3 Define 'total drag' and its increase with the speed of the helicopter - x - -
Describe the influence of helicopter mass, air density, airspeed and additional external equipment on
52.4.3.3.4 - x - -
the partial powers and the total power required
Describe the 'translational lift', and explain the decrease in required total power as the helicopter
52.4.3.3.5 - x - -
increases its speed from the hover
52.4.4 Hover and forward flight in ground effect - x - -
52.4.4.1 Airflow in ground effect and downwash: - x - -
rotor power decrease as a function of rotor height above the ground at constant helicopter mass - x - -
Explain how the vicinity of the ground changes the downward flow pattern and the consequences on lift
52.4.4.1.1 - x - -
(thrust) at constant rotor power

52.4.4.1.2 Describe how ground effect depends on the height of the rotor above the ground and the rotor diameter - x - -

52.4.4.1.3 Describe the movement of a helicopter hovering in ground effect with zero-wind conditions - x - -

52.4.4.1.4 State factors that may result in an impairment of ground effect (e.g. tree environment, uneven surfaces) - x - -

52.4.5 Vertical descent - x - -

52.4.5.1 Vertical descent, power on: - x - -
(a) airflow through the rotor, low and moderate descent speeds
- x - -
(b) vortex ring state, settling with power and consequences
Describe the airflow around the rotor disc in a trouble-free vertical descent (power on), the airflow
52.4.5.1.1 - x - -
opposing the helicopter's velocity, the relative airflow and AOA
52.4.5.1.2 Explain the vortex-ring state, also known as 'settling with power', and how to counteract - x - -
Describe the airflow relative to the blades, the root stall, the loss of lift at the blade tip and the
52.4.5.1.3 - x - -
turbulence

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 68 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
52.4.5.1.4 Describe the effect of raising the lever and the effects on the controls - x - -
52.4.5.2 Autorotation: - x - -
(a) collective lever position after failure
(b) up flow through the rotor, auto-rotation and anti-autorotation rings
(c) tail rotor thrust and yaw control - x - -
(d) control of rotor RPM with collective lever
(e) landing after increase of rotor thrust by pulling collective and reduction in vertical speed
52.4.5.2.1 Explain the influence of rotational inertia of the rotor on the rate of decay - x - -
Describe how the aerodynamic forces on the blade elements vary from root to tip, and distinguish three
52.4.5.2.2 - x - -
zones: the inner stalled region, the middle driving region, and the driven region
52.4.5.2.3 Explain the control of the rotor RPM with collective pitch - x - -
Explain that the collective lever must be lowered quickly enough to avoid a rapid decay of rotor RPM due
52.4.5.2.4 - x - -
to drag on the blades
52.4.5.2.5 Explain the need for negative tail-rotor thrust with yaw control - x - -
Explain the final increase in rotor thrust by raising the collective pitch to decrease the vertical descent
52.4.5.2.6 - x - -
speed, and the decay in rotor RPM
52.4.6 Forward flight: Autorotation - x - -
52.4.6.1 Airflow through the rotor disc: - x - -
(a) descent speed and up flow through the disc
- x - -
(b) the flare, increase in rotor thrust, reduction of vertical speed and ground speed
State the factors that affect inflow angle and AOA, the autorotative power distribution, and the
52.4.6.1.1 - x - -
dissymmetry over the rotor disc in forward flight
52.4.6.1.2 State the effects of mass and density altitude on autorotation - x - -
52.4.6.1.3 State the relation between airspeed and rotor RPM during autorotation - x - -
52.4.6.2 Flight and landing: - x - -
(a) turning
(b) flare
- x - -
(c) autorotative landing
(d) height or velocity avoidance graph and dead man's curve
52.4.6.2.1 Describe the effect of forward speed on the vertical descent speed - x - -
52.4.6.2.2 Explain the effects of gross weight, rotor RPM, AOA and altitude (density) on endurance and range - x - -
52.4.6.2.3 Describe the manoeuvres for turning and touchdown - x - -
52.4.6.2.4 Explain the height-velocity curves - x - -
52.4.6.2.5 Describe the required change in collective pitch before initiating a turn during autorotation - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 69 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
52.4.6.2.6 Explain the increase in RPM during flare due to increased vertical airflow - x - -
52.5 Main rotor mechanics - x - -
52.5.1 Flapping of the blade in hover - x - -
52.5.1.1 Forces and stresses on the blade: - x - -
(a) centrifugal force on the blade and attachments
(b) limits of rotor RPM
(c) lift on the blade and bending stresses on a rigid attachment
(d) the flapping hinge of the articulated rotor and flapping hinge offset
(e) the flapping of the hingeless rotor and flexible element
52.5.1.1.1 Define the term 'rotor disc load' - x - -
Describe the centrifugal forces on the mass elements of a blade with pitch applied and the components
52.5.1.1.2 - x - -
of those forces
52.5.1.1.3 Explain the lower limit of rotor RPM - x - -
52.5.1.2 Coning angle in hover: - x - -
(a) lift and centrifugal force in hover and blade weight negligible
- x - -
(b) flapping, tip path plane and disc area
Describe the equilibrium of moments about the flapping hinge of lift (thrust) and of the centrifugal force
52.5.1.2.1 - x - -
determine the coning angle of the blade (assuming blade mass negligible)
52.5.1.2.2 Describe the properties of a semi-rigid flapping hinge - x - -
52.5.2 Flapping angles of the blade in forward flight - x - -
52.5.2.1 Forces on the blade in forward flight without cyclic feathering: - x - -
(a) aerodynamic forces on the advancing and retreating blades without cyclic feathering
(b) periodic forces and stresses, fatigue and flapping hinge
(c) phase lag between the force and the flapping angle (about 90 deg) - x - -
(d) flapping motion of the hinged blades and tilting of the cone and flap back of rotor
(e) rotor disc attitude and thrust vector tilt
Describe periodic lift, moment and stresses on the attachment with rigid attachments of the blade to the
52.5.2.1.1 - x - -
hub
52.5.2.1.2 Explain the necessity for a flapping hinge - x - -
Explain the azimuthal phase lag (90 degrees or less) between the input (applied pitch) and the output
52.5.2.1.3 - x - -
(flapping angle)
52.5.2.2 Cyclic pitch (feathering) in helicopter mode, forward flight: - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 70 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
(a) necessity of forward rotor disc tilt and thrust vector tilt
(b) flapping and tip path plane, virtual rotation axis or no flapping axis and plane of rotation
(c) shaft axis and hub plane
- x - -
(d) cyclic pitch change (feathering) and rotor thrust vector tilt
(e) collective pitch change, collective lever, swash plate, pitch link and pitch horn
(f) cyclic stick, rotating swash plate and pitch link movement and phase angle
Explain why in order to assume and maintain forward flight, the total rotor thrust vector must obtain a
52.5.2.2.1 - x - -
forward component by tilting the tip path plane
Describe how the applied cyclic pitch modifies the lift on the advancing and retreating blades and
52.5.2.2.2 - x - -
produces the required forward tilting of the tip path plane and the total rotor thrust
Describe the mechanism by which the desired cyclic blade pitch can be produced by tilting the swash
52.5.2.2.3 - x - -
plate with the cyclic stick
52.5.3 Blade lag motion - x - -
52.5.3.1 Forces on the blade in the disc plane (tip path plane) in forward flight: - x - -
(a) forces due to the Coriolis effect because of the flapping
- x - -
(b) alternating stresses and the need of the drag or lag hinge
Explain the Coriolis force due to flapping, the resulting periodic moments in the hub plane and the
52.5.3.1.1 - x - -
resulting periodic stresses which make lead-lag hinges necessary
52.5.3.2 The drag or lag hinge: - x - -
(a) the drag hinge in the fully articulated rotor
(b) the lag flexure in the hinge less rotor - x - -
(c) drag dampers
52.5.3.2.1 Describe the drag hinge of the fully articulated rotor and the lag flexure in the hingeless rotor - x - -
52.5.3.2.2 Explain the necessity for drag dampers - x - -
52.5.3.3 Ground resonance: - x - -
(a) blade lag motion and movement of the centre of gravity of the blades and the rotor
(b) oscillating force on the fuselage - x - -
(c) fuselage, undercarriage and resonance
52.5.3.3.1 Explain the movement of the CG of the blades due to lead-lag movements in the multibladed rotor - x - -
Describe the effect of the CG movement on the fuselage, and the danger of resonance when the gear
52.5.3.3.2 - x - -
touches the ground
52.5.4 Rotor systems - x - -
52.5.4.1 See-saw or teetering rotor - x - -
52.5.4.1.1 Explain that a teetering rotor is prone to mast bumping in low-G situations - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 71 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
52.5.4.2 Fully articulated rotor: - x - -
(a) three hinges arrangement
- x - -
(b) bearings and elastomeric hinges
52.5.4.2.1 Describe the fully articulated rotor with hinges and feathering bearings - x - -
52.5.4.3 Hinge less rotor and bearing less rotor - x - -
52.5.4.3.1 Describe the forces on the flapping hinges with a large offset (virtual hinge) and the resulting moments - x - -
52.5.4.4 Blade sailing: - x - -
(a) low rotor RPM and effect of adverse wind
(b) minimising the danger - x - -
(c) droop stops
52.5.4.4.1 Explain blade sailing, and the influence of low rotor RPM and headwind - x - -
52.5.4.4.2 Explain the purpose of droop stops, and their retraction by centrifugal forces - x - -
52.5.4.5 Vibrations due to main rotor: - x - -
(a) origins of the vibrations: in plane and vertical
- x - -
(b) blade tracking and balancing
52.5.4.5.1 Explain the lift variations per rev of a blade and the resulting vertical rotor thrust variation - x - -
52.5.4.5.2 Describe the resulting frequencies and amplitudes as a function of the number of blades - x - -
52.6 Tail rotors - x - -
52.6.1 Conventional tail rotor - x - -
52.6.1.1 Rotor description: - x - -
(a) two-blades tail rotors with teetering hinge
(b) rotors with more than two blades
- x - -
(c) feathering bearings and flapping hinges
(d) dangers to people and to the tail rotor, rotor height and safety
52.6.1.1.1 Describe the two-bladed rotor with teetering hinge, and rotors with more than two blades - x - -
Describe the dangers to ground personnel to the rotor blades, and possibilities of minimising these
52.6.1.1.2 - x - -
dangers
52.6.1.2 Aerodynamics: - x - -
(a) induced airflow and tail rotor thrust
(b) thrust control by feathering, tail rotor drift and roll - x - -
(c) effect of tail rotor failure and vortex ring
52.6.1.2.1 Explain the airflow around the blades in hover and in forward flight - x - -
52.6.1.2.2 Explain the effect of wind on tail-rotor aerodynamics and thrust in the hover - x - -
52.6.1.2.3 Explain tail-rotor thrust and the control through pitch alterations (feathering) - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 72 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
52.6.1.2.4 Describe side effects of the tail rotor: roll moment and drift - x - -
52.6.1.2.5 Explain the effects of temporary loss of tail rotor efficiency in a stationary hover - x - -
52.6.2 The fenestron: technical lay-out - x - -
52.6.2.1 Layout and control - x - -
52.6.2.1.1 Describe the technical layout of a fenestron tail rotor - x - -
52.6.2.1.2 State the advantages and disadvantages of a fenestron - x - -
52.6.3 The NOTAR: technical lay-out - x - -
52.6.3.1 Layout and control - x - -
52.6.3.1.1 Describe the technical layout of a NOTAR (no-tailrotor) design - x - -
52.6.3.1.2 State the advantages and disadvantages of a NOTAR - x - -
52.6.4 Vibrations - x - -
52.6.4.1 High frequency vibrations due to the tail rotors - x - -
52.6.4.1.1 Explain the sources of vibration of the tail rotor and the resulting high frequencies - x - -
52.7 Equilibrium, stability and control - x - -
52.7.1 Equilibrium and helicopter attitudes - x - -
52.7.1.1 Hover: - x - -
(a) forces and equilibrium conditions
(b) helicopter pitching moment and pitch angle - x - -
(c) helicopter rolling moment and roll angle
52.7.1.1.1 Explain the zero-vector sum of forces and moments in any acceleration-free situation - x - -
52.7.1.1.2 Explain the effect of density altitude on the equilibrium of forces - x - -
52.7.1.1.3 Describe the forces and the moments about the longitudinal and lateral axis in a steady hover - x - -
Explain how the roll angle in a steady hover without wind results from the moments about the
52.7.1.1.4 - x - -
longitudinal axis
52.7.1.1.5 Explain how the cyclic is used to equalise moments about the lateral axis in a steady hover - x - -
52.7.1.2 Forward flight: - x - -
(a) forces and equilibrium conditions
(b) helicopter moments and angles - x - -
(c) effect of speed on fuselage attitude
52.7.1.2.1 Describe the forces and the moments about the lateral axis in steady straight and level flight - x - -
Explain the influence of mass and CG position on the forces and moments about the lateral axis in
52.7.1.2.2 - x - -
forward flight
Explain the role of the cyclic stick position in creating equilibrium of forces and moments about the
52.7.1.2.3 - x - -
lateral axis in forward flight

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 73 of 167

 52 PFH

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: HELICOPTER - x - -
52.7.1.2.4 Explain the 'inflow roll effect' - x - -
52.7.2 Stability - x - -
52.7.2.1 General aspects - x - -
52.7.2.1.1 Explain the role of stability in overall flight safety - x - -
52.7.2.1.2 Describe the relationship between stability and controllability - x - -
52.7.2.2 Static longitudinal, roll and directional stability - x - -
52.7.2.2.1 Define 'static stability' and give examples of static stability and of static instability - x - -
Describe the influence of the longitudinal position of the CG and the horizontal stabilizer on static
52.7.2.2.2 - x - -
longitudinal stability
52.7.2.2.3 Describe the influence of the tail rotor and the vertical stabilizer on static directional stability - x - -
52.7.2.2.4 Explain the influence of the main rotor on static roll stability - x - -
52.7.2.3 Static stability in the hover - x - -
52.7.2.3.1 Describe the initial movements of a hovering helicopter after the occurrence of a horizontal gust - x - -
52.7.2.4 Dynamic stability - x - -
52.7.2.4.1 Define 'dynamic stability' and give examples of dynamic stability and of dynamic instability - x - -
52.7.2.4.2 Explain why static stability is a precondition for dynamic stability - x - -
52.7.3 Control - x - -
52.7.3.1 Control power - x - -
(a) fully articulated rotor
(b) hinge less rotor - x - -
(c) teetering rotor
52.7.3.1.1 Explain the meaning of the control moment - x - -
52.7.3.1.2 Explain the importance of the CG position on the control moment - x - -
52.7.3.1.3 Explain the influence of hinge offset on controllability - x - -
52.7.3.2 Dynamic roll over - x - -
52.7.3.2.1 Explain the mechanism which causes dynamic rollover - x - -
52.7.3.2.2 Explain the required pilot action when dynamic rollover is starting to develop - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 74 of 167

 53 PFB

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL-HOTAIR BPL-GAS Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: BALLOON - - - x x
53.1 Principles of flight - - - x x
53.1.1 Basics and definitions - - - x x
53.1.1.1 Definitions - - - x x
53.1.1.1.1 Define 'temperature' and 'density' of a gas - - - x x
53.1.1.1.2 State the units used for: gas temperature, density, volume and pressure - - - x x
Describe a 'homogene' airmass as an airmass with 1 percent change in pressure per 80 m
53.1.1.1.3 - - - x x
difference in altitude
53.1.1.2 Temperature, volume, density and pressure - - - x x
Describe the relationship between temperature, volume, density and pressure during
53.1.1.2.1 - - - x x
compression of a gas
Describe the relationship between temperature, volume, density and pressure of a gas being
53.1.1.2.2 - - - x x
released from a pressurized container
Describe the relationship between temperature, volume, density and pressure of a gas while
53.1.1.2.3 - - - x x
maintaining given parameter constant
53.1.1.3 International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) - - - x x
State the ISA values for: air temperature, density and pressure at MSL, environmental lapse rate
53.1.1.3.1 - - - x x
within the troposphere
53.2 Aerostatics - - - x x
53.2.1 Carrying force - - - x x
53.2.1.1 Terms and definitions - - - x x
53.2.1.1.1 Define 'aerostatic lift force', 'carrying force' and 'climb force' - - - x x
53.2.1.1.2 Explain the relationship of volume, temperature and pressure in 'adiabatic processes' - - - x x
Define 'pressure ratio number (Hoehenzahl)' as the ratio of barometric pressure of different
53.2.1.1.3 - - - x x
heights
53.2.1.2 Aerostatic lift - - - x x
53.2.1.2.1 Explain the formation of aerostatic lift - - - x x
53.2.1.2.2 List the factors affecting aerostatic lift: gas density, volume, vertical pressure difference - - - x x
Hot-Air only
53.2.1.2.3 Explain the role of hull temperature for aerostatic lift of a hot-air balloon - - x -
Gas only
Explain why a gas balloon climbs with constant rate up to the altitude with maximum
53.2.1.2.4 - - - - x
differential pressure
Describe the change of volume and carrying force of a gas balloon with change in temperature
53.2.1.2.5 of the carrying gas below the altitude with maximum differential pressure (hard height): - - - - x
increase of 0.4 percent per 1K temperature increase

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 75 of 167

 53 PFB

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL-HOTAIR BPL-GAS Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: BALLOON - - - x x
State that the increase in height by release of a certain amount of ballast at 5500 m altitude is
53.2.1.2.6 - - - - x
twice the value at MSL
State that the load-carrying capacity of a gas balloon at 6500 m is approximately 50 percent of
53.2.1.2.7 - - - - x
its value at MSL
53.2.1.3 Effect of temperature and altitude - - - x x
Hot-Air only
53.2.1.3.1 Describe the change in carrying force with a specific change in hull temperature with altitude - - - x -

53.2.1.3.2 Explain the increased rate of descent at higher altitude with a given decrease in hull temperature - - - x -

53.2.1.3.3 Describe the change of density with change of hull temperature - - - x -

53.2.1.3.4 Describe the change in load-carrying capacity with hull temperature change and altitude - - - x -
Gas only
Explain why the carrying gas temperature may change during climb or descent by adiabatic
53.2.1.3.5 - - - - x
expansion/compression
Explain the change in carrying force with change in gas temperature at height with maximum
53.2.1.3.6 - - - - x
differential pressure
53.2.1.4 Lifting gases - - - x x
53.2.1.4.1 Describe suitable lifting gases: Hot-Air, gases lighter than air - - - x x
53.2.1.4.2 State that the density of gas is measured at 'norm conditions' - - - x x
Gas only
53.2.1.4.3 Explain the role of molecule mass with the suitability of a carrying gas - - - - x
53.2.1.4.4 Give examples of suitable carrying gases, and state their advantages and disadvantages - - - - x
53.2.1.4.5 Name and identify gases with lowest molecule mass from given examples - - - .- x
53.3 Loading limitations - - - x x
53.3.1 Aerostatic limitations - - - x x
53.3.1.1 Maximum load - - - x x
Explain how the maximum load is limited by the difference between aerostatic lift force and
53.3.1.1.1 - - - x x
empty mass (weight) of the balloon
53.4 Operational limitations - - - x x
53.4.1 Altitude limits - - - x x
53.4.1.1 Definitions - - - x x
Gas only
Define 'norm height (static ceiling)': height that can be reached by a gas balloon, when gas and
53.4.1.1.1 environmental temperatures, and the average temperature of the air below are zero degrees - - - - x
Celcius (can be corrected for actual temperatures)

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 76 of 167

 53 PFB

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL-HOTAIR BPL-GAS Remarks

PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT: BALLOON - - - x x
Describe how the norm height of a gas balloon changes when releasing ballast: 80 m per 1
53.4.1.1.2 - - - - x
percent of weight
Define 'Prallhoehe': altitude at which the filling gas completely fills the hull, and at which
53.4.1.1.3 - - - - x
differential pressure is at maximum
53.4.1.2 Loss of heating (Hot-Air only) - - - x x
Hot-Air only
Describe how altitude and rate of descent change in case the hull of a hot-air balloon is no more
53.4.1.2.1 - - - x -
heated
53.4.1.3 Differential pressure - - - x x
53.4.1.3.1 State that the differential pressure at a balloon ist highest at the upper pole - - - x x
Gas only
Describe how the height with maximum differential pressure of a gas balloon changes due to
53.4.1.3.2 - - - - x
sunlight insolation
53.4.2 Environmental factors - - - x x
53.4.2.1 Atmospheric influences - - - x x
53.4.2.1.1 Describe the effect of gust on the hull of a free balloon - - - x x
Hot-Air only
53.4.2.1.2 Describe the effect of rain on total mass and fuel consumption of a hot-air balloon - - - x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 77 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
61 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES - AEROPLANE AND HELICOPTER
61.1 General x x - - - -
61.1.1 Operation of aircraft: ICAO Annex 6, General requirements x x - - - -
61.1.1.1 Definitions x x - - - -
61.1.1.1.1 Define 'flight time (aeroplanes)' x - - - - -
61.1.1.1.2 Define 'flight time (helicopter)' - x - - - -
61.1.1.1.3 Define 'flight time (glider)' - - x x - -
61.1.1.1.4 Define 'flight time (balloon)' - - - - x x
61.1.1.2 Applicability x x - - - -
61.1.1.2.1 Describe the pilot's legal obligation to plan and prepare a flight x x - - - -
61.2 Special operational procedures and hazards (general aspects) x x x - - -
61.2.1 Ground operations x x x - - -
61.2.1.1 Preflight x x x - - -
61.2.1.1.1 Explain the use of checklists during pre-flight check x x x - - -
61.2.1.1.2 Describe the use of entering amounts of refilled oil and fuel into the aircraft logbook x x - - - -
Describe the procedure to be followed in case of defects discovered during the pre-flight
61.2.1.1.3 x x x - - -
check
61.2.1.1.4 Explain the importance of using AFM/POH procedures. x x x - - -
61.2.1.1.5 Explain possible hazards from rigging / weights the pilot did NOT untie before flight x x x - - -
61.2.1.2 Refuelling x x - - - -
61.2.1.2.1 State that the indications on a fuel gauge of an airplane are often erroneous x x - - - -
Describe techniques how to assess the fuel quantity inside the fuel tanks in a precise way
61.2.1.2.2 x x - - - -
(e.g. stick measuring, calculation)
Describe common safety precautions during refuelling (e.g. non-smoking, fuel grades,
61.2.1.2.3 x x - - - -
grounding, paved ground etc.)
61.2.1.2.4 State that refuelling shall not be commenced with passengers on board x x - - - -
61.2.1.2.5 Determine the allowed grades of fuel when given an AFM/POH x x - - - -
61.2.1.3 Taxiing x x - - - -
61.2.1.3.1 Explain the possible problems with regard to use of the carburator heat during taxi x x - - - -
Explain which aircraft instruments (e.g. gyroscopic instruments) can be tested during
61.2.1.3.2 x x - - - -
taxiing
Describe the importance of a brake test when starting to taxi, and explain be able to
61.2.1.3.3 x x - - - -
explain what to do in case allowed tolerances are exceeded
61.2.1.4 Postflight x x - - - -
61.2.1.4.1 Explain the reason and the procedure to record every flight in the aircraft logbook x x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 78 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
Explain the reason and the procedure to report detected malfunctions / defects to the
61.2.1.4.2 x x - - - -
aircraft holder or even the competent authority
61.2.2 Flight operations x - x - - -
61.2.2.1 Takeoff and landing x - x - - -
61.2.2.1.1 Describe the effects of crosswind, headwind and tailwind on take off and landing x - x - - -
Explain the term 'maximum demonstrated crosswind component' and determine it from
61.2.2.1.2 x - x - - -
a given AFM/POH
61.2.2.1.3 Define and explain the speeds Vr, Vx and Vy x - - - - -

61.2.2.1.4 Explain the effect of flaps configuration on ground roll distance and obstacle clearance x - - - - -
61.2.2.2 Traffic pattern x - x - - -
61.2.2.2.1 Explain the term 'traffic pattern' and the standard pattern direction x - x - - -
Describe an appropriate way of entering a traffic pattern, and state the usual reporting
61.2.2.2.2 x - x - - -
points / positions within a traffic pattern (e.g. before turning base)
61.2.2.3 Go around x - - - - -
61.2.2.3.1 Describe situations in which a go-around should be executed x - - - - -
Explain the procedures for retraction of flaps or other high-lift devices, and describe the
61.2.2.3.2 x - - - - -
hazards of retraction at low altitude
61.2.3 Noise abatement x x - - - -
61.2.3.1 Noise abatement procedures x x - - - -
61.2.3.1.1 Explain why flying directly above settlements / town should be avoided x x - - - -
61.2.3.2 Influence of the flight procedure (departure, cruise and approach) x x - - - -
Describe how noise abatement can be performed during flight at low altitude (e.g. when
61.2.3.2.1 x x - - - -
entering / joining / exiting traffic pattern)
61.2.3.2.2 Identify zones of 'noise abatement / protection' from an airport chart x x - - - -
61.2.4 Runway excursion and incursion awareness x x - - - -
61.2.4.1 Runway excursion awareness (meaning of surface markings and signals) x - - - - -
Describe how to determine remaining runway distance from light signals and markings
61.2.4.1.1 x - - - - -
(e.g. light colors, half-length marking etc.)

List factors that might lead to a runway excursion, e.g. higher than normal approach,
61.2.4.1.2 x - - - - -
incorrect braking, contaminated runway, approach speed or incorrectly selected airport

61.2.4.2 Runway incursion awareness (meaning of surface markings and signals) x x - - - -

Describe procedures to prevent runway incursion, e.g. stop bars, clearances when
61.2.4.2.1 x x - - - -
approaching holding points, expedited vacating of runways and look-out
61.2.4.2.2 Identify the marking 'runway incursion hotspot' from an airport chart. x x - - - -
61.2.5 Fire or smoke x x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 79 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
61.2.5.1 Carburettor fire x x - - - -
61.2.5.1.1 Explain what a 'carburetor fire' is and how to handle such a situation x x - - - -
61.2.5.2 Engine fire x x - - - -
Describe actions in case of engine fire during flight with regard to emergency checklist
61.2.5.2.1 x x - - - -
and engine restart
Describe hazards from engine fire during flight with regard to power loss, possible visual
61.2.5.2.2 x x - - - -
obstructions and carbon monoxide in the cabin
61.2.5.2.3 Describe how to detect high carbon monoxide concentration inside the cockpit x x - - - -
Name the heating system / exhaust system as a possible cause for high carbon monoxide
61.2.5.2.4 x x - - - -
concentration in the cockpit
Describe actions in case of detecting high carbon monoxide concentration, e.g. turn off
61.2.5.2.5 x x - - - -
heating, ventilate cabin, land as soon as practicable, etc.
Explain why applying full throttle and closing the fuel shutoff valve might help in case of
61.2.5.2.6 x x - - - -
an engine fire on ground
Fire in the cabin and cockpit, (choice of extinguishing agents according to fire
61.2.5.3 x x - - - -
classification and use of the extinguishers)
61.2.5.3.1 List different extinguishing agents and suitable fire for use of the extinguishers x x - - - -
61.2.5.3.2 Describe the use of fire extinguishers inside the cockpit can explain negative effects x x - - - -
Smoke in the cockpit and (effects and action to be taken) and smoke in the cockpit and
61.2.5.4 x x - - - -
cabin (effects and actions taken)
Describe the procedure to switch off electrical users one by one to find the possible
61.2.5.4.1 x x - - - -
source of an electric fire
List actions in case of smoke in the cockpit, e.g. open windows and turn off heating
61.2.5.4.2 x x - - - -
system
61.2.6 Windshear and microburst x x x - x x
61.2.6.1 Effects and recognition during departure and approach x x x - x x
61.2.6.1.1 Define 'wind shear' (horizontal or vertical) x x x - x x
61.2.6.1.2 Describe typical meteorological situations in which 'wind shear' may occur x x x - x x
Describe the effects on aerodynamics and the hazards for an aircraft that a strong wind
61.2.6.1.3 x x x - x x
shear imposes
Describe the variation in airspeed and climb performance when encountering a
61.2.6.1.4 x x - - - -
downburst / microburst close to the ground
Describe the effects of wind shear during final approach with regard to speed and
61.2.6.1.5 x x - - - -
variation from the intended glide path
61.2.6.2 Actions to avoid and actions taken during encounter x x x - - -
Describe flight procedures that can be applied when experiencing strong wind shear
61.2.6.2.1 x x - - - -
during approach and landing

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 80 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
61.2.6.2.2 Describe procedures to avoid wind shear during approach and landing x x x - - -
61.2.7 Wake turbulence - - - -
61.2.7.1 Cause x x - - - -
61.2.7.1.1 Describe the origin and hazards resulting from 'wake turbulences' x x - - - -
61.2.7.1.2 State that significant wake turbulences exist from rotation to nose-wheel touchdown x x - - - -
Describe the movement of wake turbulences as spreading sideways and downwards, and
61.2.7.1.3 x x - - - -
explain the effect of a slight crosswind on the runway
61.2.7.1.4 Describe the origin and hazards resulting from helicopter rotor downwash x x
61.2.7.2 List of relevant parameters x x - - - -
61.2.7.2.1 List the wake turbulence categories 'light', 'medium' and 'heavy' ('super heavy') x x - - - -
Describe how the intensity of wake turbulence depends on aircraft's size (mass), speed
61.2.7.2.2 x x - - - -
and configuration
61.2.7.2.3 State the most critical situation for wake turbulence as 'heavy and slow' x x - - - -
61.2.7.3 Actions taken when crossing traffic, during take-off and landing x x - - - -
State that ATC separates traffic also based on the wake turbulence category of the
61.2.7.3.1 x x - - - -
preceding aircraft
State the approximate time that should be waited before taking off behind a preceding
61.2.7.3.2 x x - - - -
medium or heavy aircraft
Describe procedures to handle wake turbulence at takeoff and landing (e.g. higher
61.2.7.3.3 x x - - - -
approach, later touch down)
Describe the pilot's responsibility for establishing an appropriate amount of separation
61.2.7.3.4 x x - - - -
during taxi and on uncontrolled airfields
61.2.8 Engine failure at take off x - - - - -
61.2.8.1 General x - - - - -
State that in case of engine failure during take-off an immediate reduction of AOA is
61.2.8.1.1 x - - - - -
necessary
61.2.8.1.2 Explain the importance to observe air speed x - - - - -
Explain why - up to a certain altitude / safe altitude - a straight ahead landing is better
61.2.8.1.3 x - - - - -
than turning back to the airfield
61.2.8.1.4 Explain how a steep turn back leads to an excessive loss of altitude x - - - - -
Explain that the use of the full runway length (by doing a backtrack) is favorable in any
61.2.8.1.5 x - - - - -
case, to mitigate the effect of a possible engine failure
61.2.9 Emergency and precautionary landings x x - - - -
61.2.9.1 Definition x x - - - -
Define and explain the differences between 'precautionary landing' and 'emergency
61.2.9.1.1 x x - - - -
landing'
61.2.9.1.2 List examples in which cases to do an emergency landing x x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 81 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
State that notes / advices in AFM/POH should be followed correctly, e.g. land as soon as
61.2.9.1.3 x x - - - -
possible / on next airfield / etc.
61.2.9.1.4 State in which cases life wests for every passenger have to carried on board x x - - - -
61.2.9.2 Cause (of emergency and precautionary landings) x x - - - -
Describe situations in which to prepare for an emergency landing (e.g. loss of oil or fuel,
61.2.9.2.1 x x - - - -
fire, smoke)

61.2.9.2.2 Describe situations that might lead to a precautionary landing (e.g. passenger sickness) x x - - - -
61.2.9.3 Landing preparation x - - - - -
Describe appropriate actions for conducting a off-field landing (unless stated other by
61.2.9.3.1 x - - - - -
AFM/POH)
Describe how to select a suitable emergency landing area, e.g. how field should look
61.2.9.3.2 x - - - - -
like, be orientated to the wind, should provide clear approach area, etc.
Explain why the aircraft should be flared at the upper visible surface of vegetation (e.g.
61.2.9.3.3 x - - - - -
corn, tree tops)
State why the fuel shut-off valve should be closed before an emergency landing with a
61.2.9.3.4 x - - - - -
non-working engine

61.2.9.3.5 Explain why touch down on an emergency landing area should occur at minimum speed x - - - - -
61.2.9.4 Passenger information x x - - - -
Describe the briefing to be given to passengers before conducting a
61.2.9.4.1 x x - - - -
precautionary/emergency landing or ditching (including evacuation)
61.2.9.5 Evacuation x x - - - -
Explain why the aircraft must be stopped and the engine shut down before an
61.2.9.5.1 x x - - - -
emergency evacuation
61.2.9.5.2 Explain when to inflate life wests in case of emergency ditching x x
61.2.9.6 Action after landing x x - - - -
61.2.9.6.1 Describe and identify ground-air distress signals x x - - - -
61.2.10 Contaminated runways x - - - - -
61.2.10.1 Kinds of contamination x - - - - -
61.2.10.1.1 Explain the term 'contaminated runway' x - - - - -
61.2.10.1.2 List and describe different types of contamination x - - - - -
61.2.10.2 Estimated surface friction and friction coefficient x - - - - -
61.2.10.2.1 Describe the term 'friction coefficient' x - - - - -
Explain the potential effects of contaminations (e.g. longer take-off / landing roll, lower
61.2.10.2.2 x - - - - -
braking coefficient)

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 82 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
Describe how to get information about the condition of a runway, if such were
61.2.10.2.3 x - - - - -
published (e.g. SNOWTAM)
Describe precautions and procedures in case of poor friction coefficient, or if
61.2.10.2.4 x - - - - -
information about friction coefficient is not available
61.2.11 Operation influence by meteorological conditions x - - - - -
61.2.11.1 Maintaining VMC x - - - - -
Describe the correct procedure when encountering meteorological conditions coming
61.2.11.1.1 x - - - - -
below VMC minima
61.2.12 Ballistic Recovery Systems (BRS) x - - - - -
61.2.12.1 General x - - - - -
61.2.12.1.1 Describe the purpose and function of a BRS x - - - - -
61.2.12.1.2 Describe situations that may lead to the use of the BRS system x - - - - -
61.2.12.2 Design x - - - - -
61.2.12.2.1 List the major components of a BRS system x - - - - -
61.2.12.2.2 Explain the purpose and operation of the slider x - - - - -
61.2.12.2.3 List the safety features of a BRS x - - - - -
61.2.12.3 Operation and Limitations x - - - - -
Describe the actions before and after the flight in an aircraft equipped with a BRS
61.2.12.3.1 x - - - - -
(removing and installing the safety pin)
61.2.12.3.2 Describe how to activate a BRS x - - - - -
61.2.12.3.3 State the actions for using a BRS at an altitude below 500 ft AGL x - - - - -
61.2.12.3.4 State the actions for using a BRS between 500 ft and 2000 ft AGL x - - - - -
61.2.12.3.5 State the actions for using a BRS at an altitude above 2000 ft AGL x - - - - -
61.2.12.3.6 Describe the limitations in function of altitude and speed for using a BRS x - - - - -
61.2.12.4 Precautions x - - - - -
61.2.12.4.1 Describe the passenger briefing with regard to the BRS x - - - - -
Describe the precautions to be taken on the ground during normal handling of an
61.2.12.4.2 x - - - - -
aircraft equipped with BRS, and after an accident
61.3 Special operational procedures and hazards (helicopter) - x - - - -
61.3.1 Rotor downwash - x - - - -
61.3.1.1 Effects of roter downwash - x - - - -
61.3.1.1.1 Describe 'rotor downwash' - x - - - -
Describe the effects of downwash: soil erosion, water dispersal and spray, recirculation,
61.3.1.1.2 - x - - - -
damage to property, loose articles
61.3.2 Operation influence by meteorological conditions (helicopter) - x - - - -
61.3.2.1 White out, sand or dust - x - - - -
61.3.2.1.1 Describe the effect of 'white-out' and its hazards (e.g. loss of orientation) - x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 83 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
61.3.2.1.2 Describe take-off and landing techniques in 'white-out' situations - x - - - -
61.3.2.2 Strong winds - x - - - -
61.3.2.2.1 Describe the effect of 'blade sailing' - x - - - -
61.3.2.2.2 Describe wind operating envelopes and vertical speed problems - x - - - -
61.3.2.2.3 State the procedures for starting engines in presence of strong winds - x - - - -
61.3.2.3 Mountain environment - x - - - -
61.3.2.3.1 Describe constraints associated with helicopter operation in mountain environment - x - - - -
61.3.3 Emergency procedures (helicopter): Influence of technical problems - x - - - -
61.3.3.1 Engine failure - x - - - -
Describe recovery techniques in the event of engine failure during hover, climb, cruise,
61.3.3.1.1 - x - - - -
approach
61.3.3.2 Fire in cabin, cockpit or engine - x - - - -
61.3.3.2.1 Describe the basic actions when encountering fire in the cabin, cockpit or engine - x - - - -
61.3.3.3 Tail, rotor or directional control failure - x - - - -
61.3.3.3.1 Describe the basic actions following loss of tail rotor - x - - - -
61.3.3.3.2 Describe the basic actions following loss of directional control - x - - -
61.3.3.4 Ground resonance - x - - - -
61.3.3.4.1 Describe the effect of 'ground resonance' - x - - - -
61.3.3.4.2 Describe recovery actions in case of ground resonance - x - - - -
61.3.3.5 Blade stall - x - - - -
61.3.3.5.1 Describe situations in which 'blade stall' may occur - x - - - -
61.3.3.5.2 Describe recovery actions when encountering retreating blade stall - x - - - -
61.3.3.6 Settling with power (vortex ring) - x - - - -
61.3.3.6.1 Describe potential conditions for settling with power and recovery actions - x - - - -
61.3.3.7 Overpitch - x - - - -
61.3.3.7.1 Describe situations in which 'overpitch' may occur - x - - - -
61.3.3.7.2 Describe recovery actions in case of overpitch - x - - - -
61.3.3.8 Overspeed: rotor or engine - x - - - -
61.3.3.8.1 Describe situations that might lead to overspeed with rotor or engine - x - - - -
61.3.3.8.2 Describe overspeed control - x - - - -
61.3.3.9 Dynamic rollover - x - - - -
61.3.3.9.1 Describe potential conditions for 'dynamic rollover' - x - - - -
61.3.3.9.2 Describe recovery actions for dynamic rollover - x - - - -
61.3.3.10 Mast bumping - x - - - -
61.3.3.10.1 Describe potential conditions of the 'conducive to' and 'avoidance of' effect - x - - - -
62 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES - SAILPLANE - - x - - -
62.1 General requirements - - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 84 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
62.1.1 Responsibilities and documentation - - x - - -
62.1.1.1 Resonsibilities of the pilot-in-command - - x - - -
State the responsibility of the pilot-in-command to ensure that facilities required for the
SAO.OP.120 Flight
62.1.1.1.1 safe operation of the sailplane are adequate for the type of operation under which the - - x - - -
preparation
flight is to be conducted
SAO.OP.120 Flight
preparation,
State the responsibility of the pilot-in-command to ensure that the meteorological
62.1.1.1.2 - - x - - - SAO.OP.135
conditions will allow the flight to be completed safely
Meteorological
conditions
State the responsibility of the pilot-in-command to ensure that in case of a powered
SAO.OP.120 Flight
62.1.1.1.3 sailplane, when the engine is intended to be used, the quantity of fuel or other energy is - - x x - -
preparation
sufficient to allow the flight to be completed safely
62.1.1.1 Documentation - - x - - -
List the documents to be carried by SPL holder when exercising the privileges of SPL
62.1.1.1.1 - - x - - -
licence
(1) a valid SPL,
SFCL.045 Obligation
(2) a valid medical certificate,
- - x - - - to carry and present
(3) a personal identification document containing his or her photo,
documents
(4) sufficient logbook
62.1.1.1.2 List the elements that record of flights should contain - - x - - -
(1) personal details: name(s) and address of the pilot, and
(2) for each flight:
(i) name(s) of pilot-in-command (PIC)
(ii) date of flight
(iii) place and time of departure and arrival
SFCL.045 Obligation
(iv) type/model and registration of the sailplane
- - x - - - to carry and present
(v) total time of flight
documents
(vi) launching method
(vii) accumulated total time of flight
(viii) details on pilot function: PIC, including solo, dual, FI(S) or flight examiner
(sailplane) FE(S)
(ix) operational conditions (e.g. night, aerobatic, cloud flying)
62.1.2 Refueling and Battery replacement (powerd sailplanes) - - x - - -
62.1.2.1 Refueling (powered sailplanes) - - x x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 85 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
SAO.OP.125
Refuelling and
recharging or
State that a passenger is on board a powered sailplane, the batteries used for propulsion
62.1.2.1.1 - - x x - - replacing of batteries
shall not be recharged or replaced
with persons on
board – powered
sailplanes
62.2 SPL operational procedures - - x - - -
62.2.1 Launch methods - - x - - -
62.2.1.1 General considerations - - x - - -
62.2.1.1.1 Explain the importance to check wind direction and speed before launch - - x - - -
62.2.1.1.2 Explain the function of pre-determined breaking points used with launch cables - - x - - -
Describe how to select a suitable pre-determined braking point when selecting a cable
62.2.1.1.3 - - x - - -
for single- or double-seated plane launch or for airtow
62.2.1.2 Winch launch - - x - - -
62.2.1.2.1 Describe a safe and adequate profile of winch launch, and explain its limitations - - x - - -
62.2.1.2.2 Describe the release procedure for winch launch - - x - - -
Explain how to react in case of a cable break or launch failure during a winch launch
62.2.1.2.3 - - x - - -
with regard to: cable release, height, length of airfield, obstacles in turning area
62.2.1.3 Airtow - - x - - -
62.2.1.3.1 Describe a safe and adequate procedure for airtow, and how to perform corrections - - x - - -
62.2.1.3.2 Describe the release procedure for airtow - - x - - -
Explain how to react in case of a cable break during airtow with regard to: cable release,
62.2.1.3.3 - - x - - -
height, distance to airfield, close-in obstacles
62.2.2 Soaring techniques - - x - - -
62.2.2.1 Thermalling - - x - - -
62.2.2.1.1 Describe methods for detection and recognition of thermals - - x - - -
62.2.2.1.2 Explain the procedures for joining thermals and giving way - - x - - -
62.2.2.1.3 Describe the 'look-out procedure' during thermalling - - x - - -
62.2.2.1.4 Explain the us of audio soaring instruments - - x - - -
Decribe the hazards when centring in thermals and flying in close proximity to other
62.2.2.1.5 - - x - - -
sailplanes
62.2.2.2 Ridge flying - - x - - -
62.2.2.2.1 Describe the 'look-out procedure' during ridge flying - - x - - -
62.2.2.2.2 Explain the practical application of ridge flying rules - - x - - -
62.2.2.2.3 Describe methods for optimisation of flight path and speed control - - x - - -
62.2.2.2.4 Describe the hazard of wind shear during ridge flying - - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 86 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
Describe how to consider turning radius when flying with the same IAS at different
62.2.2.2.5 - - x - - -
altitudes
62.2.2.3 Wave flying - - x - - -
62.2.2.3.1 Describe the 'look-out procedure' during wave flying - - x - - -
62.2.2.3.2 Explain considerations and techniques for wave access and exit - - x - - -
62.2.2.3.3 Explain the speed limitations with increasing altitude - - x - - -
62.2.2.3.4 Explain considerations for use of oxygen - - x - - -
62.2.3 Circuits and landing - - x - - -
62.2.3.1 Techniques for entering circuits - - x - - -
62.2.3.1.1 Describe the 'look-out procedure' when entering or flying in circuits - - x - - -
State the importance to proceed with base leg and final approach when altitude comes
62.2.3.1.2 - - x - - -
below a preselected, safe value for landing
62.2.3.2 Landing - - x - - -
State the importance to look out for other aircraft and movements on the landing site
62.2.3.2.1 - - x - - -
during final approach
62.2.3.2.2 Explain why approach speed (IAS) does not change with head- or tailwind component - - x - - -
62.2.3.2.3 Describe how approach speed (IAS) should be adjusted in case of gusts and downdrafts - - x - - -
62.2.3.2.4 Describe how to perform the final approach in case of strong crosswind - - x - - -
62.2.3.3 Parking - - x - - -
Describe the correct procedure for parking sailplanes on ground with regard to wind
62.2.3.3.1 - - x - - -
direction, speed and gusts
62.2.4 Outlanding - - x - - -
62.2.4.1 Safety concepts - - x - - -
GM1 SAO.OP.135
62.2.4.1.1 Explain the concept of 'safe landing option' - - x - - - Meteorological
conditions
State that with regard to 'safe landing option', the pilot-in-command should consider GM1 SAO.OP.135
62.2.4.1.2 the suitability of chosen landing site, technical suitability of the sailplane and his or her - - x - - - Meteorological
experience conditions
62.2.4.2 Selecting landing sites - - x - - -
62.2.4.2.1 Describe properties of an outlanding site that should be checked for suitability - - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 87 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
(i) gliding range
(ii) restart procedures (only for self-launching and self-sustaining sailplanes)
(iii) decision process to not start the engine and to outland
(iv) selection of landing area AMC2 SFCL.130 SPL –
(v) circuit judgement and key positions Training course and
- - x - - -
(vi) circuit and approach procedures experience
(vii) actions after landing requirements
(viii) determination of wind direction
(ix) selection of landing direction
(x) considerations for landing at high slope landing sites
62.2.4.3 Landing techniques - - x - - -
62.2.4.3.1 Describe techniques how to perform an outlanding on rough or difficult terrain - - x - - -
62.2.4.3.2 Describe techniques how to perform an outlanding on short sites - - x - - -
62.2.4.3.3 Describe techniques how to perform an outlanding on sloped sites - - x - - -
62.2.4.3.4 Describe techniques how to perform an outlanding with tailwind - - x - - -
62.2.5 Special operational procedures and hazards - - x - - -
62.2.5.1 Passenger briefing - - x - - -
State that the pilot-in-command shall ensure that before and, when appropriate, during
SAO.OP.110
62.2.5.1.1 the flight, the passenger is given a briefing on normal, abnormal and emergency - - x - - -
Passenger briefing
procedures
State that either the pilot-in-command or a person designated by the operator is GM1 SAO.OP.110
62.2.5.1.2 - - x - - -
carrying out the passenger briefing Passenger briefing
List the items to be covered during a passenger briefing: emergency canopy opening,
AMC1 SAO.OP.110
62.2.5.1.3 parachute, oxygen dispensing equipment and other emergency equipment provided for - - x - - -
Passenger briefing
individual passenger use
62.2.5.2 Noise abatement - - x - - -
SAO.OP.105 Noise
State that the pilot-in-command shall take into account operating procedures to abatement
62.2.5.2.1 - - x - - -
minimise the effect of powered sailplane noise procedures –
powered sailplanes
62.2.5.3 In-flight fuel management (powered sailplanes) - - x x - -
GM1 SAO.OP.145 In-
flight fuel or other
62.2.5.3.1 Describe the concept of 'Fuel or other energy management' - - x x - -
energy management
– powered sailplanes
62.2.5.4 Use of oxygen - - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 88 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
Describe planned situations in which supplemental oxygen for every person on board SAO.OP.150 Use of
62.2.5.4.1 - - x - - -
should be carried supplemental oxygen
State that when the pilot-in-command cannot determine how the lack of oxygen might AMC1 SAO.OP.150
62.2.5.4.2 affect the persons on board, he or she should ensure that all occupants use supplemental - - x - - - Use of supplemental
oxygen for any period when the pressure altitude is above 10.000 ft oxygen
62.2.5.5 Icing conditions - - x - - -
SAO.OP.140 Ice and
Explain why the pilot-in-command shall only commence take-off if the sailplane is clear
62.2.5.5.1 - - x - - - other contaminants
of any deposit that might adversely affect performance or controllability of the sailplane
– ground procedures
62.3 Emergency procedures and emergency parachute operation - - x - - -
62.3.1 Emergency procedures - - x - - -
62.3.1.1 Responsibilities - - x - - -
State the responsibility of the pilot-in-command to take any action in an emergency
62.3.1.1.1 situation that requires immediate decision and action which he or she considers - - x - - -
necessary under the circumstances
State the resonsibility of every pilot to keep the cabin clear of loose or lost objects that
62.3.1.1.2 - - x - - -
may lead to blockage of rudder
62.3.1.2 Instrument failures - - x - - -
62.3.1.2.1 Describe how to proceed in case of airspeed indicator failure during launch - - x - - -
62.3.1.3 Gear extension failure - - x - - -
62.3.1.3.1 Describe the landing procedure in case a retractable landing gear cannot be extended - - x - - -
62.3.1.4 Engine failure (TMG) - - x x - -
62.3.1.4.1 Describe the correct procedure when experiencing engine failure after take-off - - x x - -
62.3.1.5 Emergency evacuation - - x - - -
62.3.1.5.1 State the color used for handles to release the canopy for emergency evacuation - - x - - -
62.3.1.5.2 Explain the procedures after exiting when using automatic or manual parachutes - - x - - -
62.3.2 Emergency parachute operation and landing - - x - - -
62.3.2.1 Operation and limitations - - x - - -
Describe the 'aircraft emergency landing parachute' as an emergency landing system for
62.3.2.1.1 - - x - - -
gliders, motor gliders and small aircraft, and is integrated in the aircraft cell
Explain the advantages of an aircraft emergency landing parachute system with regard
62.3.2.1.2 - - x - - -
to concept and practical problems using conventional emergency exits
Explain the disadvantages of an aircraft emergency landing parachute system with
62.3.2.1.3 - - x - - -
regard to installation on the aircraft
63 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES - BALLOON - - - - x x
63.1 General requirements - - - - x x
63.1.1 Responsibilities, documentation and limitations - - - - x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 89 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
63.1.1.1 Responsibilities of the pilot-in-command - - - - x x
BOP.BAS.030
State the responsibility of the pilot-in-command for the safety of the balloon and of any Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.1 - - - - x x
person or property carried therein during balloon operations the pilot-in-
command
State that the pilot-in-command is responsible for the operation and safety of the GM1 BOP.BAS.030
balloon from the moment the balloon is unloaded from the retrieve vehicle or trailer to Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.2 - - - - x x
the moment the balloon is reloaded, unless the preparation of the flight is delegated to the pilot-in-
a crew member command
BOP.BAS.030
State that the the pilot-in-command may only commence a flight if he or she is satisfied Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.3 - - - - x x
that all operational limitations are complied with the pilot-in-
command
as follows:
(i) the balloon is airworthy
(ii) the balloon is duly registered
(iii) instruments and equipment required for the execution of the flight are carried on BOP.BAS.030
board the balloon and are operative Responsibilities of
- - - - x x
(iv) the mass of the balloon is such that the flight can be conducted within the limits the pilot-in-
defined by the AFM command
(v) all equipment and baggage are properly loaded and secured
(vi) the operating limitations of the balloon as specified in the AFM will not be exceeded
at any time during the flight
BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot-in-command is responsible for the pre-flight briefing of persons Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.4 - - - - x x
assisting in the inflation and deflation of the envelope the pilot-in-
command
BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot-in-command has to ensure that persons assisting in the inflation and Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.5 - - - - x x
deflation of the envelope wear appropriate protective clothing the pilot-in-
command
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING GM1
Protective clothing includes: BOP.BAS.030(a)(7)
(a) long sleeves and trousers preferably made of natural fibres - - - - x x Responsibilities of
(b) stout footwear the pilot-in-
(c) gloves command

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 90 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot-in-command has to remain during flight in control of the balloon at Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.6 - - - - x x
all times except if another pilot is taking the controls the pilot-in-
command
BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot-in-command hast to take any action in an emergency situation that
Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.7 requires immediate decision and action which he or she considers necessary under the - - - - x x
the pilot-in-
circumstances
command
BOP.BAS.030
Remark: In such cases he or she may deviate from rules, operational procedures and Responsibilities of
- - - - x x
methods to the extent necessary in the interest of safety the pilot-in-
command
BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot may not continue a flight beyond the nearest weather-permissible
Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.8 operating site when his, or her capacity to perform his or her duties is significantly - - - - x x
the pilot-in-
reduced because of sickness, fatigue, lack of oxygen or any other cause
command
State that the pilot may not continue a flight beyond the nearest weather-permissible
63.1.1.1.9 - - - - x x
operating site in case of critically reduced meteorological conditions
BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot-in-command has to report to the appropriate air traffic services
Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.10 (ATS) unit, without delay, any hazardous weather or flight conditions encountered that - - - - x x
the pilot-in-
are likely to affect the safety of other aircraft
command
BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot-in-command hast to ensure that during critical phases of flight all
Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.11 crew members are at their assigned stations and do not perform any activities other - - - - x x
the pilot-in-
than those required for the safe operation of the balloon
command
BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot-in-command hast to ensure that all crew members can Responsibilities of
63.1.1.1.12 - - - - x x
communicate with each other in a common language the pilot-in-
command
63.1.1.2 Responsibilities of crew members - - - - x x
BOP.BAS.030
State that any crew member shall be responsible for the proper execution of his or her Responsibilities of
63.1.1.2.1 - - - - x x
duties in respect of the operation of the balloon the pilot-in-
command

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 91 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
BOP.BAS.040
63.1.1.2.2 State which incidents should be reported to the pilot-in-command by the crew members - - - - x x Responsibilities of
crew members
Crew members shall report to the pilot-in-command both of the following:
BOP.BAS.040
(1) any fault, failure, malfunction or defect, which he or she believes may affect the
- - - - x x Responsibilities of
airworthiness or safe operation of the balloon, including emergency systems
crew members
(2) any incident
BOP.BAS.040
State that any flight crew member who undertakes duties for more than one operator
63.1.1.2.3 - - - - x x Responsibilities of
shall maintain his or her individual records regarding flight times and rest periods
crew members
63.1.1.3 Passengers - - - - x x
Give examples in which way passengers may assist the pilot in commend or crew
63.1.1.3.1 - - - - x x
members
63.1.1.4 Documentation - - - - x x

BOP.BAS.050
State which documents and manuals should be carried on every flight: the operating
Documents, manuals
63.1.1.4.1 limitations, normal, abnormal and emergency procedures, current and suitable - - - - x x
and information to
aeronautical charts
be carried

BOP.BAS.050
State which documents, manuals and information shall be carried on each flight or Documents, manuals
63.1.1.4.2 - - - - x x
shall be stowed in the retrieve vehicle, as originals or copies and information to
be carried

(1) the certificate of registration

(2) the certificate of airworthiness, including annexes
(3) the AFM or equivalent document(s) BOP.BAS.050
(4) the aircraft radio licence Documents, manuals
- - - - x x
(5) the third party liability insurance certificate(s) and information to
(6) the balloon logbook or equivalent document(s) be carried
(7) any other documentation that may be pertinent to the flight or is required by the
State or States concerned with the flight

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 92 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks

GM1
Define 'AFM or equivalent document(s)': the flight manual for the balloon or other BOP.BAS.050(b)(3)
63.1.1.4.3 documents containing information required for the operation of the balloon within the - - - - x x Documents, manuals
terms of its certificate of airworthiness and information to
be carried

GM1
Define 'Balloon logbook or equivalent document(s)': required information may be BOP.BAS.050(b)(6)
63.1.1.4.4 recorded in documentation other than a logbook, such as the operational flight plan or - - - - x x Documents, manuals
the balloon technical log and information to
be carried

AMC1 BOP.BAS.065
63.1.1.4.5 List the items that should be included into the balloon logbook - - - - x x
Balloon logbook
(a) balloon nationality and registration
(b) date
(c) name(s) of flight crew member(s)
(d) place of departure
(e) place of arrival
AMC1 BOP.BAS.065
(f) time of departure - - - - x x
Balloon logbook
(g) time of arrival
(h) hours of flight
(i) type of operation
(j) incidents and observations
(k) signature of the pilot-in-command

GM1 BOP.BAS.050
State in which forms the documents, manuals and information may be available:
Documents, manuals
63.1.1.4.6 printed paper or other forms, such as electronic storage medium if accessibility, - - - - x x
and information to
usability and reliability is assured
be carried

BOP.BAS.030
State that the pilot-in-command has to record utilisation data and all known or
Responsibilities of
63.1.1.4.7 suspected defects in the balloon at the termination of the flight, or series of flights, in the - - - - x x
the pilot-in-
balloon logbook
command

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 93 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
GM1
State that when a balloon conducts a series of flights of short duration and is operated BOP.BAS.030(a)(14)
63.1.1.4.8 by the same pilot-in- command, the utilisation data for the series of flights may be - - - - x x Responsibilities of
recorded in the balloon logbook as a single entry the pilot-in-
command
GM1 BOP.BAS.065
63.1.1.4.9 Define 'series of flights' - - - - x x
Balloon logbook
‘Series of flights’ means consecutive flights, which begin and end:
(1) within a 6-hour period GM1 BOP.BAS.065
- - - - x x
(2) at the same operating site or remain within a local area Balloon logbook
(3) with the same pilot-in-command of the balloon
63.1.1.4 Limitations - - - - x x

BOP.BAS.050
Documents, manuals
63.1.1.4.1 Exlain the requirement to adhere to loading limits - - - - x x
and information to
be carried

Give examples for repairs and maintenance that may (or may not) be performed by the
63.1.1.4.2 - - - - x x
crew
63.2 Special operational procedures and hazards (general aspects) - - - - x x
63.2.1 Special operational procedures - - - - x x
63.2.1.1 Passenger briefing - - - - x x
State that the pilot-in-command shall ensure that before and, when appropriate, during
BOP.BAS.115
63.2.1.1.1 the flight passengers are given a briefing on normal, abnormal and emergency - - - - x x
Passenger briefing
procedures
AMC1 BOP.BAS.115
63.2.1.1.2 List the items to be covered during a passenger briefing - - - - x x
Passenger briefing
(1) safety in relation to ground equipment
(2) use of internal handholds
(3) wearing of suitable clothing
(4) smoking regulations
(5) in-flight use and stowage of personal belongings and baggage AMC1 BOP.BAS.115
- - - - x x
(6) importance to remain inside the basket at all times, particularly after landing Passenger briefing
(7) landing positions to be assumed to minimise the effect of the impact during landing
(8) safe manoeuvring of the balloon on the ground after landing
(9) use of oxygen-dispensing equipment, if applicable
(10) other emergency equipment provided for individual passenger use, if applicable

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 94 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
Explain the requirement for, before commencing the landing phase, passengers should AMC1 BOP.BAS.115
63.2.1.1.3 - - - - x x
be required to practise the correct landing position Passenger briefing
63.2.1.2 Build-up - - - - x x
AMC1 BOP.BAS.110
63.2.1.2.1 Describe the correct procedure for safely build up the balloon - - - - x x Fuel and ballast
supply and planning
AMC1 BOP.BAS.110
63.2.1.2.2 Describe the correct procedure for use of the blower - - - - x - Fuel and ballast
supply and planning
63.2.1.3 Fuel and ballast supply - - - - x x
AMC1 BOP.BAS.110
State that the pilot-in-command should only commence a flight if the reserve fuel or
63.2.1.3.1 - - - - x x Fuel and ballast
ballast is sufficient for 30 minutes of flight
supply and planning
AMC1 BOP.BAS.110
Describe in which conditions, the pilot-in-command should only commence a flight if
63.2.1.3.2 - - - - x x Fuel and ballast
the reserve fuel (for the burner) or ballast is sufficient for 15 minutes of flight
supply and planning
AMC1 BOP.BAS.110
(1) hot-air balloons equipped with a single fuel tank - - - - x x Fuel and ballast
supply and planning
BOP.BAS.170
63.2.1.3.3 State that refuelling of balloons shall not be conducted when persons are on board - - - - x - Refuelling with
persons on board
63.2.1.3.4 Describe the correct procedure for attaching ballast and weights - - - - - x
63.2.1.4 ATS Flight Plan and provision of alerting service - - - - x x
BOP.BAS.125
State that if an air traffic service (ATS) flight plan is not submitted because it is not
Submission of the air
63.2.1.4.1 required, the pilot-in-command shall submit adequate information in order to permit - - - - x x
traffic service flight
alerting services to be activated if required
plan
AMC1 BOP.BAS.125
State that the operator should nominate a person to be responsible for alerting search Submission of the air
63.2.1.4.2 - - - - x x
and rescue services for flights without submitted ATS flight plans traffic service flight
plan
63.2.1.5 Take-off - - - - x x
Explain why at the balloon take-off site, wind direction and speed should be available to AMC1 BOP.BAS.150
63.2.1.5.1 - - - - x x
the pilot-in-command Take-off conditions
AMC1 BOP.BAS.150
63.2.1.5.2 Describe the procedure of checking relevant items before take-off - - - - x x
Take-off conditions

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 95 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AMC1 BOP.BAS.150
63.2.1.5.3 Explain the requirement for setting up a safety barrier around the balloon for take-off - - - - x x
Take-off conditions
AMC1 BOP.BAS.150
63.2.1.5.4 Describe the procedure for normal take-off and climb - - - - x x
Take-off conditions
AMC1 BOP.BAS.150
63.2.1.5.5 Describe the procedure for take-off when surrounded by high obstacles - - - - x x
Take-off conditions
63.2.1.6 Noise abatement - - - - x -
BOP.BAS.105 Noise
Describe how the pilot-in-command may minimise the effect of heating-system noise,
63.2.1.6.1 - - - - x - abatement
while ensuring however that safety has priority over noise abatement
procedures
63.2.1.7 Use of oxygen - - - - x x
State that when the pilot-in-command cannot determine how the lack of oxygen might
affect all occupants on board, he or she should ensure that all flight crew members AMC1 BOP.BAS.180
63.2.1.7.1 engaged in performing duties essential to the safe operation of a balloon use - - - - x x Use of supplemental
supplemental oxygen for any period in excess of 30 minutes when the pressure altitude is oxygen
between 10.000 and 13.000 ft
State that when the pilot-in-command cannot determine how the lack of oxygen might AMC1 BOP.BAS.180
63.2.1.7.2 affect all occupants on board, he or she should ensure that all occupants use - - - - x x Use of supplemental
supplemental oxygen for any period when the pressure altitude is above 13.000 ft oxygen
63.2.1.8 Regulator icing - - - - x -
63.2.1.8.1 List causes that may lead to regulator icing - - - - x -
63.2.1.9 Landing - - - - x x
63.2.1.9.1 List criteria that an appropriate landing site should match - - - - x x
63.2.1.9.2 List actions to be performed and checked before landing - - - - x x
63.2.1.9.3 Describe the correct procedure for landing with strong winds - - - - x x
63.2.1.9.4 Describe the correct procedure for landing in high-tree environment - - - - x x
63.2.2 Hazards - - - - x x
63.2.2.1 Meteorological hazards - - - - x x
63.2.2.1.1 Describe meteorological condistions suitable for a balloon ride - - - - x x
AMC1
Explain why, when unexpected meteorological conditions affecting other aircraft are
BOP.BAS.030(a)(17)
encountered that may affect the safety of other aircraft operations, the pilot-in-
63.2.2.1.2 - - - - x x Responsibilities of
command should advise the appropriate air traffic services (ATS) unit as soon as
the pilot-in-
practicable
command
63.2.2.1.3 Describe the hazards from strong showers or thunderstorms in the vicinity - - - - x x
63.2.2.1.4 Describe the hazards when climbing / descending through an inversion layer - - - - x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 96 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks

63.2.2.1.5 Describe the hazards when descending above heated surfaces, or into colder/warmer air - - - - x x

63.2.2.1.6 Describe the hazards from strong winds in mountainous areas (lee waves) - - - - x x
63.2.2.1.7 Describe the correct procedure when encountering thermal updrafts - - - - x x
63.2.2.2 Smoking - - - - x x
State that no person shall smoke on board a balloon during any phase of flight or within BOP.BAS.135
63.2.2.2.1 - - - - x x
the direct vicinity of a balloon Smoking on board
63.3 Emergency procedures - - - - x x
63.3.1 Documents, equipment and procedures - - - - x x
63.3.1.1 Documents and equipment - - - - x x

AMC1
State that operating limitations, as well as normal, abnormal and emergency BOP.BAS.050(a)(1)
63.3.1.1.1 procedures should be available to the pilot during the operation by providing the - - - - x x Documents, manuals
specific sections of the aircraft flight manual (AFM) and information to
be carried

BOP.BAS.355 Radio
State that the radio communication equipment shall provide for communication on the
63.3.1.1.2 - - - - x x communication
aeronautical emergency frequency 121,5 MHz
equipment
63.3.1.2 Safety provisions - - - - x x
State that the pilot-in-command shall ensure that before and, when appropriate, during
BOP.BAS.115
63.3.1.2.1 the flight passengers are given a briefing on normal, abnormal and emergency - - - - x x
Passenger briefing
procedures
BOP.BAS.160
State that the pilot-in-command shall not simulate situations that require the
63.3.1.2.2 - - - - x x Simulated situations
application of abnormal or emergency procedures when carrying passengers
in flight

BOP.BAS.300
63.3.1.2.3 State that all required emergency equipment shall be easily accessible for immediate use - - - - x x Instruments and
equipment — General

State that If a cord is used for rapid or emergency deflation of the envelope and the
CS 31HB.57 Control
63.3.1.2.4 device cannot be resealed in flight, the part of the cord to be handled by the pilot must - - - - x x
cords
be coloured red
Explain the requirement of a secondary ingnition source available during a ride with a CS 31HB.57 Control
63.3.1.2.5 - - - - x -
hot-air balloon cords
CS 31HB.57 Control
63.3.1.2.6 Explain the concept of redundance when carrying a double-burner installation - - - - x -
cords

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 97 of 167

 60 OPR

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG onlyBPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
Explain why gas containers of hot-air balloon should not be refilled by volume at low CS 31HB.57 Control
63.3.1.2.7 - - - - x -
temperatures cords
63.3.1.3 Procedures - - - - x x
Describe appropriate actions in case of: fire (in the air / on ground), fuel system failures,
63.3.1.3.1 deflation system failures, fast/hard landing, passenger incapacitation, expanding filling - - - - x x
gas
State in which cases life wests for every passenger have to carried on board, and when
63.3.1.3.2 - - - - x x
they should be inflated
State the approximate rate of descent when reaching the ground, in case the heating
63.3.1.3.3 - - - - x x
system of a hot-air balloon fails

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 98 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
71 MASS AND BALANCE: AEROPLANES OR HELICOPTERS x x x - -
71.1 Purpose of mass and balance considerations x x x - -
71.1.1 Mass limitations x x x - -
71.1.1.1 Importance in regard to structural limitations x x x - -
71.1.1.1.1 Describe the relationship between aircraft mass and structural stress x x x - -
Describe the possible hazards resulting from a (too) high take off mass with regard to structural
71.1.1.1.2 x x x - -
stress
71.1.1.1.3 Explain why loads exceeding the loading limitations have to be reduced to limits x x x - -
71.1.1.2 Importance in regard to performance limitations x x - - -
71.1.1.2.1 Describe the relationship between aircraft mass and aircraft performance x x - - -
Describe the possible hazards resulting from a (too) high take-off mass with regard to
71.1.1.2.2 x x - - -
aeroplane/helicopter performance
71.1.2 CG limitations x x x - -
71.1.2.1 Importance in regard to stability and controllability x x x - -
71.1.2.1.1 Describe the relationship between CG position and stability/controllability of the aircraft x x x - -
71.1.2.1.2 Describe possible hazards associated with a CG position out of aft/forward limits x x x - -
71.1.2.1.3 Explain the importance of securing or tying down pieces of baggage x x x - -
71.1.2.1.4 Explain the importance to load or unload masses to achieve an acceptable CG position x x x - -
71.1.2.2 Importance in regard to performance x x x - -
Describe the effects of CG position on performance parameters (speeds, altitude, endurance and
71.1.2.2.1 x x x - -
range)
71.2 Loading x x x - -
71.2.1 Terminology x x x - -
71.2.1.1 Mass terms x x x - -
71.2.1.1.1 Define the term 'basic empty mass' x x x - -
71.2.1.1.2 Define the terms 'take-off mass', 'landing mass', 'ramp/taxi mass', 'zero fuel mass' x x - - -
71.2.1.2 Load terms (including fuel terms) x x - - -
Define the terms: '(traffic) load', 'block fuel', 'taxi fuel', 'take-off fuel', 'trip fuel', 'reserve fuel'
71.2.1.2.1 x x - - -
(contingency, alternate, final reserve), 'extra fuel'
71.2.1.2.2 List the common units of measurement for masses and convert them (lbs, kg, kp, etc.) x x - - -
List the common units of measurement for fuel volume and and mass, and convert them (liters,
71.2.1.2.3 x x - - -
US/Imp gallons)
71.2.2 Mass limits x x - - -
71.2.2.1 Structural limitations x x - - -
71.2.2.1.1 Explain the term 'maximum ramp mass' x x - - -
71.2.2.1.2 Explain the term 'maximum take off mass (MTOM)' x x - - -
71.2.2.1.3 Explain the term 'maximum landing mass (MLM)' x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 99 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
71.2.2.1.4 Explain the term 'maximum zero-fuel mass (MZFM)' x x - - -
Explain why on most aircrafts, the max allowed landing mass is smaller than the max allowed
71.2.2.1.5 x x - - -
take off mass
71.2.2.2 Performance limitations x x - - -
71.2.2.2.1 Describe the terms 'performance-limited take-off mass' and 'performance-limited landing mass' x x - - -
71.2.2.3 Baggage compartment limitations x x - - -
Describe the maximum load in baggage compartments (maximum load and maximum load per
71.2.2.3.1 x x - - -
unit area)
71.2.3 Mass calculations x x - - -
71.2.3.1 Maximum masses for take-off and landing x x - - -
Calculate the maximum mass for take-off and landing, given mass-and-load components and
71.2.3.1.1 x x - - -
structural/ performance limits
Calculate the maximum allowed traffic load and fuel load in order not to exceed the given
71.2.3.1.2 x x - - -
allowed take-off mass
71.3 Fundamentals of CG calculations x x x - -
71.3.1 Definition of centre of gravity x x x - -
71.3.1.1 Definition x x x - -
71.3.1.1.1 Define and explain the meaning of 'center of gravity (CG)' x x x - -
71.3.1.2 Limitations x x x - -
State where the CG position and forward/aft limits for an aircraft at basic empty mass can be
71.3.1.2.1 x x x - -
found
71.3.2 Conditions of equilibrium (balance of forces and balance of moments x x x - -
71.3.2.1 Definition x x x - -
71.3.2.1.1 Define ‘datum’ (reference point), ‘moment arm’ and ‘moment’ x x x - -
71.3.2.2 Relation between factors for equlilbrium x x x - -
71.3.2.2.1 List the forces acting for the balance of moments x x x - -
71.3.2.2.2 Describe the relationship between center of pressure, CG and elevator downforce x x x - -
71.3.3 Basic calculations of CG x x x - -
71.3.3.1 General considerations x x x - -
71.3.3.1.1 Describe how to calculate 'moment' by multiplying 'mass (force)' x 'moment arm' x x x - -
71.3.3.2 Calculations x x - - -
71.3.3.2.1 Calculate moments / CG position for different loads (pilot, passengers, baggage, fuel) x x - - -
71.3.3.2.2 Determine whether a flight can be performed with a given load or not x x - - -
71.4 Mass and balance details of aircraft x x x - -
71.4.1 Contents of mass and balance documentation x x x - -
71.4.1.1 Datum and moment arm x x x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 100 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
Describe when an airplane is weighed, either periodically or after bigger repairs, after repainting
71.4.1.1.1 x x x - -
or when larger pieces of equipment are installed or removed
71.4.1.1.2 State where the datum and moment arms for aircraft can be found x x x - -
71.4.1.1.3 List the common units of measurement used for moments and convert them (kgm, lbft, etc.) x x x - -
71.4.1.2 CG position as distance from datum x x x - -
Describe the different forms in presenting CG position as distance from datum or as percentage of
71.4.1.2.1 x x x - -
mean aerodynamic chord (% MAC)
71.4.2 Extraction of basic mass and balance data from aircraft documentation x x x - -
71.4.2.1 BEM x x x - -
71.4.2.1.1 Extract empty weight and moment from a given weighing report x x x - -
Determine the loading limits (e.g. pilot/passenger seat, maximum compartment load) from a
71.4.2.1.2 x x x - -
given AFM/POH
State that actual weight & balance data / weighing report can be found in the aircraft documents
71.4.2.1.3 x x x - -
or the AFM/POH
Extract the datume plane, and arms for different stations (rows of seats, fuel tanks) from a given
71.4.2.1.4 x x - - -
AFM/POH
71.4.2.1.5 State which pieces of equipment / fuel / oil masses are included in the basic empty weight x x - - -
71.4.2.2 CG position or moment at BEM x x x - -
71.4.2.2.1 Determine CG position at basic empty mass from AFM/POH x x x - -
71.4.2.2.2 Determine the allowed CG range from a given AFM/POH x x x - -
71.4.2.3 Deviations from standard configuration x x x - -
Extract values from given documents for deviation from standard configuration as a result of
71.4.2.3.1 x x x - -
varying crew, optional equipment, optional fuel tanks, etc.
71.5 Determination of CG position x x x - -
71.5.1 Methods x x x - -
71.5.1.1 Arithmetic method x x x - -
Calculate the CG position of an aircraft by using the formula: CG position = sum of moments / total
71.5.1.1.1 x x x - -
mass
71.5.1.1.2 Determine how the CG position will shift during flight x x x - -
71.5.1.1.3 Explain how in some cases, a CG position out of limits can be corrected using trim ballast x x x - -
71.5.1.2 Graphic method x x x - -
71.5.1.2.1 Determine the CG position of an aircraft by using the loading graphs given in sample documents x x x - -
71.5.2 Load and trim sheet x x - - -
71.5.2.1 General considerations x x - - -
71.5.2.1.1 Explain the principle and the purpose of load sheets. x x - - -
Load sheet and CG envelope for light aeroplanes and for
71.5.2.2 x x - - -
helicopters

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 101 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
71.5.2.2.1 Add loading data and calculate masses in a sample load sheet/balance schedule x x - - -
72 PERFORMANCE: AEROPLANES x - - - -
72.1 Introduction x - - - -
72.1.1 Performance classes x - - - -
72.1.1.1 Definitions and concept x - - - -
Describe the basic concept that the applicable operational requirements differ depending on
72.1.1.1.1 x - - - -
aeroplane performance
72.1.1.1.2 State that light aeroplanes are operated under Performance Class B (certified CS-23) x - - - -
72.1.2 Stages of flight x - - - -
72.1.2.1 Definitions x - - - -
72.1.2.1.1 Define and explain the terms 'take off roll' and 'landing roll' x - - - -
72.1.2.1.2 Define the terms 'Takeoff Distance Available (TODA)' and 'Landing Distance Available (LDA)' x - - - -
72.1.2.1.3 State that take-off or landing distance is computed from standstill to an altitude of 15m/50ft x - - - -
72.1.2.2 Factors affecting take-off and landing distances x - - - -
Explain the effect of flap configuration with regard to takeoff ground roll, takeoff distance and
72.1.2.2.1 x - - - -
clearance of close-in and distant obstacles
72.1.2.2.2 Explain the influence of a grass runway surface on take-off and landing performance x - - - -
Effect of aeroplane mass, wind, altitude, runway slope and
72.1.3 x - - - -
runway conditions
72.1.3.1 General considerations x - - - -
Describe the influence of aerodrome elevation, temperature and QNH on take-off and landing
72.1.3.1.1 x - - - -
performance
72.1.3.1.2 Explain the influence of runway conditions on take-off and landing performance x - - - -
72.1.3.2 Effect on aeroplane performance x - - - -
Explain the general influence of temperature and air density (chosen flight altitude or elevation)
72.1.3.2.1 x - - - -
on aircraft performance
72.1.3.2.2 Describe the influence of head- and tail wind on take-off and landing performance x - - - -
72.1.3.2.3 Describe the influence of aircraft mass on take-off and landing performance x - - - -
72.1.3.2.4 Explain the influence of runway slope on take-off and landing performance x - - - -
72.1.4 Gradients x - - - -
72.1.4.1 Definitions x - - - -
72.1.4.1.1 Define the term 'climb/descent gradient' and 'climb/descent angle' x - - - -
Describe the mathematical relationship between 'climb/descent gradient' and 'climb/descent
72.1.4.1.2 x - - - -
angle' of the flight path
72.2 SE Aeroplanes x - - - -
72.2.1 Definitions of terms and speeds x - - - -
72.2.1.1 Terms x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 102 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
Define and explain the following terms: Speed for best angle of climb (vX), Speed for best rate of
72.2.1.1.1 x - - - -
climb (vY)
72.2.1.2 Speeds x - - - -
72.2.1.2.1 Define the following speeds: stall speeds vS, vS0 and vS1, rotation speed vR x - - - -
72.2.2 Take-off and landing performance x - - - -
72.2.2.1 Use of aeroplane flight manual data x - - - -
72.2.2.1.1 Determine take-off and landing roll and distances from given AFM/POH tables x - - - -
72.2.2.1.2 Determine take-off and landing roll and distances from given AFM/POH graphs x - - - -
Calculate head- and crosswind components for use with performance graphs/tables from given
72.2.2.1.3 x - - - -
MET report data
Explain how in performance graphs/tables air density is considered by combination of air
72.2.2.1.4 x - - - -
temperature and pressure altitude
State that performance factors included in an AFM/POH for grass runways are not valid in case of
72.2.2.1.5 x - - - -
every grass height and that this factor needs to be considered additionally
72.2.2.1.6 Decide, based on relevant calculations, if a certain flight can be performed safely or not x - - - -
72.2.3 Climb and cruise performance x - - - -
72.2.3.1 Use of aeroplane flight data x - - - -
Determine the time, distance or fuel needed to reach a certain flight altitude, with given data
72.2.3.1.1 x - - - -
from AFM/POH
Determine the climb rate of an aircraft depending on temperature and pressure altitude, with
72.2.3.1.2 x - - - -
given data from AFM/POH
Determine the maximum achievable climb rate of an aircraft depending on parameters like
72.2.3.1.3 x - - - -
temperature, load, engine power, with given data from AFM/POH
Determine the cruising speed (TAS) and fuel flow at a certain engine power and flight altitude,
72.2.3.1.4 x - - - -
with given data from AFM/POH
Determine the engine power required to reach a certain cruise speed (TAS) at given altitude and
72.2.3.1.5 x - - - -
temperature, with given data from AFM/POH
Determine fuel flow for given altitude and speed (TAS) / power setting, with given data from
72.2.3.1.6 x - - - -
AFM/POH
72.2.3.2 Effect of density altitude and aeroplane mass x - - - -
72.2.3.2.1 Explain the term 'density altitude' x - - - -
Describe the effect of density altitude on aeroplane performance with regard to speed (TAS), climb
72.2.3.2.2 x - - - -
rate and fuel flow
Determine the mass, or mass range, for which aeropolane performance data from AFM/POH is
72.2.3.2.3 x - - - -
given
72.2.3.3 Endurance and the effects of the different recommended power or thrust settings x - - - -
72.2.3.3.1 Explain the effect of power on fuel flow, range and endurance x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 103 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
72.2.3.3.2 Explain the term 'maximum endurance' x - - - -
72.2.3.3.3 State which value for 'endurance' should to be entered into the ATS flight plan x - - - -
72.2.3.4 Still air range with various power or thrust settings x - - - -
72.2.3.4.1 Describe how the achievable range varies with different power settings x - - - -
72.2.3.4.2 Explain the term 'maximum range' x - - - -
Describe the difference between 'maximum endurance' and 'maximum range' with regard to
72.2.3.4.3 x - - - -
power setting and speed
73 PERFORMANCE: HELICOPTERS - x - - -
73.1 General - x - - -
73.1.1 Introduction - x - - -
73.1.1.1 Definitions and terms - x - - -
73.1.1.1.1 Define the terms 'climb angle' and 'climb gradient' - x - - -
73.1.1.1.2 Define the terms 'flight-path angle' and 'flight-path gradient' - x - - -
73.1.1.2 Stages of flight - x - - -

73.1.1.2.1 Explain the following phases of flight: take-off, climb, level flight, descent, approach and landing - x - - -
73.1.1.2.2 Explain the necessity for different take-off and landing procedures - x - - -
Explain the difference between hovering in ground effect (HIGE) and hovering out of ground effect
73.1.1.2.3 - x - - -
(HOGE)
73.1.1.3 Effect on performance of atmospheric, airport or heliport and helicopter conditions - x - - -
Explain how the following factors affect helicopter performance: pressure altitude, humidity,
73.1.1.3.1 - x - - -
temperature, wind, helicopter mass, helicopter configuration, helicopter centre of gravity (CG)
73.2 Applicability of airworthiness requirements - x - - -
73.2.1 Definitions and terminology - x - - -
73.2.1.1 Helicopter performance certification - x - - -
73.2.1.1.1 Name the general differences between helicopters certified according to CS-27 and CS-29 - x - - -
73.3 Performance: SE helicopters - x - - -
73.3.1 Definitions of terms - x - - -
73.3.1.1 (a) velocities: vx, vy - x - -
73.3.1.1.1 Define and explain the speeds 'vX' and 'vY' - x - - -
73.3.1.2 (b) velocity of best range and of maximum endurance - x - - -
73.3.1.2.1 Define 'VmaxRange' (speed for maximum range) and 'VmaxEnd' (speed for maximum endurance) - x - - -
73.3.1.3 (c) power limitations - x - - -
73.3.1.3.1 Understand and interpret the power required/power available versus TAS graphs - x - - -
73.3.1.4 (d) altitudes - x - - -
73.3.1.4.1 Explain the terms 'operational ceiling' and 'absolute ceiling' - x - - -
73.3.2 Take-off, cruise and landing performance: Use and interpretation of diagrams and tables - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 104 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
73.3.2.1 (a) Take-off - x - - -
73.3.2.1.1 (1) take-off run and distance available - x - - -
73.3.2.1.2 (2) take-off and initial climb - x - - -
73.3.2.1.3 (3) effects of mass, wind and density altitude - x - - -
73.3.2.1.4 (4) effects of ground surface and gradient - x - - -
73.3.2.2 (b) Landing - x - - -
73.3.2.2.1 (1) effects of mass, wind, density altitude and approach speed - x - - -
73.3.2.2.2 (2) effects of ground surface and gradient - x - - -
73.3.2.3 (c) In-flight - x - - -
73.3.2.3.1 (1) relationship between power required and power available - x - - -
73.3.2.3.2 (2) performance diagram - x - - -
73.3.2.3.3 (3) effects of configuration, mass, temperature and altitude - x - - -
73.3.2.3.4 (4) reduction of performance during climbing turns - x - - -
73.3.2.3.5 (5) autorotation - x - - -
73.3.2.3.6 (6) adverse effects (icing, rain and condition of the airframe) - x - - -
74 FLIGHT PLANNING AND FLIGHT MONITORING x x x x x
74.1 Flight planning for VFR flights x x x x x
74.1.1 VFR navigation plan x x x x x
74.1.1.1 Routes, airfields, heights and altitudes from VFR charts x x x x x
List available charts for different phases of flight (e.g. airport chart, visual flight chart, enroute
74.1.1.1.1 x x x x x
chart, E-LO)
74.1.1.1.2 Extract and interpret information about routings and airspace structure from VFR charts x x x x x
74.1.1.1.3 Extract and interpret information about airfield data from VFR charts x x x x x
74.1.1.1.4 Extract and interpret information about heights and altitudes from VFR charts x x x x x
74.1.1.1.5 Find the highest obstacle within a given distance on either side of the course x x x x x
74.1.1.1.6 Extract and interpret various symbols from VFR charts according to ICAO standard x x x x x
74.1.1.2 Courses and distances from VFR charts x x x x x
74.1.1.2.1 Extract courses (true, magnetic) from VFR charts x x x x x
74.1.1.2.2 Extract distances from VFR charts x x x x x
74.1.1.2.3 Explain the use of distance markings ('ticks') on full degrees of longitude for distance measuring x x x x x
74.1.1.3 Aerodrome charts and aerodrome directory x x - - -
Explain the reasons for studying the visual departure procedures and the available approach
74.1.1.3.1 x x - - -
procedures prior to a flight
Extract the available distances for take-off and landing (TODA, TORA, LDA) on a specific runway
74.1.1.3.2 x x - - -
from a given aerodrome chart
Extract various information of ground structure and annotations from a given aerodrome chart
74.1.1.3.3 x x - - -
(e.g. taxi ways, displaced thresholds, fuel station etc.)

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 105 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
74.1.1.4 Communications and radio navigation planning data x x x x x
Extract frequencies for radio communication from a given VFR chart (e.g. TWR, INFORMATION,
74.1.1.4.1 x x x x x
INFO etc.)
74.1.1.4.2 Extract frequencies for radio navigation from a given VFR chart (e.g. NDB, VOR etc.) x x x x x
74.1.1.5 Completion of navigation plan x x - - -
Given an excerpt from a flight log, determine various values, e.g. MH, WCA, GS, leg-wise and
74.1.1.5.1 x x - - -
accumulated times, distances and fuel required
Calculate the horizontal distance to climb (TOC) or descend (TOD) to/from a given level or altitude
74.1.1.5.2 x x - - -
with given data
Explain how to determine the position of a significant VFR point for insertion into a GNSS flight
74.1.1.5.3 x x - - -
plan, using distance and bearing from existing significant points or using coordinates
74.2 Fuel planning x x - - -
74.2.1 General knowledge x x - - -
74.2.1.1 Definitions and general considerations x x - - -
Explain the effect of flight altitude on fuel consumption, and where to find information about
74.2.1.1.1 x x - - -
consumption
Explain the relations between airspeed, engine power setting and fuel consumption during
74.2.1.1.2 x x - - -
different phases of flight
74.2.1.1.3 Explain the terms 'maximum usable fuel', 'total amount of fuel', 'unusable fuel' x x - - -
74.2.1.2 General calculations x x - - -
Calculate the available flight time/range from given average fuel flow/consumption and
74.2.1.2.1 x x - - -
available amount of fuel
Calculate the required fuel from given average fuel flow/ consumption and required time/range to
74.2.1.2.2 x x - - -
be flown
74.2.2 Pre-flight calculation of fuel required x x - - -
74.2.2.1 General x x - - -
Determine relevant data, such as fuel capacity, fuel flow/ consumption at different power settings,
74.2.2.1.1 x x - - -
altitudes and atmospheric conditions, using the AFM/POH
74.2.2.1.2 State a suitable amount of fuel for engine-start, run-up and taxiing x x - - -
74.2.2.1.3 Determine the fuel consumption during climb, using the AFM/POH x x - - -
Determine the fuel consumption during cruising flight at a certain engine power setting and at
74.2.2.1.4 x x - - -
certain environmental conditions (altitude, etc.) using the AFM/POH
74.2.2.1.5 Determine the fuel consumption during descent, using the AFM/POH x x - - -
74.2.2.1.6 Determine the fuel required for flight to the alternate aerodrome x x - - -
Determine the fuel additionals for unplanned deviation from planned fuel consumption
74.2.2.1.7 x x - - -
('contingencies')

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 106 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
Describe which minimum reserve fuel is to be carried on board according to NCO.OP.125
74.2.2.1.8 x x - - -
(10min/30min)
74.2.2.1.9 State that the minimum reserve is to be calculated using cruise performance on cruise altitude x x - - -

Calculate the fuel required for a flight (block fuel, trip fuel) from fuel amounts required for engine-
74.2.2.1.10 x x - - -
start, taxiing, climb, en-route flight, descent and reserves (contingency, alternate, final reserve)

74.2.2.2 Calculation of extra fuel x x - - -

Explain the different types of fuel reserves, especially: 'alternate fuel', 'contingency fuel', 'minimum
74.2.2.2.1 x x - - -
reserve'
74.2.2.2.2 Describe situations in which cases additional fuel reserve can be / might be / should be carried x x - - -
74.2.2.2.3 Calculate the possible extra fuel under given conditions. x x - - -
74.2.2.3 Completion of the fuel section of the navigation plan (fuel log) and calculation of total fuel x x - - -
74.2.2.3.1 Calculate the total fuel required for a given flight x x - - -
74.2.2.3.2 Complete the fuel section of the navigational plan (fuel log) x x - - -
74.3 Pre-flight preparation x x x x x
74.3.1 AIP and NOTAM briefing x x x x x
74.3.1.1 General x x x x x
Describe the content and usage of aeronautical and regulatory information published in the
74.3.1.1.1 x x x x x
national aeronautical information publication (AIP)
74.3.1.1.2 Determine beginning and end of civil twilight (ECET/BCMT) times using the AIP x x x x x
74.3.1.1.3 Define the term 'NOTAM', and describe how NOTAM information can be recieved x x x x x
74.3.1.2 Ground facilities and services x x x x x
Extract operational information of an aerodrome using the AIP, e.g. fuel grades, operating times
74.3.1.2.1 x x x x x
(PPR), ground services etc.
74.3.1.2.2 Explain the meaning and practical significance of the term 'PPR' x x x x x
Extract specific information about runways (e.g. TODA, TORA, LDA), taxiways and VFR flight
74.3.1.2.3 x x - - -
procedures (e.g. traffic pattern, noise abatement) from AIP aerodome charts
74.3.1.3 Departure, destination and alternate aerodromes x x - - -

74.3.1.3.1 List criteria how to select suitable aerodromes for take-off and landing and alternate aerodromes x x - - -
74.3.1.3.2 Explain for what types of flights an alternate aerodrome has to be selected x x - - -
Using AIP and/or NOTAM information given, determine if an aerodrome is suitable as departure,
74.3.1.3.3 x x - - -
destination or alternate aerodrome
Extract and interpret airport information from NOTAMs given, e.g. opening hours, work in
74.3.1.3.4 x x - - -
progress (WIP), restrictions, changes of frequencies, navigation aids and facilities
74.3.1.3.5 Check if satellite-based services are (RAIM) available during the expected time of use of NOTAMs x x - - -
74.3.1.4 Airway routings and airspace structure x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 107 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
Select an appropriate altitude/FL with respect to semi-circular rules and rules-of-the-air
74.3.1.4.1 x x - - -
requirements
74.3.1.4.2 Determine from airspace classification which equipment has to be carried on a specific routing x x - - -

74.3.1.4.3 Determine from given instrumentation/equipment if a flight can be performed in certain airspaces x x - - -
74.3.2 Meteorological briefing x x x x x
Extraction and analysis of relevant data from meteorological
74.3.2.1 x x x x x
documents
74.3.2.1.1 State under which conditions an aircaft may be operated into known icing conditions x x - - -
From given RWY and ATIS/METAR information, calculate head/tail and crosswind components for
74.3.2.1.2 x x - - -
take-off or landing
With cloud information given by met reports (e.g. GAFOR) and given airspace structure, decide
74.3.2.1.3 x x x x x
under which conditions a VFR flight can be conducted
74.3.2.1.4 From given QNH, determine the lowest (usable) FL above a given transition altitude x x - - -
For given obstacle clearance and lowest QNH and ISA temperture deviation along the planned
74.3.2.1.5 x x - - -
track, determine the lowest usable FL providing the required obstacle clearance
74.4 ICAO flight plan (ATS flight plan) x x x x x
74.4.1 Individual flight plan x x x x x
74.4.1.1 Format of flight plan x x x x x
74.4.1.1.1 State where to find information about requirements and the format of an ATS flight plan x x x x x
74.4.1.1.2 State the maximum period of validity of an ATS flight plan x x x x x
Given example equipment, list the correct code for type of equipment on board to be entered into
74.4.1.1.3 x x x x x
the flight plan
74.4.1.1.4 Extract the required information for an ATS flight plan out of an operational flight plan x x x x x
74.4.1.2 Completion of the flight plan x x x x x

74.4.1.2.1 Define and explain the terms 'Estimated off block time (EOBT)' and 'Estimated time of arrival (ETA)' x x x x x

From example data given, enter or extract the required/possible entries into/from the fields of the
74.4.1.2.2 x x x x x
ATS flight plan
74.4.1.2.3 Enter the crossing of state borders into the ATS flight plan correctly x x x x x
74.4.1.2.4 Enter a suitable routing information into the ATS flight plan x x x x x
74.4.1.3 Submission of the flight plan x x x x x
74.4.1.3.1 Describe ways how to submit an ATS flight plan x x x x x
State from given examples, in which cases the submission of a flight plan is required (e.g. flight at
74.4.1.3.2 x x x x x
night, IFR, crossing specific state borders)
74.4.1.3.3 Explain why a flight plan should be submitted even in cases in which it isn't mandatory x x x x x
74.4.1.3.4 State in which timeframe before a flight an ATS flight plan needs to be submitted to ATS x x x x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 108 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
74.4.1.3.5 State the timeframe in which (after filing an ATS flight plan) ATC should be contacted x x x x x
Describe the actions to be taken in case an aircraft landed on an aerodrome other than stated in
74.4.1.3.6 x x x x x
the ATS flight plan
74.4.1.3.7 Describe how to postpone the 'EOBT' as submitted in the flight plan x x x x x
74.5 Flight monitoring and in-flight replanning x x - - -
74.5.1 Flight monitoring x x - - -
74.5.1.1 Monitoring of track and time x x - - -
74.5.1.1.1 Explain the relevance of an operational flight plan during flight planning and during flight x x - - -
74.5.1.1.2 State the reasons for possible deviations from the planned track and planned timings x x - - -
Using excerpts from an operational flight plan (flight log) and actual track information,
74.5.1.1.3 x x - - -
determine actual wind and WCA for the remaining legs
Using excerpts from an operational flight plan (flight log) and actual times given, calculate the
74.5.1.1.4 x x - - -
expected times of overflight of the following waypoints
74.5.1.2 In-flight fuel management x x - - -
74.5.1.2.1 Explain the relevance of monitoring planned and actual fuel used and fuel on board x x - - -

Using excerpts from an operational flight plan (flight log) and actual fuel amounts given,
74.5.1.2.2 x x - - -
calculate the remaining fuel at the following waypoints and fuel required for the remaining track

Describe actions to be taken in case the remaining fuel is not sufficient to reach the destination
74.5.1.2.3 x x - - -
airport with the prescribed amount of reserve fuel
Explain that remaining fuel below the minimum required amount of reserve fuel and during flight
74.5.1.2.4 x x - - -
can be an emergency situation which justifies the use of a 'mayday' call
74.5.1.3 In-flight re-planning in case of deviation from planned data x x - - -
Explain that in case of in-flight re-planning (e.g. to a new destination) all requirements concerning
74.5.1.3.1 x x - - -
minimum required fuel reserves need to be observed
Explain that in the case of an in-flight update, meteorological conditions on revised routing and
74.5.1.3.2 x x - - -
at revised destination or alternate aerodrome needs to be observed
75 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING: SAILPLANE - - x - -
75.1 Speed polar of sailplanes - - x - - cruising speed: see chapter 75.3.2.2
75.1.1 Speed polar - - x - -
75.1.1.1 Correlation of horizontal speed and rate of descent - - x - -
75.1.1.1.1 Explain the correlation of horizontal speed and the corresponding rate of descent - - x - -
75.1.1.1.2 Name and identify on the speed polar the speed with minimum rate of descent - - x - -
75.1.1.1.3 Name and identify on the speed polar the speed with best glide angle - - x - -
75.1.1.2 Factors affecting the speed polar - - x - -
75.1.1.2.1 Explain the change of the speed polar when flying through up- or downdrafts
75.1.1.2.2 Explain the change of the speed polar with increasing mass

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 109 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
75.1.1.3 Glide ratio calculations - - x - -
With distance height and glide ratio given, calculate the distance that can be covered from that
75.1.1.3.1 - - x - -
height
75.2 Flight planning and task setting - - x - -
75.2.1 Glidepath optimization - - x - -
75.2.1.1 Still air - - x - -
75.2.1.1.1 State that the speed for optimum glide path in smooth air is the speed for best glide angle - - x - -
Describe how the speed for best glide can be obtained from the speed polar: as tangent from origin
75.2.1.1.2 - - x - -
on the speed polar
75.2.1.1.3 List measures to improve the gliding performance - - x - -
75.2.1.2 Influence of head- or tailwind - - x - -
75.2.1.2.1 Explain the effect of head- or tailwind on the speed for best glide - - x - -
Describe how to obtain the speed for best glide with head- or tailwind from the speed polar: as
75.2.1.2.2 tangent on the speed polar from a point on the speed axis shifted to the left for tailwind, and to - - x - -
the right for headwind
75.2.1.3 Influence of ascending/descending air - - x - -
75.2.1.3.1 Explain the effect of ascending or descending air on the speed for best glide - - x - -
Describe how to obtain the speed for best glide in ascending / descending from the speed polar: as
75.2.1.3.2 tangent on the speed polar from a point on the vertical axis shifted up for descending air, and - - x - -
down for ascending air

75.2.1.3.3 Explain the practical rule: 'The stronger the ascending air, the faster the speed for optimized glide' - - x - -

75.2.1.4 McCready scale - - x - -

75.2.1.4.1 Describe the speed scale on a McCready ring at zero position - - x - -
75.2.2 Speed optimization - - x - -
75.2.2.1 Balance of glide and speed - - x - -

Explain why flying with speed for best glide and corresponding (minimum) gained height is usually
75.2.2.1.1 - - x - -
slower than choosing an increased speed from higher altitude covering the same distance

75.2.2.1.2 Describe how the optimized speed depends on the mean vertical speed of the airmass flown in - - x - -
75.2.3 Optimization of thermalling and glide - - x - -
75.2.3.1 Gliding from updraft to updraft - - x - -
Describe how to use the McCready scale for optimizing speed with assumed average rate of
75.2.3.1.1 - - x - -
ascending air

75.2.3.1.2 Explain the use of a McCready scale with assumed mean rate of ascending air with given examples - - x - -

75.2.3.2 Cruising speed - - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 110 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
Explain how to determine an average cruising speed for planning when assuming an average rate
75.2.3.2.1 - - x - -
of ascending air using the speed polar
List the factors affecting the average cruising speed: glider performance, average rate of
75.2.3.2.2 - - x - -
ascending air
75.2.4 Enroute planning - - x - -
75.2.4.2 Flight planning tasks - - x - -
Determine average speed and total time for a leg from: distance, course, average rate of
75.2.4.2.1 - - x - -
ascending air, wind, speed polar
75.3 Flight monitoring and in-flight re-planning - - x - -
75.3.1 In-flight decisions - - x - -
75.3.1.1 Selecting routes - - x - -
Explain how to select a suitable route with less downdrafts when encountering Cu clouds and blue
75.3.1.1.1 - - x - -
areas in between
75.3.1.1.2 Describe ground structures likely for the presence of updrafts (or not) - - x - -
75.3.1.2 Turning points - - x - -
75.3.1.2.1 Describe the procedure how to pass a downwind or upwind turning point - - x - -
75.3.2 Final glide - - x - -
75.3.2.1 Calculations - - x - -
State that with all calculations of height dan distance, prescribed distances to clouds (horizontal
75.3.2.1.1 - - x - -
and vertical) have to be maintained
With distance to a waypoint and glide ratio given, calculate the minimum height to arrive at the
75.3.2.1.2 - - x - -
waypoint
Explain how to determine optimum speed for final glide using different tools (McCready, flight
75.3.2.1.3 - - x - -
computer etc.)
76 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING: BALLOON - - - x x
76.1 Mass - - - x x
76.1.1 Purpose of mass considerations - - - x x
76.1.1.1 Terms and definitions - - - x x
76.1.1.1.1 Define 'empty mass' - - - x x
76.1.1.2 Importance in regard to structural limitations - - - x x
76.1.1.2.1 Describe the relationship between balloon mass and structural stress - - - x x
Describe the possible hazards resulting from a (too) high take off mass with regard to structural
76.1.1.2.2 - - - x x
stress
71.1.1.3 Importance in regard to performance limitations - - - x x
71.1.1.3.1 Describe the relationship between balloon mass and balloon performance - - - x x
Describe the possible hazards resulting from a (too) high take-off mass with regard to balloon
71.1.1.3.2 - - - x x
performance

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 111 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
76.1.2 Loading - - - x x
76.1.2.1 Use of AFM loading data - - - x x
76.1.2.1.1 Exctract operational limits and loading data from the AFM - - - x x
76.1.2.1.2 State how to determine the maximium number of passengers to be carried - - - x x
76.1.2.1.3 Determine maximum traffic load with given mass limits from AFM and fuel / ballast load - - - x x
76.2 Performance - - - x x
76.2.1 General aspects and operational limits - - - x x
76.2.1.1 General aspects - - - x x

State that the pilot-in-command shall only operate the balloon if the performance of the balloon
76.2.1.1.1 is adequate to comply with the requirements and restrictions applicable to the flight, airspace or - - - x x BOP.BAS.210 Performance — General
operating sites used, ensuring that any charts or maps used are the latest available edition

76.2.1.1.2 Explain the effect of air temperature and pressure altitude on carrying force - - - x x
76.2.1.2 Operational limits - - - x x
State that the pilot-in-command shall ensure that, during any phase of operation, the balloon is
76.2.1.2.1 - - - x x BOP.BAS.200 Operating limitations
not exceeding any of the limitations set out in the AFM or equivalent document(s)
76.2.2 Calculations and use of AFM data - - - x x
76.2.2.1 Calculations - - - x x
With wind, obstacle height and distance given, calculate the minimum rate of climb to safely
76.2.2.1.1 - - - x x
cross the obstacles after take-off
With rate of climb, obstacle height and distance given, calculate the maximum wind speed to
76.2.2.1.2 - - - x x
safely cross the obstacles after take-off
76.2.2.2 Use of AFM performance data - - - x X
With given masses, number of gas bottles and passengers, determine the maximum altitude for
76.2.2.2.1 - - - x -
climb of a hot-air balloon
With given pressure altitude, masses and number of gas bottles, determine the maximum number
76.2.2.2.2 - - - x -
of passengers to reach that altitude
76.3 Flight planning and flight monitoring - - - x x
76.3.1 Flight planning, monitoring and in-flight re-planning - - - x x
76.3.1.1 Take-off - - - x x
State that take-off may only be commenced when a calculation of carrying forces confirms that
76.3.1.1.1 - - - x x
the flight can be conducted safely
Explain the use of wind information to estimate the suitablilty of the terrain overflown after take-
76.3.1.1.2 - - - x x
off
76.3.1.1.3 State that the take-off path should not cross over mountains or lakes, forrests or built-up areas - - - x x
Eplain why the flight path may be uncontrollable when taking off in the vicinity of thermals,
76.3.1.1.4 - - - x x
strong showers or thunderstorms

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 112 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
76.3.1.1.5 Explain the effect of a strong surface inversion during take-off - - - x x
76.3.1.1.6 Explain the effect of 'false lift' and describe the correct procedure to counteract - - - x x
76.3.1.1.7 List examples for a suitable take-off sites with wind calm or with moderate winds - - - x x
76.3.1.1.8 Describe the procedure how to check for sufficient lift before take-off - - - x x
76.3.1.2 Cruise - - - x x
76.3.1.2.1 State the minimum height above terrain during cruise - - - x x
List factors that may require to descent below minimum height (e.g. use of lower wind directions,
76.3.1.2.2 - - - x x
approach for landing etc.)
List factors to be considered for an appropriate cruising altitude (e.g. wind, thermal convection,
76.3.1.2.3 - - - x x
landscape, mountains and associated winds)
Describe how to monitor position during cruise: use of charts, visual references (interseption lines),
76.3.1.2.4 - - - x x
GNSS
Explain how to determine wind direction in higher or lower levels (e.g. dropping small pieces of
76.3.1.2.5 - - - x x
paper)
Explain how to use terrain for cruising in specific directions (e.g. using up- and downhill breezes
76.3.1.2.6 - - - x x
and valley streams)
76.3.1.2.7 Explain the use of parachute and burner / ballast for climb and descent to lower / higher layers - - - x x
76.3.1.2.8 Determine ground speed (GS) or remaining time from observed values during cruise - - - x x
76.3.1.3 Landing - - - x x
76.3.1.3.1 Explain the requirement for sufficient fuel remaining during landing procedure - - - x -
76.3.1.3.2 State that before landing, all loose objects have to be firmly secured - - - x x
76.3.1.3.3 List examples for a suitable landing sites with wind calm or with moderate winds - - - x x
76.3.1.3.4 Explain the effect on rate of descent when descending into an inversion layer from above - - - x x
Explain why passengers should not disembark from the basket until told so by the pilot-in-
76.3.1.3.5 - - - x x
command
76.3.2 Fuel and Ballast planning - - - x x
76.3.2.1 Fuel planning (hot-air balloons only) - - - x -
List factors that affect the required number of gas bottles to be carried (e.g. planned duration of
76.3.2.1.1 - - - x -
flight, terrain, number of people carried)
Explain the requirement for monitoring fuel consumption and check for leakages in yet unnused
76.3.2.1.2 - - - x -
gas bottles
76.3.2.1.3 Explain why during cruise always two bottles should be in use with the burner - - - x -
76.3.2.1.4 Explain why gas bottles should not be depleted to less than 25 percent volume - - - x -
76.3.2.1.5 Explain why, when replacing gas bottles at the burner, the balloon should be in light climb - - - x -
76.3.2.1.6 Explain why never both bottles connected to the burner should be replaced at the same time - - - x -
76.3.2.2 Ballast planning (gas balloons only) - - - - x
Principles

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 113 of 167

 70 FPP

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING x x x x x
76.3.2.2.1 State that the carrying force increases by the relased weight when releasing ballast - - - - x

76.3.2.2.2 Explain why subsequent release of the same amount of ballast results in increasing gain of height - - - - x

State that the norm height of a gas balloon with constant volume increases by 80 m when
76.3.2.2.3 - - - - x
releasing 1 percent of ballast
State that the increase in altitude of a gas ballon with constant volume is approximately (8000 x
76.3.2.2.4 - - - - x
ballast weight / balloon weight) meters
Determine amount of ballast to release
Describe the use of the 'friction number' to estimate the weight to release to compensate for a
76.3.2.2.5 - - - - x
given vertical speed
State that the amount of ballast to be released to reduce vertical speed by 1 m/s increases with
76.3.2.2.6 - - - - x
increasing sink rate
With vertical speed given, and tables with vertical speed and friction number, determine the
76.3.2.2.7 - - - - x
amount of ballast to reduce the vertical speed to a given value
Effect of 'over-release'
Explain the effect of 'over release': how the vertical speed of a gas balloon changes when releasing
76.3.2.2.8 - - - - x
more ballast than required to achieve vertical equilibrium
Explain the effect of variable temperature and insolation (day / night time) on the 'over-release' of
76.3.2.2.9 - - - - x
ballast and duration of the ride
76.3.3 Pre-flight preparation - - - x x
76.3.3.1 Required equipment - - - x x
List the items required on board: current aeronautical charts (ICAO chart, AIP reference),
76.3.3.1.1 barometric altimeter, communication radios, documentation including AFM, electronic devices - - - x x
with GNSS support
Explain the importanc to use current aeronautical charts and / or current electronic navigational
76.3.3.1.2 - - - x x
databases

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 114 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
AIRFRAME AND SYSTEMS, ELECTRICS, POWERPLANT AND EMERGENCY
81 x x x - - -
EQUIPMENT
SPL: 8.2. System
81.1 System design, loads, stresses, maintenance x x x - - - design, loads and
stresses
81.1.1 Loads and combination loadings applied to an aircraft's structure x x x - - -
81.1.1.1 Design concepts x x x - - -
81.1.1.1.1 Explain the purpose of redundancy in aircraft design x x x - - -
Describe the following structural design philosophy: safe life, fail-safe
81.1.1.1.2 x x x - - -
(multiple load paths), damage-tolerant
81.1.1.2 Loads and stresses x x x - - -
Describe the following types of loads that an aircraft may be subjected to:
81.1.1.2.1 x x x - - -
static loads, dynamic loads, cyclic loads
Describe areas typically prone to stress that should be given particular
81.1.1.2.2 x x x - - -
attention during a pre-flight inspection
81.1.1.2.3 Define the 'load factor (n)' x x x - - -
State that there are different categories of aircraft (utility, normal, aerobatic)
81.1.1.2.4 x x x - - -
with different requirements regarding allowed load factors
State that excessive stress can be exerted on the structure when exceeding the
81.1.1.2.5 x x x - - -
manoeuvring speed in heavy gusts
81.1.1.3 Fatigue and corrosion x x x - - -
Describe the effects of corrosion and how it can be detected during pre-flight
81.1.1.3.1 x x x - - -
inspection
Explain fatigue, how it affects the useful life of an aircraft with regard to:
81.1.1.3.2 corrosion, number of cycles, type of flight manoeuvres, quality of x x x - - -
maintenance
81.1.1.4 Maintenance x x x - - -
Explain circumstances that required aircraft maintenence (hard-time or fixed-
81.1.1.4.1 x x x - - -
time maintenance, on-condition maintenance, condition monitoring)
Describe dangers associated with overloading the aircraft, and state that any
81.1.1.4.2 x x x - - -
exceedance of maximum limit load needs to be reported
81.2 Airframe x x x - - - SPL: 8.1. Airframe
81.2.1 Wings, tail surfaces and control surfaces x - x - - -
81.2.1.1 Design and constructions x - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 115 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe the following types of design and their advantages and
81.2.1.1.1 disadvantages: high-mounted wing, low-mounted wing, low- or mid-set x - x - - -
tailplane, T-tail
81.2.1.1.2 Describe different types of constructions: grid, sandwich x - x - - -
81.2.1.1.3 Name and identify typical parts of the wing and tail- and control surfaces x - x - - -
81.2.1.2 Structural components and materials x - x - - -
Eplain the general assembly of a wing: (main) spar, wing nose, spars, ribs,
81.2.1.2.1 x - x - - -
ailerons, flaps, skin or fabric cover
81.2.1.2.2 State that the main spar carries the main loads resulting out of the flight x - x - - -
State different types of materials for the construction of wings (e.g. sheet
81.2.1.2.3 x - x - - -
metal, wood, or fabric cover)
81.2.1.3 Stresses x - x - - -
Describe the vertical and horizontal loads on the ground and during normal
81.2.1.3.1 x - x - - -
flight
81.2.1.3.2 Explain how to achieve stress relief by fuel-balancing during flight x - - - - -
Explain the principle of flutter and resonance for the wing and control
81.2.1.3.3 x - x - - -
surfaces
Describe which parts of the airframe are strained the most, and how they
81.2.1.3.4 x - x - - -
need to be inspected during the pre-flight check
81.2.1.4 Structural limitations x - x - - -
Explain that airframe life is limited by fatigue, created by alternating stress
81.2.1.4.1 x - x - - -
and the number of load cycles
81.2.1.4.2 Describe measures to reduce stress on aircraft parts x - x - - -
81.2.2 Fuselage, doors, floor, wind-screen and windows x x x - - -
81.2.2.1 Design and constructions x x x - - -
Describe different types of fuselage constructions: monocoque, semi-
81.2.2.1.1 x x x - - -
monocoque, truss
81.2.2.2 Structural components and materials x x x - - -
Describe the construction and the function of the following structural
81.2.2.2.1 components of a fuselage: frames, bulkhead, stiffeners, stringers, longerons, x x x - - -
skin
State out of which materials aircraft windshields are made and how they
81.2.2.2.2 x x x - - -
should be treated
81.2.2.3 Stresses x x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 116 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe the structural danger of a hard or nose-wheel landing with respect
81.2.2.3.1 x x x - - -
to: fuselage loads, nose-wheel strut loads
81.2.2.4 Structural limitations x x x - - -
Explain the floor load limits with regard to maximum load and maximum
81.2.2.4.1 x x x - - -
load per area
81.3 Hydraulics x x - - - -
81.3.1 Hydromechanics x x - - - -
81.3.1.1 Basic principles x x - - - -
81.3.1.1.1 Explain the concept and basic principles of hydromechanics x x - - - -
81.3.1.1.2 Explain the relationship between pressure, force and area x x - - - -
81.3.2 Hydraulic systems x x - - - -
81.3.2.1 Hydraulic fluids: types and characteristics, limitations x x - - - -
81.3.2.1.1 Describe the desirable properties of a hydraulic fluid x x - - - -
81.3.2.1.2 State that hydraulic fluids are irritating to skin and eyes x x - - - -
List the two different types of hydraulic fluids: synthetic and mineral, and
81.3.2.1.3 x x - - - -
state that they must not be mixed
Describe how to check for a possible spill of fluids, such as brake (hydraulic)
81.3.2.1.4 x x - - - -
fluid, during the pre-flight check
System components: design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
81.3.2.2 x x - - - -
indications and warnings
81.3.2.2.1 Explain the working principle of a hydraulic system x x - - - -
81.3.2.2.2 List typical aircraft systems that make use of hydraulic systems x x - - - -

81.3.2.2.3 List and describe the instruments and alerts for monitoring a hydraulic system x x - - - -

SPL: 8.3. Landing gear,

81.4 Landing gear, wheels, tyres and brakes x x x - - - wheels, tyres and
brakes
81.4.1 Landing gear x x x - - -
81.4.1.1 Types and materials, and operation x x x - - -
Name different landing-gear configurations: nose wheel, tail wheel, skid
81.4.1.1.1 x x - - - -
(helicopter)
Name and identify the components of a landing gear, and describe their
81.4.1.1.2 x x x - - -
functions
81.4.1.1.3 State that ground stearing is usually actuated via rudder pedals x x - - - -
81.4.1.1.4 Describe how landing-gear position indication and alerting is implemented x x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 117 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Explain the speed limitations for gear operation: VLO (maximum landing
81.4.1.1.5 x x - - - -
gear operating speed) and VLE (maximum landing gear extended speed)
81.4.1.1.6 Describe methods for emergency gear extension x x - - - -
State that the main weight is carried by the main landing gear and that nose
81.4.1.1.7 x x - - - -
wheel/tail wheel only carry a small a small portion of the weight
81.4.2 Nose wheel steering x - - - - -
81.4.2.1 Design and operation x - - - - -
81.4.2.1.1 Explain the operating principle of nose wheel steering x - - - - -
Define the term ‘shimmy’ and the possible consequences of shimmy for the
81.4.2.1.2 x - - - - -
nose- and the main-wheel system
81.4.2.1.3 Explain the purpose of a shimmy damper to reduce the severity of shimmy x - - - - -
81.4.2.1.4 Describe possible hazards in case of landing on the nose gear x - - - - -
81.4.2.1.5 State which flight errors might lead to a landing on the nose gear x - - - - -
81.4.3 Brakes x x x - - -
81.4.3.1 Types and materials x x x - - -
81.4.3.1.1 Describe the basic operating principle of a disc brake x x x - - -
81.4.3.2 System components: design, operation, indications and warnings x x x - - -
Describe how brake force is transmitted (machanically or hydraulically) from
81.4.3.2.1 x x x - - -
the pedals to the brakes
State that brakes are only applied to the main gear, and that differential
81.4.3.2.2 x x - - - -
braking can be used for stearing
81.4.3.2.3 Describe the function of the parking brake x x - - - -
State that on some airports, aircraft should be parked without the brakes set,
81.4.3.2.4 x x - - - -
secured by chocks
81.4.4 Wheels and tyres x x x - - -
81.4.4.1 Types and operational limitations x x x - - -
State that general aviation aircraft are usually equipped with wheels
81.4.4.1.1 x x x - - -
comprising tyre, wheel rim and a tube
Describe possible damages in which cases a tyre can no longer be used (e.g.
81.4.4.1.2 x x x - - -
larger delamination, heavy wear)
81.4.4.1.3 Describe and recognize tyre creep marks and name their function x x x - - -
81.4.5 Helicopter equipments - x - - - -
81.4.5.1 Flotation devices - x - - - -
81.4.5.1.1 Explain flotation devices, how they are operated, and their limitation - x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 118 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Explain why indicated airspeed (IAS) limitations before, during and after
81.4.5.1.2 - x - - - -
flotation-device deployment must be observed
81.4.5.2 Skid-shoe landing gear - x - - - -
81.4.5.2.1 Describe measures to reduce wear on skid-shoe landing gear - x - - - -
81.5 Flight controls x x x - - -
81.5.1 Aeroplane: primary flight controls x - x - - -
81.5.1.1 Definition and control surfaces x - x - - -
81.5.1.1.1 Define a 'primary flight control' x - x - - -

81.5.1.1.2 List the following as primary flight control surfaces: elevator, aileron, rudder x - x - - -
81.5.1.2 Control systems and mechanical x - x - - -
81.5.1.2.1 Explain the basic principle of a fully manual control system x - x - - -
State which control surfaces initiates rotation around which axis, and how
81.5.1.2.2 x - x - - -
these movements are called ('roll' / 'pitch' / 'yaw')
System components: design, operation, indications and warnings, degraded
81.5.1.3 x - x - - -
modes of operation and jamming
81.5.1.3.1 Explain the danger of control jamming x - x - - -
Explain the methods of locking the controls on the ground and describe 'gust
81.5.1.3.2 x - - - - -
or control lock' warnings
81.5.2 Aeroplane: secondary flight controls x - x - - -
System components: design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
81.5.2.1 x - x - - -
indications and warnings
81.5.2.1.1 Define 'secondary flight controls' and describe their purpose x - x - - -
List the following as secondary flight control surfaces: flaps, trimming devices
81.5.2.1.2 x - x - - -
(trim tabs), leading edge devices, spoilers or speedbrakes
Describe the movement of trim tabs to achieve a required rudder deflection
81.5.2.1.3 x - x - - -
for trim
81.5.2.1.4 Describe the operation of 'balance tabs' x - x - - -
Describe the requirement for limiting flight speeds for various secondary
81.5.2.1.5 x - x - - -
flight control surfaces
81.5.3 Helicopter: flight controls - x - - - -
81.5.3.1 Droop stops, control systems, trim systems, control stops - x - - - -
81.5.3.1.1 Explain the methods of locking the controls on the ground - x - - - -
81.5.3.1.2 Explain the principle of phase lag and advance angle - x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 119 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe the following four axes of control operation, their operating
81.5.3.1.3 principle and their associated cockpit controls: collective control, cyclic fore - x - - - -
and aft (pitch axis), cyclic lateral (roll axis), yaw
81.5.3.1.4 Describe and explain the purpose of a trim system - x - - - -
81.5.3.1.5 Explain the use of control stops - x - - - -
81.6 Anti-icing systems x x - - - -
81.6.1 Concept, types and operation (pitot and windshield) x x - - - -
81.6.1.1 Concept and general considerations x x - - - -
81.6.1.1.1 Explain the concept of 'clean aircraft' x x - - - -
81.6.1.1.2 Explain the concepts of anti-icing and de-icing x x - - - -
State that any ice accretion on the airframe results in undefined operational
81.6.1.1.3 x x - - - -
limits must be prevented

81.6.1.1.4 Explain the effect of ice accretion on drag, wing lift, mass and available power x x - - - -

81.6.1.1.5 Name the components of an aircraft that can be protected from ice accretion x x - - - -

State that any aircraft may only be operating in icing conditions if explicitly
81.6.1.1.6 x x - - - -
permitted by the AFM/POH
81.6.1.2 Pitot x x - - - -
Describe possible hazards resulting from ice on sensors of the pitot-static
81.6.1.2.1 x x - - - -
system
81.6.1.2.2 Explain the operating principle of a pitot-heating system x x - - - -
81.6.1.2.3 Name situations when pitot-heat system should be switched on x x - - - -
81.6.1.3 Windshield x x - - - -
81.6.1.3.1 Describe possible hazards resulting from ice on the wind shield x x - - - -
81.6.1.3.2 Explain the operating principle of a windshield de-ice system using fluids x x - - - -
81.6.1.4 Propeller x x - - - -
81.6.1.4.1 Describe possible hazards resulting from ice accretion on the propeller x x - - - -
Explain the operating principle of an electrical propeller de-ice system and its
81.6.1.4.2 x x - - - -
limitations
81.7 Fuel system x x - - - -
81.7.1 Piston engine x x - - - -
System components: design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
81.7.1.1 x x - - - -
indications and warnings
81.7.1.1.1 State the types of fuel used by a piston engine: AVGAS, MOGAS, Diesel x x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 120 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
81.7.1.1.2 Describe a gravity fuel feed system and a pressure feed fuel system x x - - - -
Name the main components of a fuel system, and state their function: lines,
81.7.1.1.3 boost pump, pressure valves, filter, strainer, tanks (wing, tip, fuselage), vent x x - - - -
system, sump, drain, fuel-quantity sensor
81.7.1.1.4 Explain the function of 'cross-feed' x x - - - -
81.7.1.1.5 Explain the term 'unusable fuel' x x - - - -
81.7.1.1.6 Explain the reasons and situations for 'draining' the fuel tanks x x - - - -
81.7.2 Turbine engine (helicopter) - x - - - -
System components: design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
81.7.2.1 - x - - - -
indications and warnings
81.7.2.1.1 State the types of fuel used by a gas turbine engine: JET-A, JET-A1, JET-B - x - - - -
81.7.2.1.2 State the existence of additives for freezing - x - - - -
Name the main components of the fuel system and state their location and
81.7.2.1.3 - x - - - -
their function: trim fuel tanks, bafflers, refuelling/defueling system
81.7.2.1.4 Explain the limitations in the event of loss of booster pump fuel pressure - x - - - -
81.8 Electrics x x - - - -
81.8.1 Electrics: general and definitions x x - - - -
Direct current: voltage, current, resistance, conductivity, Ohm's law, power
81.8.1.1 x x - - - -
and work
Explain the term 'direct current' (DC), and state that current can only flow in a
81.8.1.1.1 x x - - - -
closed circuit

81.8.1.1.2 Define 'voltage', 'current' and 'resistance', and state their unit of measurement x x - - - -
81.8.1.1.3 Explain Ohm's law in qualitative terms x x - - - -
81.8.1.1.4 Define 'electrical power' and state the unit of measurement x x - - - -
Alternating current: voltage, current, amplitude, phase, frequency and
81.8.1.2 x x - - - -
resistance
Explain the term 'alternating current' (AC), and compare its use to DC with
81.8.1.2.1 x x - - - -
regard to complexity
81.8.1.2.2 Define 'frequency' and state the unit of measurement x x - - - -
81.8.1.3 Circuits: series and parallel x x - - - -
Explain a short circuit in practical terms using Ohm's Law, power and energy,
81.8.1.3.1 x x - - - -
highlighting the risk of fire due to extreme energy dissipation
81.8.1.4 Magnetic field: effects in an electrical circuit x x - - - -
81.8.1.4.1 State that an electrical current produces a magnetic field x x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 121 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe how the strength of the magnetic field changes with the magnitude
81.8.1.4.2 x x - - - -
of the current
Explain the principle of electromagnetic induction and how two electrical
81.8.1.4.3 x x - - - -
components or systems may affect each other
81.8.2 Batteries x x - - - -
81.8.2.1 Types, characteristics and limitations x x - - - -
81.8.2.1.1 Explain the function of an aircraft battery x x - - - -
81.8.2.1.2 Describe the effect of temperature on battery capacity and performance x x - - -
State that in the case of loss of all generated power (battery power only) the
81.8.2.1.3 x x - - - -
remaining electrical power is time-limited
81.8.2.2 Battery chargers, characteristics and limitations x x - - - -
81.8.2.2.1 Define the term 'capacity of batteries' and state the unit of measurement x x - - - -
81.8.2.2.2 Explain the difference between 'battery voltage' and 'charging voltage' x x - - - -
81.8.3 Static electricity: general x x - - - -
81.8.3.1 Basic principles x x - - - -
Explain static electricity, and describe the flying conditions where aircraft are
81.8.3.1.1 x x - - - -
most susceptible to build-up of static electricity
81.8.3.1.2 Explain why an aircraft must first be grounded before refuelling x x - - - -
81.8.3.2 Static dischargers x x - - - -
Describe a static discharger and explain its purpose, typical locations and
81.8.3.2.1 x x - - - -
check during pre-flight inspection
81.8.4 Generation: production, distribution and use x x - - - -
Remark: For standardisation purposes, the following standard expressions are
used:
- DC generator: produces DC output
- DC alternator: produces AC, rectified by integrated rectifying unit, output is x x - - - -
DC
- AC alternator: producing a DC output by using a rectifier
- AC generator: produces AC output
DC generation: types, design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
81.8.4.1 x x - - - -
indications and warnings
Describe the basic working principle of a simple DC generator or DC
81.8.4.1.1 x x - - - -
alternator
AC generation: types, design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
81.8.4.2 x x - - - -
indications and warnings

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 122 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
81.8.4.2.1 Describe the working principle of a brushless three-phase AC generator x x - - - -
State the relationship between output frequency and RPM of a three-phase AC
81.8.4.2.2 x x - - - -
generator
81.8.5 Electric components x x - - - -
81.8.5.1 Basic elements: basic principles of switches, circuit-breakers and relays x x - - - -
81.8.5.1.1 Explain the working principle of a fuse and a circuit breaker x x - - - -
Describe under which conditions circuit breakers may be used to reset aircraft
81.8.5.1.2 x x - - - -
systems in the event of system failure
Explain the hazards of multiple resets of a circuit breaker, or the use of
81.8.5.1.3 x x - - - -
incorrect fuse rating when replacing blown fuses
81.8.6 Distribution x x - - - -
81.8.6.1 General: x x - - - -
(a) bus bar, common earth and priority x x - - - -
81.8.6.1.1 State that the generator is driven by the engine x x - - - -
Explain that at the same time, the generator re-loads the battery and powers
81.8.6.1.2 x x - - - -
the electrical loads of the airplane
81.8.6.1.3 Describe a simple DC electrical system of a single-engine aircraft x x - - - -
81.8.6.1.4 Give examples of DC consumers x x - - - -
Interpret various different ammeter indications of an ammeter which
81.8.6.1.5 x x - - - -
monitors the charge current of the battery
81.8.6.1.6 List instruments that may be affected by loss of electrical power x x - - - -
81.9 Piston Engines x x - x - -
81.9.1 General x x - x - -
81.9.1.1 Types of internal combustion engine: basic principles and definitions x x - x - -
Name and identify the various types of engine design with regard to cylinder
81.9.1.1.1 x x - x - -
arrangement
81.9.1.2 Engine: design, operation, components and materials x x - x - -
Explain the general operating principle of a 4-stroke piston engine, and
81.9.1.2.1 x x - x - -
explain the cycles intake, compression, power and exhaust
Name and identify the basic components of a piston engine: crankshaft,
81.9.1.2.2 x x - x - -
piston, cylinder, valves
Describe the differences between petrol engines and diesel engines with
81.9.1.2.3 regard to means of ignition and regulating air or mixture supply to the x x - x - -
cylinder
81.9.2 Fuel x x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 123 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
81.9.2.1 Types, grades, characteristics and limitations x x - x - -

81.9.2.1.1 Name the type of fuel used for petrol engines: AVGAS 100 (green), 100LL (blue) x x - x - -
81.9.2.1.2 Define the term 'octane rating' x x - x - -
Identify the conditions and power settings leading to 'detonation' for petrol
81.9.2.1.3 x x - x - -
engines
State the typical values of fuel density for aviation gasoline: AVGAS approx.
81.9.2.1.4 x x - x - -
0.72 kg/liter
81.9.2.1.5 Calculate volume (liters) from masses (kg or lbs) and vice versa for AVGAS x x - x - -
81.9.2.2 Alternate fuel: characteristics and limitations x x - x - -
Describe the differences of AVGAS and MOGAS with regard to lead and
81.9.2.2.1 x x - x - -
ethanol content
State that any use of alternative fuel must be explicitly permitted by the
81.9.2.2.2 x x - x - -
AFM/POH
81.9.2.2.3 Name the type of fuel normally used for aviation diesel engines (JET-A1) x x - x - -
81.9.2.2.4 State the typical value of fuel density for diesel fuel x x - x - -
81.9.2.2.5 Calculate volume (liters) from masses (kg or lbs) and vice versa for diesel fuel x x - x - -
81.9.3 Carburettor or injection system x x - x - -
Carburettor: design, operation, degraded modes of operation, indications
81.9.3.1 x x - x - -
and warnings
Describe the purpose and the operating principle of a simple float chamber
81.9.3.1.1 x x - x - -
carburettor
81.9.3.1.2 Explain the purpose and the operating principle of a primer pump x x - x - -
81.9.3.1.3 Explain the danger of carburettor fire, including corrective measures x x - x - -
Injection: design, operation, degraded modes of operation, indications and
81.9.3.2 x x - x - -
warnings
Explain the advantages and difference in operation of an injection system
81.9.3.2.1 x x - x - -
compared with a carburettor system
81.9.3.3 Icing x x - x - -
Carburettor x x - x - -
Name the meteorological conditions under which carburettor icing may
81.9.3.3.1 x x - x - -
occur
Describe the causes and effects of carburettor icing, and actions to be taken if
81.9.3.3.2 x x - x - -
carburettor icing is suspected
81.9.3.3.3 Describe the indications for carburettor icing x x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 124 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe the changes in RPM/power when switching on/off carburetter
81.9.3.3.4 x x - x - -
heating
Describe measures to compensate for power loss by switching on carburettor
81.9.3.3.5 - x - x - -
heat
State that with some engines the pre-heated air for the carburettor will not
81.9.3.3.6 x x - x - -
be filtered
81.9.3.3.7 Describe situations when carburettor heat must be OFF x x - x - -
Injection systems x x - x - -
Explain the reason for the use of alternate air on fuel injection systems and
81.9.3.3.8 x x - x - -
describe its operating principle
State the meteorological conditions under which induction system icing may
81.9.3.3.9 x x - x - -
occur
81.9.4 Air cooling systems x x - x - -
81.9.4.1 Design, operation, degraded modes of operation, indications and warnings x x - x - -
81.9.4.1.1 Describe the design features to enhance cylinder air cooling for aeroplanes x - - x - -
81.9.4.1.2 Describe the design features to enhance cylinder air cooling for helicopters - x - - - -
81.9.4.1.3 Name the cylinder head temperature indication to monitor engine cooling x x - x - -
Explain possible consequences that a sudden descent with little power can
81.9.4.1.4 x x - x - -
have on an air cooled engine (rapid cooling)
Explain possible consequences of taxiing or standing on the ground with a
81.9.4.1.5 x x - x - -
running engine which is air-cooled
81.9.4.2 Differences to liquid-cooling systems x x - x - -
81.9.4.2.1 Describe the design and function of liquid cooling for aeroplanes x x - x - -
Describe the differences with liquid cooling system compared to air cooling
81.9.4.2.2 x x - x - -
systems
81.9.5 Lubrication systems x x - x - -
81.9.5.1 Lubricants: types, characteristics and limitations x x - x - -
81.9.5.1.1 Describe the term 'viscosity', and describe how it is affected by temperature x x - x - -
81.9.5.1.2 Describe the viscosity grade numbering system used in aviation x x - x - -
81.9.5.2 Design, operation, degraded modes of operation, indications and warnings x x - x - -
Describe the purpose and working principle of a lubrication system, and
81.9.5.2.1 describe the functions of its components: oil tank (reservoir), check valve, x x - x - -
pressure pump, filters, bypass
List factors that may affect oil consumption: oil grade, cylinder and piston
81.9.5.2.2 x x - x - -
wear, condition of piston rings

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 125 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe the relationsship between oil pressure, oil temperature and oil
81.9.5.2.3 x x - x - -
quantity
81.9.5.2.4 Describe actions to be taken in case of oil pressure drop x x - x - -
Describe the difference in design and operation of a wet- and dry sump-
81.9.5.2.5 x x - x - -
lubrication system
81.9.6 Ignition circuits x x - x - -
81.9.6.1 Design, operation, degraded modes of operation x x - x - -
81.9.6.1.1 Describe the working principle of a magneto-ignition system x x - x - -
Explain why piston engines are equipped with two electrically independent
81.9.6.1.2 x x - x - -
ignition systems
81.9.6.1.3 Describe the purpose and function of the 'magneto check' x x - x - -
81.9.6.1.4 Explain how combustion is initiated in diesel engines x x - x - -
81.9.6.1.5 State that ignition can be made electronically x x - x - -
81.9.6.1.6 Explain why dieselengines do not require an ignition system x x - x - -
81.9.7 Mixture x x - x - -
Definition, characteristic mixtures, control instruments, associated control
81.9.7.1 x x - x - -
levers and indications
Define the following terms: mixture, chemically correct ratio, best power,
81.9.7.1.1 x x - x - -
lean (weak) mixture, rich mixture
81.9.7.1.2 Describe the advantages and disadvantages of weak and rich mixtures x x - x - -
Explain and use the procedure of 'leaning' the mixture in relation to the EGT
81.9.7.1.3 x x - x - -
gauge
81.9.7.1.4 Explain how to shut down an petrol engine x x - x - -
81.9.7.1.5 Explain the absence of mixture control in diesel engines x x - - - -
81.9.8 Propellers x - - - - -
81.9.8.1 Constant speed propeller: design, operation and system components x - - - - -
State the advantages, and describe the operating principle of a constant-
81.9.8.1.1 x - - - - -
speed propeller system
Propeller handling: associated control levers, degraded modes of operation,
81.9.8.2 x - - - - -
indications and warnings
Explain the terms 'RPM', 'torque' and 'manifold absolute pressure (MAP)' and
81.9.8.2.1 x x - - - -
their relationships
81.9.8.2.2 Describe the propeller controls: power lever (black) and prop lever (blue) x x - - - -
State the correct procedures for setting the engine controls when increasing
81.9.8.2.3 x - - - - -
or decreasing power (using power lever and prop lever)

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 126 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
81.9.9 Performance and engine handling x x - - - -
Performance: influence of engine parameters, influence of atmospheric
81.9.9.1 x x - - - -
conditions, limitations and power augmentation systems
Describe the effect on power output of an piston engine taking into
81.9.9.1.1 x x - - - -
consideration: ambient pressure, temperature, density altitude
81.9.9.1.2 Explain the term 'normally aspirated engine' x x - - - -
Explain the requirement for power augmentation (turbocharging) of a piston
81.9.9.1.3 x x - - - -
engine
Engine handling: power and mixture settings during various flight phases and
81.9.9.2 x x - - - -
operational limitations
81.9.9.2.1 Explain reasons for a rough engine run, and state possible corrective actions x x - - - -
81.9.9.3 Engine handling: Single Level Power Control (SLPC) x - - - - -
State that SLPC requires a computer management system controlling the
81.9.9.3.1 x - - - - -
engine and propeller parameters
81.9.9.3.2 Describe the procedures with SLPC for engine start and shut-off x - - - - -
81.9.9.3.3 Describe the procedures for engine checks with SLPC prior to take-off x - - - - -
Describe the procedures with SLPC for different phases of flight (climb, cruise,
81.9.9.3.4 x - - - - -
descent)
81.9.9.3.5 Describe the procedures with SLPC to apply in engine failure situations x - - - - -
State the requirement for differences training before operating aeroplanes
81.9.9.3.6 x - - - - -
with SLPC
81.10 Turbine engines - x - - - -
81.10.1 Definitions - x - - - -
81.10.1.1 Coupled turbine engine: design, operation, components and materials - x - - - -
Name the main assembly parts of a coupled turbine engine and explain its
81.10.1.1.1 - x - - - -
operation
Explain the limitations of the materials used with regard to maximum
81.10.1.1.2 - x - - - -
turbine temperature, engine and drive train torque limits
81.10.1.2 Free turbine engine: design, operation, components and materials - x - - - -
Describe the design methods to keep the engine's size small for installation in
81.10.1.2.1 - x - - - -
helicopters
81.10.1.2.2 List the main components of a free-turbine engine - x - - - -
81.10.1.2.3 Describe how the power is developed by a turboshaft/free-turbine engine - x - - - -
81.10.2 Main engine components - x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 127 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Compressor:
(a) types, design, operation, components and materials
81.10.2.1 - x - - - -
(b) stresses and limitations
(c) stall, surge and means of prevention
81.10.2.1.1 State the purpose of the compressor - x - - - -
81.10.2.1.2 Describe the working principle of a centrifugal and an axial flow compressor - x - - - -
State the reason for the clicking noise whilst the compressor slowly rotates on
81.10.2.1.3 - x - - - -
the ground
81.10.2.1.4 Explain the following terms: 'compressor stall', 'engine surge' - x - - - -
81.10.2.1.5 Describe the indications of stall and surge - x - - - -
Combustion chamber:
(a) types, design, operation, components and materials
81.10.2.2 - x - - - -
(b) stresses and limitations
(c) emission problems
81.10.2.2.1 Explain the purpose of the combustion chamber - x - - - -
81.10.2.2.2 Describe the working principle of a combustion chamber - x - - - -
State a typical maximum value of the outlet temperature of the combustion
81.10.2.2.3 - x - - - -
chamber
Turbine:
81.10.2.3 (a) types, design, operation, components and materials - x - - - -
(b) stresses, creep and limitations
81.10.2.3.1 Explain the purpose of a turbine in different types of gas turbine engines - x - - - -
81.10.2.3.2 Name the main components of a turbine stage and their function - x - - - -
Describe the high mechanical thermal stress in the turbine blades and
81.10.2.3.3 - x - - - -
wheels/discs
Exhaust:
81.10.2.4 (a) design, operation and materials - x - - - -
(b) noise reduction
81.10.2.4.1 Describe the working principle of the exhaust unit - x - - - -
81.10.2.5 Fuel control units: types, operation and sensors - x - - - -
Name the main components of the engine fuel system and state their
81.10.2.5.1 function: filters, low-pressure (LP) pump, high-pressure (HP) pump, fuel - x - - - -
manifold, fuel nozzles, HP fuel cock, fuel control
81.10.2.5.2 State the tasks of the fuel control unit - x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 128 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Helicopter air intake: different types, design, operation, materials and
81.10.2.6 - x - - - -
optional equipments
81.10.2.6.1 Name and explain the main task of the engine air intake - x - - - -
81.10.2.6.2 Describe the use of a convergent air-intake ducting on helicopters - x - - - -
81.10.2.6.3 Describe the function of the heated pads on some helicopter air intakes - x - - - -
81.10.3 Additional components and systems - x - - - -
Helicopter additional components and systems: lubrication system, ignition
81.10.3.1 circuit, starter, accessory gearbox, free wheel units: design, operation and - x - - - -
components
Lubrication system - x - - - -
81.10.3.1.1 State the task of the lubrication system - x - - - -
Name the main components of a helicopter lubrication system: reservoir,
81.10.3.1.2 pump assembly, external oil filter, chip detectors, thermostatic oil coolers, - x - - - -
breather
Identify the indications used to monitor a lubrication system including
81.10.3.1.3 - x - - - -
warning systems
Accessory gearbox - x - - - -
81.10.3.1.4 State the tasks of the auxiliary gearbox - x - - - -
Ignition circuit - x - - - -
81.10.3.1.5 State the task of the ignition system - x - - - -
Name the main components of the ignition system and state their function:
81.10.3.1.6 - x - - - -
power sources, igniters
81.10.3.1.7 Explain the different modes of operation of the ignition system - x - - - -
Starter - x - - - -
81.10.3.1.8 Explain the principle of a turbine engine start - x - - - -
81.10.3.1.9 Name the main components of the starting system and state their function - x - - - -
81.10.3.1.10 Explain the term 'self-sustaining RPM' - x - - - -
Describe the indications and the possible causes of helicopter starting
81.10.3.1.11 malfunctions: false (dry or wet) start, tailpipe fire (torching), hot start, - x - - - -
abortive (hung) start, no N1 rotation, freewheel failure
81.10.4 Performance aspects - x - - - -
Torque, performance aspects, engine handling and limitations:
(a) engine ratings
81.10.4.1 - x - - - -
(b) engine performance and limitations
(c) engine handling

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 129 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe engine rating torque limits for take-off, transient and maximum
81.10.4.1.1 - x - - - -
continuous
81.10.4.1.2 Explain why TOT is a limiting factor for helicopter performance - x - - - -
Describe and explain the relationship between maximum torque available
81.10.4.1.3 - x - - - -
and density altitude
81.10.4.1.4 Describe overtorquing and explain the consequences - x - - - -
81.11 Protection and detection systems - x - - - -
81.11.1 Fire detection systems - x - - - -
81.11.1.1 Operation and indications - x - - - -
Explain the following principles of fire detection: resistance and capacitance,
81.11.1.1.1 - x - - - -
gas pressure
Give an example of warnings, indications and function tests of a fire-
81.11.1.1.2 - x - - - -
protection system
81.12 Rotor heads - x - - - -
81.12.1 Main rotor - x - - - -
81.12.1.1 Types - x - - - -
Describe the following rotor-head systems: teetering (semi-articulated),
81.12.1.1.1 - x - - - -
articulated, hingeless (rigid), bearingless (semi-articulated)
Describe in basic terms the following configuration of rotor systems: tandem,
81.12.1.1.2 - x - - - -
coaxial, side by side
Explain how flapping, dragging and feathering is achieved in each rotor-
81.12.1.1.3 - x - - - -
head system
81.12.1.2 Structural components and materials, stresses and structural limitations - x - - - -
Identify from a diagram the main structural components of the main types of
81.12.1.2.1 - x - - - -
rotor-head systems
81.12.1.2.2 List and describe the methods used to detect damage and cracks - x - - - -
81.12.1.3 Design and construction - x - - - -
Describe the technology used in rotor-head design: composites, fibreglass,
81.12.1.3.1 - x - - - -
alloys, elastomers
81.12.1.4 Adjustment - x - - - -
Describe and explain the methods of adjustment which are possible on
81.12.1.4.1 - x - - - -
various helicopter rotor-head assemblies
81.12.2 Tail rotor - x - - - -
81.12.2.1 Types - x - - - -
81.12.2.1.1 Explain the requirement for a tail rotor and its function - x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 130 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
81.12.2.1.2 Describe different types of tail-rotor systems and their advantages - x - - - -

81.12.2.1.3 Identify from a diagram the main structural components of tail-rotor systems - x - - - -

Explain and describe the methods to detect damage and cracks on the tail
81.12.2.1.4 - x - - - -
rotor and assembly
81.12.2.2 Structural components and materials, stresses and structural limitations - x - - - -
81.12.2.2.1 Explain pitch-input mechanisms - x - - - -
81.12.2.3 Design and construction - x - - - -
List and describe various tail-rotor designs and construction methods used on
81.12.2.3.1 - x - - - -
helicopters
81.13 Transmission - x - - - -
81.13.1 Main gear box - x - - - -
81.13.1.1 Different types, design, operation and limitations - x - - - -
Describe the main principles of helicopter transmission systems and ist
limitations: drive for the main and tail rotor, accessory drive for the
81.13.1.1.1 - x - - - -
generator(s), alternator(s), hydraulic and oil pumps, oil cooler(s) and
tachometers
81.13.2 Rotor brake - x - - - -
81.13.2.1 Different types, design, operation and limitations - x - - - -
81.13.2.1.1 Describe the main function and usage of the disc type of rotor brake - x - - - -
81.13.2.1.2 Describe hydraulic- and cable-operated rotor-brake systems - x - - - -
81.13.3 Auxiliary systems - x - - - -
81.13.3.1 Design, operation and limitations - x - - - -
Explain how power for the air-conditioning system is taken from the auxiliary
81.13.3.1.1 - x - - - -
gearbox
81.13.4 Drive shaft and associated installation - x - - - -
81.13.4.1 Design, operation and limitations - x - - - -

81.13.4.1.1 Describe how power is transmitted from the engine to the main-rotor gearbox - x - - - -

81.13.4.1.2 Describe the material and construction of the driveshaft - x - - - -

81.13.4.1.3 Explain the relationship between driveshaft speed and torque - x - - - -
81.13.4.1.4 Describe the methods with which power is delivered to the tail rotor - x - - - -
81.13.5 Intermediate and tail gear box - x - - - -
81.13.5.1 Different types, design, operation and limitations - x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 131 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe various arrangements when the drive changes direction and the
81.13.5.1.1 - x - - - -
need for an intermediate or tail gearbox
Explain how on most helicopters the tail-rotor gearbox contains gearing,
81.13.5.1.2 - x - - - -
etc., for the tail-rotor pitch-change mechanism
81.14 Blades - x - - - -
81.14.1 Main rotor blade - x - - - -
81.14.1.1 Design and construction - x - - - -
Describe the different types of blade construction and the need for torsional
81.14.1.1.1 - x - - - -
stiffness
81.14.1.1.2 State the advantages of a hingeless rotor - x - - - -
81.14.1.1.3 Describe and explain the use of blade twist - x - - - -
81.14.1.2 Structural components and materials - x - - - -
81.14.1.2.1 List the materials used in the construction of main-rotor blades - x - - - -

81.14.1.2.2 List the main structural components of a main-rotor blade and their function - x - - - -
81.14.1.3 Stresses - x - - - -
81.14.1.3.1 Describe main-rotor blade-loading on the ground and in flight - x - - - -
81.14.1.3.2 Describe where the most common stress areas are on rotor blades - x - - - -
Explain the upper limit of the rotor RPM by centrifugal forces pulling on the
81.14.1.3.3 - x - - - -
blade's attachment to the hub
Explain how use of flapping hinges or flexible element in the hingeless rotor
81.14.1.3.4 - x - - - -
can reduce oscillating bending moments
81.14.1.4 Structural limitations - x - - - -
81.14.1.4.1 Explain the structural limitations in terms of bending and rotor RPM - x - - - -
81.14.1.5 Adjustment - x - - - -
81.14.1.5.1 Explain how the pitch angle of the rotor blades can be adjusted - x - - - -
81.14.1.5.2 Explain the use of trim tabs - x - - - -
81.14.1.6 Tip shape - x - - - -
Describe the different blade-tip shapes, and compare their advantages and
81.14.1.6.1 - x - - - -
disadvantages
81.14.2 Tail rotor blade - x - - - -
81.14.2.1 Design and construction - x - - - -
Describe the most common design of tail-rotor blade construction, consisting
81.14.2.1.1 of stainless steel shell reinforced by a honeycomb filler and stainless steel - x - - - -
leading abrasive strip

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 132 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe the two-bladed rotor with a teetering hinge, and rotors with more
81.14.2.1.2 - x - - - -
than two blades
Describe the dangers to ground personnel and to the rotor blades, and how
81.14.2.1.3 - x - - - -
to minimise these dangers
81.14.2.1.4 Describe measures to reduce noise produced by the tail rotor - x - - - -
81.14.2.2 Stresses, vibrations and balancing - x - - - -
81.14.2.2.1 Describe the tail-rotor blade-loading on the ground and in flight - x - - - -
Explain the sources of vibration of the tail rotor and the resulting high
81.14.2.2.2 - x - - - -
frequencies
81.14.2.3 Structural limitations - x - - - -
81.14.2.3.1 Describe the structural limitations of the tail-rotor blades - x - - - -
Describe the method of checking the strike indicators on the tip of some tail-
81.14.2.3.2 - x - - - -
rotor blades
81.14.2.4 Adjustment - x - - - -
Describe the adjustment of yaw pedals in the cockpit to obtain full-control
81.14.2.4.1 - x - - - -
authority of the tail rotor
82 INSTRUMENTATION x x x - x x
82.1 Instrument and indication systems x x x - x x
82.1.1 Pressure gauge x x - - - -
82.1.1.1 Different types, design, operation, characteristics and accuracy x x - - - -
List the units used for pressure measurement: Pascal, bar, inches of mercury
82.1.1.1.1 x x - - - -
(in Hg), pounds per square inch (psi)
Identify pressure measurements applicable to general aviation aircrafts: air
82.1.1.1.2 pressure (pitot-static), liquid-pressure measurement (fuel, oil, hydraulic), x x - - - -
engine-pressure measurement manifold pressure (MAP)
82.1.2 Temperature sensing x x - - - -
82.1.2.1 Different types, design, operation, characteristics and accuracy x x - - - -
List the units used in aviation for temperature measurement: Kelvin, Celsius,
82.1.2.1.1 x x - - - -
Fahrenheit
Identify temperature measurements that are applicable to general aviation
82.1.2.1.2 aircrafts: gas temperature measurement (ambient air, exhaust gas), liquid- x x - - - -
temperature measurement (fuel, oil, hydraulic)
82.1.3 Fuel gauge x x - x - -
82.1.3.1 Different types, design, operation, characteristics and accuracy x x - x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 133 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x

82.1.3.1.1 State that the quantity of fuel is usually measured by capacitance (by volume) x x - x - -

List the following units used for fuel quantity: kilogramme; pound, litres,
82.1.3.1.2 x x - x - -
gallons (US and imperial)
82.1.3.1.2 Convert between the various units of fuel quantity x x - x - -
Explain the parameters that can affect the measurement of the volume or
82.1.3.1.3 x x - x - -
mass of the fuel in a fuel tank: temperature, aircraft attitudes
State that an fuel indication of 'zero' means the remaining fuel in the tank is
82.1.3.1.4 x x - x - -
equal to the 'unusable fuel'
Describe a typical post-refuelling procedure: recording the volume that was
82.1.3.1.5 filled, converting to the appropriate unit used by the aircraft fuel gauge(s) to x x - x - -
compare the actual indicated fuel content to the calculated fuel content
82.1.4 Flow meter x x - x - -
82.1.4.1 Different types, design, operation, characteristics and accuracy x x - x - -
82.1.4.1.1 Define 'fuel flow' and how it is measured x x - x - -
List the units used for fuel flow when measured by mass per hour:
82.1.4.1.2 x x - x - -
kilogrammes/hour, pounds/hour
List the units used for fuel flow when measured by volume per hour:
82.1.4.1.3 x x - x - -
litres/hour, imperial gallons/hour, US gallons/hour
82.1.5 Torque meter - x - - - -
82.1.5.1 Different types, design, operation, characteristics and accuracy - x - - - -
Define 'torque', and state the units used for torque: Newton meters, inch or
82.1.5.1.1 - x - - - -
foot pounds
82.1.5.1.2 Explain the relationship between power, torque and RPM - x - - - -
82.1.5.1.3 Give examples of display - x - - - -
82.1.6 Tachometer x x - - - -
82.1.6.1 Different types, design, operation, characteristics and accuracy x x - - - -
82.1.6.1.1 State where tachometers are used in general aviation aircraft x x - - - -
Describe the operating principle of tachometers: mechanical, electrical (or
82.1.6.1.2 electronic), and state that some types require electrical power to provide an x x - - - -
indication
82.1.6.1.3 State the typical units for engine speed: RPM for piston-engine aircraft x x - - - -

82.1.6.1.4 State the typical units for engine speed: percentage for turbine-engine aircraft - x - - - -

82.1.6.1.5 Describe actions to be taken in case rotor RPM indicator fails - x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 134 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
82.2 Measurement of aerodynamic parameters x x x - - -
82.2.1 Pressure measurement x x x - - -
82.2.1.1 Static pressure, dynamic pressure, density and definitions x x x - - -
Define the following pressure measurements and describe their relationship:
82.2.1.1.1 x x x - - -
'static pressure', 'dynamic pressure', 'total pressure'
82.2.1.2 Design, operation, errors and accuracy x x x - - -
Describe a typical pitot/static system and list the different instruments
82.2.1.2.1 x x x - - -
connected to the sources
State the requirement to check pitot/static sources to be clean of dirt and ice
82.2.1.2.2 x x x - - -
before any flight
82.2.1.2.3 Describe alternate static sources and their effects when used x x x - - -
Describe the associated errors and how to compensate for them: position
82.2.1.2.4 x x x - - -
error, instrument error
82.2.2 Temperature measurement: aeroplane and helicopter x x - - - -
82.2.2.1 Design, operation, errors and accuracy x x - - - -
Describe the term 'outside air temperature (OAT)' and how it is measured on
82.2.2.1.1 x x - - - -
general aviation aircraft (piston engine)
82.2.2.2 Displays x x - - - -
Describe how temperature is displayed on general aviation aircraft (piston
82.2.2.2.1 x x - - - -
enine)
82.2.3 Altimeter x x x - x x
82.2.3.1 The different barometric references (QNH, QFE and 1013.25) x x x - x x
82.2.3.1.1 Define the following barometric references: 'QNH', 'QFE', '1013,25' x x x - x x
Height, indicated altitude, true altitude, pressure altitude and density
82.2.3.2 x x x - x x
altitude
List the following units used for altimeters and state the relationship between
82.2.3.2.1 x x x - x x
them: feet, metres
82.2.3.2.2 Define the terms 'height', 'altitude' and 'pressure altitude (flight level)' x x x - x x
Define the terms: 'indicated altitude', 'true altitude', 'pressure altitude',
82.2.3.2.3 x x x - x x
'density altitude'
82.2.3.3 Design, operation, errors and accuracy x x x - x x
82.2.3.3.1 Explain the operating principles of a barometric altimeter x x x - x x
82.2.3.3.2 Explain the procedure for setting the correct pressure reference x x x - x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 135 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe meteorological conditions that lead to a higher/lower indicated
82.2.3.3.3 altitude, compared to the true altitude/FL, with regard to QNH and x x x - x x
temperature deviation from ISA
82.2.3.3.4 Describe the effects of a blockage or leakage on the static pressure line x x x - x x
Describe the use of GNSS altitude as alternative means of checking altimeter
82.2.3.3.5 x x x - x x
indications, and highlight the limitations of the GNSS altitude indication
82.2.3.4 Displays x x x - x x
Describe how the altimeter indication changes when setting higher/lower
82.2.3.4.1 x x x - x x
reference pressure
Describe and identify how altitude can be displayed on: analog instruments
82.2.3.4.2 x x x - x x
(pointer), integrated electronic instruments (altitude 'tape')

82.2.3.4.3 Interpret example altimeter indications be means of pressure reference setting x x x - x x

82.2.4 Vertical speed indicator (VSI) x x x - x x
82.2.4.1 Design, operation, errors and accuracy x x x - x x
82.2.4.1.1 List the units used for VSIs: metres per second, feet per minute x x x - x x
82.2.4.1.2 Explain the operating principles of a VSI x x x - x x
Describe the effects on a VSI of a blockage or leakage on the static pressure
82.2.4.1.3 x x x - x x
line
Explain the lag in indication due to the time required for difference in
82.2.4.1.4 x x x - x x
pressure to be established
Describe the lag-free indication of an Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicator
82.2.4.1.5 x x x - x x
(IVSI) by the use of accelerometers
82.2.4.2 Displays x x x - x x

Describe and identify how vertical speed can be displayed on: analog
82.2.4.2.1 x x x - x x
instruments (pointer), integrated electronic instruments (e.g. arrow/pointer)

State that Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicators (IVSIs) can be identified by

82.2.4.2.2 x x x - x x
the letters "IVSI" on the indicator face
82.2.5 Air speed indicator x x x - - -
82.2.5.1 The different speeds IAS, CAS, TAS: definition, usage and relationships x x x - - -
82.2.5.1.1 Define the terms: 'IAS', 'CAS', 'TAS' x x x - - -
82.2.5.1.2 Convert between IAS/CAS and TAS using the rule of thumb ('2% per 1000 ft') x x x - - -
82.2.5.1.3 Convert between IAS/CAS and TAS using the mechanical flight calculator x x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 136 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Explain the relevance of IAS with regard to speed limitations (stall speed,
82.2.5.1.4 VNE), and how they change with environmental factors (e.g. altitude, airfield x - x - - -
elevation, temperature)
82.2.5.2 Design, operation, errors and accuracy x x x - - -
82.2.5.2.1 Explain the operating principles of an airspeed indicator (ASI) x x x - - -
Describe the following ASI errors: instrument error, position error, density
82.2.5.2.2 x x x - - -
error
Describe the effects on an ASI of a blockage or leakage in the static or total
82.2.5.2.3 x x x - - -
pressure line
Describe appropriate procedures in the event of unreliable airspeed
indications: combination of pitch attitude / power setting, ambient wind
82.2.5.2.4 x x x - - -
noise, use of GPS speed indications and the associated limitations (having GS
instead of IAS/CAS)
82.2.5.3 Displays x x x - - -
Identify and describe how airspeed can be displayed on analog instruments
82.2.5.3.1 x x x - - -
(pointer), integrated electronic instruments (speed 'tape')
Explain the following colour codes that can be used on an aeroplane ASI:
82.2.5.3.2 white arc (flap operating speed range), green arc (normal operating speed x - x - - -
range), yellow arc (caution speed range), red line (VNE)
Explain the following colour codes that can be used on an helicopter ASI:
82.2.5.3.3 green arc (normal operating speed range), red line (VNE), blue line (maximum - x x - - -
airspeed during autorotation)
82.3 Magnetism: direct reading compass x x x - x x
82.3.1 Earth magnetic field x x x - x x
82.3.1.1 Field geometry x x x - x x
Describe the magnetic field of the Earth with regard to: magnetic poles,
82.3.1.1.1 x x x - x x
orientation of the magnetic field lines
Define the following terms: 'magnetic variation (VAR)', 'magnetic dip
82.3.1.1.2 x x x - x x
(inclination)'
Define 'magnetic north (MN)' x - x x
82.3.1.2 Directive force x x x - x x
Explain why online the horizontal component of the Earth's magnetic field
82.3.1.2.1 x x x - x x
can be used for directional reference
Explain why a magnetic compass becomes unusable close to Earth's magnetic
82.3.1.2.2 x x x - x x
poles

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 137 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
82.3.2 Direct reading compass x x x - x x
82.3.2.1 Design, operation, data processing, accuracy and deviation x x x - x x
Describe how a magnetic compass will align to both the horizontal and
82.3.2.1.1 x x x - x x
vertical components of the Earth’s magnetic field
Explain the origin and effect of aircraft's magnetic field on the alignment of
82.3.2.1.2 x x x - x x
the magnetic compass
82.3.2.1.3 Define 'deviation (DEV)' and 'compass north (CN)' x x x - x x
Explain the use of deviation tables for correct gyro settings with given
82.3.2.1.4 x x - - - -
examples
82.3.2.2 Turning and acceleration errors x x x - - -
State that the indication of a magnetic compass is affected by deviation,
82.3.2.2.1 x x x - - -
turning and acceleration errors
Describe the 'turning error' and determine required indication the roll out on
82.3.2.2.2 x x x - - -
a desired heading
Describe the indications when accelerating/decerating on east or west
82.3.2.2.3 x x x - - -
headings
82.4 Gyroscopic instruments x x - - - -
82.4.1 Gyroscope: basic principles x x - - - -
82.4.1.1 Definitions and design x x - - - -
82.4.1.1.1 Define a 'gyro' x x - - - -
82.4.1.1.2 Define the 'degrees of freedom' of a gyro x x - - - -
82.4.1.2 Fundamental properties x x - - - -
82.4.1.2.1 Explain the fundamentals of the theory of gyroscopic forces x x - - - -
82.4.1.2.2 Explain the terms 'rigidity', 'precession', 'drift' and 'wander' x x - - - -
82.4.1.2.3 Describe the two ways of driving gyroscopes: air/vacuum or electrically x x - - - -
Explain why some instruments are driven electrically while others by
82.4.1.2.4 x x - - - -
air/vacuum
82.4.2 Turn and bank indicator x x - - - -
82.4.2.1 Design, operation and errors x x - - - -
82.4.2.1.1 Explain the purpose of a rate-of-turn and balance (slip) indicator x x - - - -
Define 'rate-1 turn', and describe the relation between bank and TAS for a rate-
82.4.2.1.2 x x - - - -
1-turn
Explain the operating principle of a turn-and-bank indicator and a turn
82.4.2.1.3 x x - - - -
coordinator with regard to: orientation of axis, degrees of freedom, drive

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 138 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe the indications of a rate-of-turn and balance (slip) indicator during
82.4.2.1.4 x x - - - -
a balanced, slip or skid turn
Describe and compare the indications of a 'rate-of-turn indicator' and a 'turn
82.4.2.1.5 x x - - - -
coordinator' (or 'turn-and-bank indicator')
82.4.3 Attitude indicator x x - - - -
82.4.3.1 Design, operation, errors and accuracy x x - - - -
82.4.3.1.1 Explain the purpose of the attitude indicator x x - - - -
Explain the operating principle of an attitude indicator with regard to:
82.4.3.1.2 x x - - - -
orientation of axis, degrees of freedom, drive
Describe a typical attitude display and instrument markings, and identify
82.4.3.1.3 x x - - - -
flight attitudes from example indications
82.4.3.1.4 Describe the limitations of the ADI with regard to extreme flight situations x x - - - -
82.4.4 Directional gyroscope x x - - - -
82.4.4.1 Design, operation, errors and accuracy x x - - - -
82.4.4.1.1 Explain the purpose of the directional gyroscope x x - - - -
Explain the operating principle of a directional gyro with regard to:
82.4.4.1.2 x x - - - -
orientation of axis, degrees of freedom, drive
Describe the Horzintal Situation Indicator (HSI) with regard to: power supply,
82.4.4.1.3 x x - - - -
indication
(here no regard to
dependency on
82.4.4.1.4 Describe how the directional gyroscope will drift over time x x - - - -
latitude or longitude
displacement)
Describe the procedure to align the directional gyro to the correct compass
82.4.4.1.5 x x - - - -
heading
82.5 Communication systems x x - - - -
82.5.1 Transmission modes: VHF, HF and SATCOM x x - - - -
82.5.1.1 Principles, bandwidth, operational limitations and use x x - - - -
82.5.1.1.1 Describe the use of HF and VHF for voice communication x x - - - -
82.5.1.1.2 State the frequency range used with HF and VHF communication x x - - - -

82.5.1.1.3 Explain which factors affect the range and availability of HF communication x x - - - -

82.5.1.1.4 Explain which factors affect the range and availability of VHF communication x x - - - -

82.6 Alerting systems and proximity systems x x - - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 139 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
82.6.1 Flight warning systems x x - - - -
82.6.1.1 Design, operation, indications and alarms x x - - - -
82.6.1.1.1 State the colors used for 'warning' and 'caution' indications (red, amber) x x - - - -
82.6.1.1.2 State how operational limits are displayed x x - - - -
82.6.2 Stall warning x - - - - -
82.6.2.1 Design, operation, indications and alarms x - - - - -
82.6.2.1.1 Describe the purpose of an Stall Warning System (SWS) x - - - - -
82.6.2.1.2 Describe the different types of SWS used in general aviation aircraft x - - - - -
Explain the difference between the stall warning speed and the actual stalling
82.6.2.1.3 x - - - - -
speed of the aeroplane
82.6.3 Radio-altimeter - x - - - -
82.6.3.1 Design, operation, indications and alarms - x - - - -
82.6.3.1.1 Explain the purpose of a low-altitude radio altimeter - x - - - -
82.6.3.1.2 Describe the principle of the distance (height) measurement - x - - - -
82.6.3.1.3 State the range of a radio altimeter - x - - - -
82.6.4 Rotor or engine over speed alert system - x - - - -
82.6.4.1 Design, operation, indications and alarms - x - - - -
Describe the basic design principles, operation, displays and warning/alarm
82.6.4.1.1 - x - - - -
systems fitted to helicopters
82.7 Integrated instruments: electronic displays x x - - - -
82.7.1 Display units x x - - - -
82.7.1.1 Design, different technologies and limitations x x - - - -
General concept x x - - - -
Explain the advantage of using integrated displays compared to single
82.7.1.1.1 x x - - - -
analog instruments
Displayed information x x - - - -
State the information typically displayed on electronic flight displays:
82.7.1.1.2 x x - - - -
primary flight data and navigational data ('basic-T'), engine parameters
PFD layout x x - - - -
Describe the typical design of the speed tape: rolling speed scale with
82.7.1.1.3 numerical read-out of current speed, limiting airspeeds according to x x - - - -
configuration, speed trend vector, bug/indication for selected airspeed
Describe the typical design of the altitude information: rolling altitude scale
82.7.1.1.4 with numerical read-out of current altitude, altimeter pressure setting, x x - - - -
bug/indication for selected altitude

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 140 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
User interface x x - - - -
Describe how data can be selected or inserted into electronic displays (e.g.
82.7.1.1.5 x x - - - -
using 'line select keys', rotational knobs, touch screens)
Identification and interpretation x x - - - -
82.7.1.1.6 Identify displayed information from example display pictures x x - - - -
Failure x x - - - -
Explain the requirement of standy-by instruments when using integrated
82.7.1.1.7 x x - - - -
flight displays
83 SPL - - x - - -
83.1 Mass and balance - - x - - - see also chapter 71
83.1.1 SPL: specific aspects - - x - - -
83.1.1.1 Limitations with water ballast - - x - - -
State that although water ballast is loaded into supporting structure (wing
83.1.1.1.1 - - x - - -
unit), also a maximum take-off mass with water ballast exists
State that when determining the amount of water balast to be loaded, all
83.1.1.1.2 - - x - - -
other loads and limits have to be taken into account
83.1.1.2 Calculation of baggage/water ballast load - - x - - -
With loads given (pilot and parachute, empty mass) and maximum masses
(max. take-off mass with/without water ballast, maximum water ballast
83.1.1.2.1 - - x - - -
mass), calculate the maximum allowed masses for baggage and/or water
ballast
83.1.1.3 Use of AFM graphs - - x - - -
With loads given (pilot and parachute, empty mass) and maximum masses
(max. take-off mass with/without water ballast, maximum water ballast
83.1.1.3.1 - - x - - -
mass), determine the maximum allowed masses for baggage and/or water
ballast using AFM graphs
83.2 Flight controls - - x - - - see also chapter 81.5
83.2.1 Controls and handles used in gliders - - x - - -
83.2.1.1 Handles and colors - - x - - -
State the colors used for marking the handles for: canopy release: red,
83.2.1.1.1 - - x - - -
elevator trim: green, air brakes: blue, cable release: yellow
83.2.2 Controls for different phases of flight - - x - - -
83.2.2.1 Elevator trim - - x - - -
83.2.2.1.1 Explain the purpose and use of the elevator trim - - x - - -
83.2.2.2 Flaps - - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 141 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Explain the effect of extending flaps on the wing profile with rerard to
83.2.2.2.1 - - x - - -
camber, lift and drag
Describe how lift, drag and stall speed change when setting flaps to a positive
83.2.2.2.2 - - x - - -
or negative position
State which flap setting is suitable for take-off/launch, high speed cruise or
83.2.2.2.3 - - x - - -
landing
83.2.2.2.4 Explain the hazrds from sudden retraction of flaps close to the ground - - x - - -
83.2.2.3 Air brakes or speed brakes - - x - - -
83.2.2.3.1 Explain the effect of air brakes or speed brakes on lift, drag and stall speed - - x - - -
83.2.2.3.2 Explain the advantage of air brakes for spot landings compared to flaps - - x - - -
83.3 Instruments - - x - - - see also chapter 82
83.3.1 General aspects - - x - - -
83.3.1.1 Minimum requirements - - x - - -
83.3.1.1.1 State which minimum instrument equipment is required for glider planes - - x - - -
83.3.2 Specific instruments used in gliders - - x - - -
83.3.2.1 Energy-compensated vertical speed indicator (VSI) - - x - - -
Explain the purpose and operating principle of an energy-compensated VSI
83.3.2.1.1 - - x - - -
('gross' or 'net')
Interpret the indication of a total energy-compensated ('gross compensated')
83.3.2.1.2 VSI: sum of airmass rate of climb/descent and glider's (speed polar) rate of - - x - - -
descent (only change in total energy)
Interpret the indication of a net energy-compensated ('net compensated') VSI:
83.3.2.1.3 - - x - - -
airmass rate of climb/descent only
83.3.2.2 Yaw string - - x - - -
83.3.2.2.1 Describe the function of a yaw string - - x - - -
Explain how to correct with control inputs (aileron / rudder) when the yaw
83.3.2.2.2 - - x - - -
string is off-center
83.3.2.3 Barograph - - x - - -
83.3.2.3.1 Explain the purpose and operating principle of a barograph - - x - - -
83.3.2.4 Collision-avoidance systems - - x - - -
Explain the purpose and operating principle of collision avoidance systems,
83.3.2.4.1 - - x - - -
e.g. FLARM
83.3.2.5 Integrated flight computers - - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 142 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Describe the use of modern flight computers for flight monitoring,
83.3.2.5.1 navigation, airspace and collision avoidance and optimizations for cross - - x - - -
country flights
List items that can be displayed on integrated displays, e.g. glider position
83.3.2.5.2 ('moving map'), wind/velocity, current track, track/correction to waypoint, - - x - - -
distance, current glide ratio, required glide ratio
Explain the requirement to keep databases current when used for
83.3.2.5.3 - - x - - -
navigational purposes
83.3.3 Errors - - x - - -
83.3.3.1 Airspeed indicator - - x - - -
83.3.3.1.1 Explain the effect of side-slip on the airspeed indication - - x - - -
83.3.3.2 Altimeter - - x - - -
83.3.3.2.1 Explain the effect of 'hysterese' with the barometric altimeter - - x - - -
83.4 Rigging of aircraft, connection of control surfaces - - x - - -
83.4.1 Procedures for rigging and checks - - x - - -
83.4.1.1 Rigging of aircraft - - x - - -
83.4.1.1.1 Explain why a glider must be firmly inspected after being rigged - - x - - -
83.4.1.1.2 State that a checklist should be used for inspection after rigging - - x - - -
List items to be checked after rigging, e.g. connections/securings, free and
83.4.1.1.3 correct movement of control surfaces, loose items, connections to - - x - - -
instrument, wheel/tyres, planks/covers
83.4.1.2 Connection of control surfaces - - x - - -
Explain the importance of securing the connections of the control surfaces
83.4.1.2.1 - - x - - -
and main pins
Explain the importance of checking for correct movement of the control
83.4.1.2.2 - - x - - -
surfaces after rigging
83.5 Manuals and documents - - x - - -
83.5.1 Technical and operational documentation - - x - - -
83.5.1.1 Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) - - x - - -
83.5.1.1.1 Explain the purpose and use of the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) - - x - - -
83.5.1.1.2 State that the AFM has to be carried on every flight - - x - - -
List the contents of the AFM: minimum equipment, operating and
83.5.1.1.3 performance limitations, load sheet, normal and emergency procedures, - - x - - -
maintenance
83.5.1.2 Operational documentation - - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 143 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
83.5.1.2.1 Describe the purpose and usage of the glider's log book - - x - - -
83.5.1.2.2 Describe the procedure when detecting defects - - x - - -
see also AGK chapter
83.6 Engines and propellers - - x x - -
81.9, PFA chapter 51.5
83.6.1 Design and construction - - x x - -
83.6.1.1 Engine installation - - x x - -
State that propeller engines can be installed fixed (TMG), or engines can be
83.6.1.1.1 - - x x - -
deployed and retracted (motorized glider planes)
Describe the air cool mechanism with engines in free airstream, and with
83.6.1.1.2 - - x x - -
engines installed within the airframe
83.6.1.2 Engine types - - x x - -
List the engines types used for TMG: carburettor 4-stroke engines, and for
83.6.1.2.1 - - x x - -
deployable engines: 2-stroke or rotary (Wankel) engines
Explain the differences between fuel and lubrication systems with 4-stroke
83.6.1.2.2 - - x x - -
and 2-stroke engines
83.6.2 Operation - - x x - -
83.6.2.1 Fuel and oil - - x x - -
83.6.2.1.1 List fuel types suitable for 4-stroke and 2-stroke engines - - x x - -
83.6.2.1.2 Describe the relevance of the fuel's octane rating - - x x - -
Describe the difference between aviation gasoline (AVGAS) and automobile
83.6.2.1.3 - - x x - -
gasoline with respect to lead and ethanol
State that the maximium permissible ethanol part as stated in the AFM must
83.6.2.1.4 - - x x - -
not be exceeded
83.6.2.1.5 List oil types suitable for 4-stroke and 2-stroke engines - - x x - -
83.6.2.2 Engine operation - - x x - -
Explain why any engine should be warmed up before running on high power
83.6.2.2.1 - - x x - -
and RPM
State that the fuel required for each flight includes fuel for launch, climb,
83.6.2.2.2 - - x x - -
enroute times and reserves (min. 30 minutes)
83.6.3 Propeller - - x x - -
83.6.3.1 Operating principle - - x x - -
Explain the operation of a propeller with regard to development of
83.6.3.1.1 - - x x - -
propulsion force
83.6.3.1.2 Describe the propeller efficiency with regard to angle of attack and TAS - - x x - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 144 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
Explain why engines running with high-RPM require smaller propeller
83.6.3.1.3 - - x x - -
diameters
83.6.3.2 Fixed-pitch propeller - - x x - -
Describe the efficiency of a fixed-pitch propeller with different phases of flight
83.6.3.2.1 - - x x - -
(take-off / climb, cruise)
83.6.3.3 Variable-pitch propeller - - x x - -
Explain how a variable-pitch propeller can be adjusted to different phases of
83.6.3.3.1 - - x x - -
flight (take-off / climb, cruise, feathered)
83.7 Water ballast systems - - x - - -
83.7.1 Construction and operation - - x - - -
83.7.1.1 Construction - - x - - -
83.7.1.1.1 Explain why the water tanks are place inside the wings - - x - - -
83.7.1.1.2 Describe the effect of increasing wing load on the speed polar - - x - - -
Explain the advantage of using water ballast with regard to speed for best
83.7.1.1.3 - - x - - -
glide
83.7.1.2 Operational use - - x - - -
Describe the increase in stall speed when increasing the wing load by water
83.7.1.2.1 - - x - - -
ballast
State as a rule of thumb, that the percentage of increase in speed for best
83.7.1.2.2 - - x - - -
glide is approximately half the percentage of increase in wing load
83.7.1.2.3 State reasons why water ballast should be released before landing - - x - - -
83.7.1.2.4 Describe the procedure for releasing water ballast during flight - - x - - -
83.7.1.3 Limitations - - x - - -
List factors that reduce in performance taken from speed polars, e.g.
83.7.1.3.1 - - x - - -
contaminations by dirt and insects, rain, turns
83.7.1.3.2 State that use of water ballast may be limited by the freezing level -
83.8 Batteries (performance and operational limitations) - - x - - -
83.8.1 Operation and limitation - - x - - -
83.8.1.1 Types of batteries - - x - - -
83.8.1.1.1 List types of batteries used with glider planes - - x - - -
Describe advantages and disadvantages of battery types used with glider
83.8.1.1.2 - - x - - -
planes
83.8.1.2 Operational use - - x - - -
83.8.1.2.1 Explain the importance to fully load batteries before flight - - x - - -
83.8.1.2.2 Describe methods to check the load of a battery - - x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 145 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
83.8.1.2.3 Describe the effect of temperature on a battery's capacity and voltage - - x - - -
83.8.1.2.4 State that the battery has to be firmly secured when put in place - - x - - -
83.8.1.3 Limitations - - x - - -
83.8.1.3.1 State that the use of electronic consumers fed by a battery is time-limited - - x - - -
83.8.1.3.2 List instruments that may put high loads on the battery when in use - - x - - -
83.9 Emergency parachutes - - x - - -
83.9.1 Operation and limitation - - x - - -
83.9.1.1 Operational use - - x - - -
State that an emergency parachute has to be operated and maintained
83.9.1.1.1 - - x - - -
according to the manufacturer's documentation
Describe the operation and differences between automatic or manually
83.9.1.1.2 - - x - - -
operated parachutes
83.9.1.2 Limitations - - x - - -
State that emergency parachutes should not be operated below a minimum
83.9.1.2.1 - - x - - -
height stated in the parachute manual
State that all parachutes have to be handles with care, e.g. storage in dry
83.9.1.2.2 environment, not placing heavy parts on top, maintenance according - - x - - -
manufacturer's documentation
83.10 Emergency bail-out aid - - x - - -
83.10.1 Operation and limitation - - x - - -
83.10.1.1 Purpose and operation - - x - - -
83.10.1.1.1 Describe the purpose of emergency bail-out systems used with glider planes - - x - - -
List factors that can prevent from quick manual emergency exit: low seating
83.10.1.1.2 position, small cockpit width, high g-forces with unusual attitudes, possible - - x - - -
injuries after an air collision
Describe the function of typical bail-out systems, e.g. NOAH (pressurized air
83.10.1.1.3 - - x - - -
cushion under the seat)
83.10.1.2 Limitations - - x - - -
List factors that may limit the operational use of an bail-out system, e.g.
83.10.1.2.1 - - x - - -
weight / size of the pilot
84 BALLOON - - - - x x
84.1 System design, loads, stresses and maintenance - - - - x x
84.1.1 System design - - - - x x
84.1.1.1 Structural elements - - - - x x
84.1.1.1.1 Name and identify the basic structural elements of a balloon - - - - x x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 146 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
84.1.1.1.2 Explain the purpose of the parachute - - - - x x
State the color used for marking cords for operating the parachute or rip
84.1.1.1.3 - - - - x x
panel: red
84.1.1.2 Materials and assembly - - - - x x
84.1.1.2.1 State which materials are used for: hull fabric, suspension ropes, cords - - - - x x
Explain the role of conductive layers or embedded steel threads (filiaments)
84.1.1.2.2 - - - - x x
on the hull fabric
84.1.1.2.3 State how the panels of mesh-less balloons are assembled - - - - x x
84.1.1.3 Stresses - - - - x x
State that UV radiation has the most important impact on the rigidity of the
84.1.1.3.1 - - - - x x
hull fabric
Explain why damages to the hull fabric are most dangerous at the top of a
84.1.1.3.2 - - - - x -
hot-air balloon
84.1.2 Distribution of load and limitations - - - - x x
84.1.2.1 Distribution of load - - - - x x
84.1.2.1.1 Describe the function of the suspension ropes - - - - x x
84.1.2.1.2 Describe the load distrubution with mesh-less balloons - - - - x x
84.1.2.2 Limitations - - - - x x
Describe the stress limitations of adhesive joints along and cross to the
84.1.2.2.1 - - - - x x
adhesive area
84.2 Envelope - - - - x x
84.2.1 Structure and operation - - - - x x
84.2.1.1 Structure - - - - x -
84.2.1.1.1 Explain the purpose of the mesh structure around the envelope of a balloon - - - - x x
Describe the operation of the parachute (connected cord lines, usage,
84.2.1.1.2 - - - - x x
reversability)
84.2.1.2 Operation: Hot Air - - - - x -
Explain why the lower end of the parachute cord has to be especially heat
84.2.1.2.1 - - - - x -
resistant
84.2.1.3 Operation: Gas - - - - - x
Describe how the "sag" of the rip cord changes during climb or descent with a
84.2.1.3.1 - - - - - x
gas balloon with less than maximum differential pressure
84.2.1.3.2 Describe the function and usage of the rip panel (panel location, usage) - - - - - x
84.3 Basket equipment - - - - x x
84.3.1 Burner (hot-air balloon only) - - - - x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 147 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
84.3.1.1 Construction and operation - - - - x -

Describe the construction and operating principle of the fuel burner (gas
84.3.1.1.1 - - - - x -
phases, evaporation, flammable mixture, valves, pilot flame, vaporizor coils)

84.3.2 Basket - - - - x x
84.3.2.1 Construction and operation - - - - x x
84.3.2.1.1 Name and identify the structural components of the basket - - - - x x

84.3.2.1.2 Describe how the basket is fixed to the envelope section with a hot-air balloon - - - - x -
84.3.2.1.3 State the minimum height of the basekt's parapet height - - - - x x
84.3.2.1.4 Explain the function of the wearing strips mounted on the basket for landing - - - - x x
84.4 Lifting gases: hot air and gas - - - - x x
84.4.1 Fuel cylinders (hot-air balloons only) - - - - x -
84.4.1.1 Construction and operation - - - - x -
Explain why the fuel cylinders should not be filled to more than 80 % of
84.4.1.1.1 - - - - x -
volume
84.4.1.1.2 Describe the purpose of the sounding pipe valve - - - - x -
84.4.1.1.3 Describe how the fuel quantity of a fuel cylinder is determined - - - - x -
84.4.1.1.4 Decribe precautions during transport of fuel cylinders - - - - x -
84.4.2 Lifting gas (gas balloons only) - - - - - x
84.4.2.1 Technical aspects and operation - - - - - x
84.4.2.1.1 List typical lifting gases used with gas balloons - - - - - x
84.4.2.1.2 State the density of Hydrogen and Helium gas - - - - - x
84.4.2.1.3 Explain the hazards resulting from leaks in the hydrogen pressure line - - - - - x
84.5 Ballast (gas balloons only) - - - - - x
84.5.1 General aspects - - - - - x
84.5.1.1 Materials and assembly - - - - - x
84.5.1.1.1 Describe the use of ballast for altitude adjustments of a gas balloon - - - - - x
84.5.1.1.2 State which material is used as ballast - - - - - x
Describe how the ballast is mounted to the basket, and which tools are used
84.5.1.1.3 - - - - - x
to release the required amount
84.6 Fuel (hot-air balloons only) - - - - x -
84.6.1 Technical aspects - - - - x -
84.6.1.1 Gas types and properties - - - - x -
84.6.1.1.1 List suitable gases to operate a hot-air balloon - - - - x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 148 of 167

 80 AGK

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL TMG only BPL HOTAIR BPL GAS Remarks
AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE x x x - x x
84.6.1.1.2 State the boiling temperature of propane gas at atmospheric conditions - - - - x -
84.6.1.1.3 List factors the vapour pressure of liquid gas depends on - - - - x -
84.6.1.1.4 State the volume ratio between liquid and gaseous propane - - - - x -
Describe what volume of flammable mixture can be produced per volume of
84.6.1.1.5 - - - - x -
liquid propane
84.7 Instruments - - - - x x see also 82.2 and 82.3
84.7.1 BPL specific instruments - - - - x x
84.7.1.1 Hull temperature gauge - - - - x -
84.7.1.1.1 Explain the purpose of a hull temperature gauge - - - - x -
84.7.1.1.2 Describe the function of an analog hull temperature gauge - - - - x -
84.7.1.1.3 Describe the function of an electronic temperature thermometer - - - - x -
84.7.1.1.4 State whe the hull temperature gauge is located - - - - x -
84.7.1.1.5 Describe how normal operation values and operational limits are displayed - - - - x -
List factors that can lead to false indication when using electronic/remote
84.7.1.1.6 - - - - x -
sensors
84.8 Emergency equipment - - - - x x
84.8.1 Rapid-deflation system - - - - x x
84.8.1.1 Construction and operation - - - - x x
84.8.1.1.1 Describe purpose and function of a rapid-deflation system - - - - x x
84.8.1.1.2 State the location of the emergency gas release - - - - - x

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 149 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
91 GENERAL NAVIGATION x x x x x
91.1 Basics of navigation x x x x -
91.1.1 The solar system x x x x -
91.1.1.1 Seasonal and apparent movements of the sun x x x x -
Describe the rotation of the Earth around its own spin axis and the earth's orbit
91.1.1.1.1 x x x x -
around the sun
State that the earth's spin axis is inclined by 23.5 degrees to the vertical on the
91.1.1.1.2 x x x x -
orbital plane around the sun
Describe the effect that the inclination of the Earth's spin axis has on insolation
91.1.1.1.3 x x x x -
and duration of daylight on different latutudes throughout the year
Explain how the inclination of the earth's spin axis results in seasons on the
91.1.1.1.4 x x x x -
northern and southern hemisphere
91.1.2 The earth x x x x -
91.1.2.1 Position x x x x -
91.1.2.1.1 State that a position in latitude and longitude is referred to a WGS-84 ellipsoid x x x x -
State that the circumference of the Earth is approximately 40000 km or
91.1.2.1.2 x x x x -
approximately 21600 NM
91.1.2.1.3 Explain the use of degrees, minutes and seconds (DMS) for position reference x x x x -
91.1.2.2 Great circle, small circle and rhumb line x x x x -
Great circle x x x x -
Describe the geometric properties of a 'great circle' as a circle with maximium
91.1.2.2.1 x x x x -
circumfence on the earth's surface and its center in the center of the earth
91.1.2.2.2 Explain the significance of a great circle in navigation x x x x -
Explain the change in great circle course due to the angle between the meridians
91.1.2.2.3 x x x x -
along the track
Explain that along any great circle, the angular difference of 1 degree
91.1.2.2.4 x x x x -
corresponds to a distance of 60 NM on the earth's surface
Rhumb line, small circle x x x x -
91.1.2.2.5 Define the term 'rhumb line' and 'small circle' x x x x -
List examples from the earth's coordinate grid for great circles, small circles and
91.1.2.2.6 x x x x -
rhumb lines
Relationship between great circle and rhumb line tracks x x x x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 150 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
State that the great circle and rhumb line track both lead from a position A to
91.1.2.2.7 position B, but the rhumb line track in general is a longer distance (detour) when x x x x -
compared to the great circle track
91.1.2.3 Latitude and difference of latitude x x x x -
Define 'latitude' as the angle between the equatorial plane and the local vertical
91.1.2.3.1 x x x x -
direction at a point on earth's surface
91.1.2.3.2 Calculate the difference in latitude between any two given positions x x x x -
Calculate the distance in NM any two given positions on the same meridian
91.1.2.3.3 x x x x -
(using 60 NM per degree difference in latutude)
91.1.2.4 Longitude and difference of longitude x x x x -
Define 'longitude' as the angle from the reference (Greewich) meridian to the
91.1.2.4.1 x x x x -
local meridian
91.1.2.4.2 Calculate the difference in longitude between any two given positions x x x x -
91.1.2.5 Use of latitude and longitude co-ordinates to locate any specific position x x x x -
Describe the format for expressing position coodinates with degrees, minutes and
91.1.2.5.1 x x x x -
seconds for latitude and longitude
State that meridians and parallels of latitude intersect with 90 degrees all over
91.1.2.5.2 x x x x -
the globe
Describe the coordinate grid of the earth, and name and identify the Greenwich
91.1.2.5.3 x x x x -
meridian, dateline, tropics and polar (arctic) circles
91.1.3 Time and time conversions x x x x -
91.1.3.1 Apparent time x x x x -
State that the 'apparent time' is based on the movement of the actual (apparent)
91.1.3.1.1 x x x x -
sun
State that 'apparent time' is NOT exactly 24 hours every day, and it is different for
91.1.3.1.2 x x x x -
every degree of longitude
Describe the daily movement of the apparent sun from east to west across the sky
91.1.3.1.3 x x x x -
with approximately 15 degrees per hour
sequence
91.1.3.2 LMT x x x x - changed
with 1.3.3

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 151 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
State that the 'local mean time (LMT)' is based on a fictious, 'mean' sun moving
91.1.3.2.1 x x x x -
with constant, averaged speed
State that 'local mean time (LMT)' is 24 hours every day, and it is different for
91.1.3.2.2 x x x x -
every degree of longitude
State that a difference in longitude of 15 degrees corresponds to the angle the
91.1.3.2.3 x x x x -
earth is turning around its axis within 1 hour
Explain the relevance of LMT with documentation of astronomical events
91.1.3.2.4 x x x x -
(sunrise, sunset, begin/end of twilight)
sequence
91.1.3.3 UTC x x x x - changed
with 1.3.2
Explain the requirement for having a universal time in aviation, being the same
91.1.3.3.1 x x x x -
at a given moment at any place around the globe
Describe 'universal co-ordinated time (UTC)' as global time reference, with the
91.1.3.3.2 x x x x -
time given corresponding to the LMT at the Greenwich meridian (GMT)
91.1.3.3.3 State that in aviation, all times in documentation are UTC x x x x -
91.1.3.4 Standard times x x x x -
Explain the requirement for having time zones, defined by political and
91.1.3.4.1 x x x x -
economical constraints
State that 'standard time (ST)' is defined by a given, arbitrary time difference to
91.1.3.4.2 x x x x -
UTC
91.1.3.4.3 Explain the concept of 'daylight saving time (DST)' x x x x -
Describe the usage of almanacs or tables to find the current time difference to
91.1.3.4.4 x x x x -
UTC for a time zone, including DST
State that for 2 positions on the same latitude, when expressed in ST, sunrise and
91.1.3.4.5 x x x x -
sunset is earlier for the position further east
With given time difference to UTC, or almanac reference, convert between ST and
91.1.3.4.6 x x x x -
UTC
91.1.3.5 Dateline x x - - -
Describe the 'dateline' as a line running approxiamately along the 180E/W
91.1.3.5.1 meridian, with the 'new' day west of the line (on east hemisphere), and the 'old' x x - - -
day east of the line (on western hemisphere)

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 152 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
State that the local calendar date increases or decreases when flying across the
91.1.3.5.2 x x - - -
dateline
91.1.3.6 Definition of sunrise, sunset and civil twilight x x x x -
Define 'sunrise' and 'sunset' as the time when the sun's upper edge is at the
91.1.3.6.1 x x x x -
observer's horizon
Define the beginning / end of 'civil twilight' (BCMT/ECET) as the time before
91.1.3.6.2 x x x x -
sunrise / after sunset when the centre of the sun is 6 degrees below the horizon
Extract sunrise, sunset and twilight times from a suitable source (e.g. an
91.1.3.6.3 x x x x -
almanac/table, or AIP)
State that for VFR flights, 'night' begins with end of civil (evening) twilight and
91.1.3.6.4 x x x x x
ends with beginning of civil (morning) twilight
91.1.4 Directions x x x x -
91.1.4.1 True north, magnetic north and compass north x x x x -
True North x x x x -
91.1.4.1.1 Define 'true north' (TN) and corresponding directions (TH, TC) x x x x -
Describe how to termine true directions on an aeronautical charts using
91.1.4.1.2 x x x x -
meridian lines
Magnetic North and Variation x x x x -
91.1.4.1.3 Define 'magnetic north' (MN) and corresponding directions (MH, MC) x x x x -
91.1.4.1.4 Define 'variation (VAR)' as the angle between TN and MN x x x x -
91.1.4.1.5 Describe the change of variation with time and position x x x x -
State that 'westerly variation' (MN west of TN) is negative (- or W), and 'easterly
91.1.4.1.6 x x x x -
variation' (MN east of TN) is positive (+ or E) for use in calculations
91.1.4.1.7 Calculate magnetic values (M) from true values (T) and vice versa using VAR x x x x -
Compass North x x x x -
91.1.4.1.8 Define 'compass north' (CN) and corresponding directions (CH) x x x x -
91.1.4.1.9 Define 'deviation (DEV)' as the angle between MN and CN x x x x -
State that 'westerly deviation' (CN west of MN) is negative (- or W), and 'easterly
91.1.4.1.10 x x x x -
deviation' (CN east of MN) is positive (+ or E) for use in calculations
91.1.4.1.11 Calculate compass values (C) from magnetic values (M) and vice versa using DEV x x x x -
91.1.4.1.12 Explain the usage of deviation tables x x x x -
91.1.4.2 Magnetic poles, isogonals, relationship between true (T) and magnetic (M) x x x x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 153 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
Describe how local variation can be obtained from different charts: using
91.1.4.2.1 x x x x -
isogonal lines (enroute charts) or MN arrows (e.g. on airport charts)
91.1.5 Distance x x x x -
Units of distance and height used in navigation: nautical miles, statute miles,
91.1.5.1 x x x x -
kilometres, metres and ft
State the typical units and conversion factors for distance: nautical mile (NM),
91.1.5.1.1 x x x x -
kilometre (km)
State the typical units and conversion factors for height or altitude: feet (ft),
91.1.5.1.2 x x x x -
metres (m)
91.1.5.2 Conversion from one unit to another x x x x -
91.1.5.2.1 Convert between units of distance: nautical mile (NM), kilometre (km) x x x x -
91.1.5.2.2 Convert between units of height or altitude: feet (ft), metres (m) x x x x -
Relationship between nautical miles and minutes of latitude and minutes of
91.1.5.3 x x x x -
longitude
State that 1' (minute of arc) along any meridian corresponds to a distance of 1
91.1.5.3.1 x x x x -
NM or 1.852 km

91.1.5.3.2 Calculate distances along any meridian with latitudes given between to positions x x x x -

State that 1' (minute of arc) along the equator corresponds to a distance of 1 NM
91.1.5.3.3 x x x x -
or 1.852 km
State that 1' (minute of arc) along any circle of latitude (except the equator)
91.1.5.3.4 x x x x -
corresponds to a distance of less than 1 NM or 1.852 km
91.2 Charts x x x x -
91.2.1 General properties of miscellaneous types of projections x x x x -
91.2.1.1 General properties: scale x x x x -
91.2.1.1.1 Describe the term 'scale' as ratio of chart distance to (real) earth distance x x x x -
With given values, calculate between scale, chart distance and (real) earth
91.2.1.1.2 x x x x -
distance
State the scales that are typically used with aviation enroute charts (e.g. 1:500
91.2.1.1.3 x x x x -
000 and 1:1000 000)
91.2.1.2 Direct Mercator x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 154 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
Describe the cylindrical type of projection, attached to the equator, used as basis
91.2.1.2.1 x x - - -
for a 'direct Mercator' chart
State that the scale on a direct Mercator chart is NOT constant and changes
91.2.1.2.2 x x - - -
significantly with latitude

Describe the quality of the projection of a direct Mercator with regard to shape,
91.2.1.2.3 x x - - -
size and proportions of projected areas, and assess its usability in aviation

91.2.1.3 Lambert conformal conic x x x x -

Describe the conic projection, intersecting the earth at two standard parallels,
91.2.1.3.1 x x x x -
used as basis for the 'Lambert conformal conic projection'
State that the Lambert chart is exactly true to angles, and that for all
91.2.1.3.2 x x x x -
navigational purposes the scale can be assumed as constant
91.2.1.3.3 State that Lambert conformal chart are usually used for aviation enroute chart x x x x -
91.2.2 The representation of meridians, parallels, great circles and rhumb lines x x - - -
91.2.2.1 Direct Mercator x x - - -
Describe the shape and alignment of merdians and parallels of latitude on a
91.2.2.1.1 x x - - -
direct Mercator chart
From a given sketch with latitudes and longitudes, identify a direct Mercator
91.2.2.1.2 x x - - -
chart
Describe the appearance of great circles and rhumb lines on a direct Mercator
91.2.2.1.3 x x - - -
chart
91.2.2.1.4 State that a straight line on a direct Mercator chart represents the rhumb line x x - - -
Explain how the measured track at a straight line should be interpreted: as
91.2.2.1.5 rhumb line, constant with reference to the directional/compass system of the x x - - -
aircraft
91.2.2.2 Lambert conformal conic x x - - -
Describe the shape and alignment of merdians and parallels of latitude on a
91.2.2.2.1 x x - - -
Lambert conformal chart
From a given sketch with latitudes and longitudes, identify a Lambert conformal
91.2.2.2.2
chart
91.2.2.2.3 Describe the appearance of great circles and rhumb lines on a Lambert chart x x - - -
91.2.2.2.4 State that a straight line on a Lambert chart represents the great circle x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 155 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
Describe how to obtain the rhumb line track by taking the average great circle
91.2.2.2.5 track (measured at a meridian close to half of the track), and starting off with x x - - -
that track at the departure aerodrome
Explain how the measured track at a straight line should be interpreted: as great
91.2.2.2.6 x x - - -
circle, value calculated and used by navigational systems (GNSS)
91.2.3 The use of current aeronautical charts x x x x -
91.2.3.1 Plotting positions x x x x -
Usage of coordinate grid x x x x -
Describe how to plot positions given with degrees and minutes of latutude and
91.2.3.1.1 x x x x -
longitude, using the 'tick' markings on the full degrees of latitude/longitude
Describe how to find determine coordinates (degrees and minutes) for a given
91.2.3.1.2 location on a chart, using using the 'tick' markings on the full degrees of x x x x -
latitude/longitude
True bearings x x x x -
State that directions measured at merdian lines are referenced to True North (TN)
91.2.3.1.3 x x x x -
and can be used with true bearings (QTE, QUJ)
Magnetic bearings x x x x -
State that when plotting magnetic bearings (QDM, QDR), local Variation (VAR)
91.2.3.1.4 x x x x -
has to be taken into account
Application x x x x -
Demonstrate how to plot a position line into a chart from a station or airfield,
91.2.3.1.5 x x x x -
with given MH and relative bearing (RB)
Demonstrate how to plot a position line into a chart from a VOR, with given
91.2.3.1.6 x x x x -
selected course (OBS), CDI/HSI needle centered and TO/FR flag
91.2.3.2 Methods of indicating scale and relief (ICAO topographical chart) x x x x -
Describe the use of 'contour lines' and 'layer tinting' (colour gradient) for
91.2.3.2.1 x x x x -
depiction of topography on a chart
91.2.3.3 Conventional signs x x x x -
Name and identify features on an aeronautical chart using ICAO symbology (see
91.2.3.3.1 x x x x -
ICAO Annex 4), e.g. obstacles, aerodromes, mountains and passes
91.2.3.4 Measuring tracks and distances x x x x -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 156 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
Explain how to use markings ('ticks') printed along meridians of full degrees on
91.2.3.4.1 x x x x -
aeronautical charts as a distance scale
Explain why the 'ticks' on full degrees of latitude should NOT be used as a scale for
91.2.3.4.2 x x x x -
distances
91.2.3.4.3 Extract courses magnetic (M) and true (T) from chart samples x x x x -
91.2.3.4.4 Extract distances from chart samples x x x x -
91.2.3.5 Plotting bearings and distances x x x x -
Explain the terms 'QTE', 'QUJ', 'QDM', 'QDR' and 'relative bearing (RB)' used for
91.2.3.5.1 x x x x -
plotting positions
91.2.3.5.2 With appropriate values given, convert between QTE/QUJ and QDM/QDR x x x x -
Explain how to obtain position by distance/bearing information, e.g. from an
91.2.3.5.3 x x - - -
RNAV station (VOR)
Explain how to obtain position by intersection of two position lines from different
91.2.3.5.4 x x x x -
ground features, e.g. by visual references or RNAV bearings
91.3 DR navigation x x x x -
91.3.1 Basis of DR x x x x -

merged with
91.3.1.1 Track and Heading (compass, magnetic and true) x x - - -
91.4.1.2

91.3.1.1.1 Explain and apply the concepts of drift and WCA x x - - -

With appropriate values given, calculate between heading and track and
91.3.1.1.2 x x - - -
different direction references (T), (M), (C)
91.3.1.1.3 Calculate TKE with appropriate data of WCA and drift x x - - -
91.3.1.2 Air speed (IAS, CAS and TAS) x x - - -
Calculate TAS from CAS, and vice versa, using the 'rule of thumb' (2 per cent per
91.3.1.2.1 x x - - -
1000 ft)
Explain the relevance of the speeds (IAS/CAS, TAS) for different phases of flight
91.3.1.2.2 x x - - -
preparation and flight conduction
91.5.1.3
91.3.1.3 Groundspeed and revisions x x - - -
integrated
91.3.1.3.1 Explain the relationship between TAS and GS x x - - -
91.3.1.3.2 Apply HWC and TWC to determine GS from TAS and vice versa x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 157 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
Perform GS, distance and time calculations, e.g. calculate average GS based on
91.3.1.3.3 x x - - -
observed fixes
With a revised remaining time and distance to a waypoint or destination given,
91.3.1.3.4 x x - - -
determine revised GS or IAS/CAS
91.3.1.4 ETA x x x x -
With remaining distance and observed ground speed given, calculate the
91.3.1.4.1 x x x x -
remaining time and expected time of arrival (ETA) to a waypoint or destination
91.3.1.5 Climb and Descent x x - -
For a vertical interval (ft), GS and rate of climb/descent given, calculate the time
91.3.1.5.1 x x - - -
required for climb/descent
For a vertical interval (ft), GS and rate of climb/descent given, determine the
91.3.1.5.2 x x - - -
distance required for the climb/descent
91.3.1.6 DR position fix x x x x -
Explain the concept of 'Dead reckoning (DR)' using the terms 'fix', 'air position'
91.3.1.6.1 x x x x -
and 'DR position'
91.3.1.6.2 Describe situations when DR reckoning may be used x x x x -
91.3.2 Use of the navigational computer x x x x -
91.3.2.1 Speed x x x x -
Calculate speed from appropriate values given, using an electronic calculator or
91.3.2.1.1 x x x x -
the mechanical flight calculator
91.3.2.2 Time x x x x -
Calculate time from appropriate values given, using an electronic calculator or
91.3.2.2.1 x x x x -
the mechanical flight calculator
91.3.2.3 Distance x x x x -
Calculate distance from appropriate values given, using an electronic calculator
91.3.2.3.1 x x x x -
or the mechanical flight calculator
91.3.2.4 Fuel consumption x x - - -
Calculate fuel consumption from appropriate values given, using an electronic
91.3.2.4.1 x x - - -
calculator or the mechanical flight calculator
91.3.2.5 Conversions x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 158 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
Convert between units used in navigation (km/NM/SM, m/ft,
91.3.2.5.1 liters/USGAL/IMPGAL), using an electronic calculator or the mechanical flight x x - - -
calculator
91.3.2.6 Air speed x x - - -
With CAS, OAT and Pressure ALT given, determine TAS using the mechanical flight
91.3.2.6.1 x x - - -
calculator and vice versa
91.3.2.7 True altitude x x x x -
For true altitude and obstacle clearance calculation, the following scheme can
be used:
Pressure Altitude (FL)
+ (QNH - 1013) x 30 ft/hPa
= QNH Altitude x x x x -
+/- 4% per 10 degrees deviation from ISA (using + for T>ISA and - for T<ISA)
= True Altitude
- obstacle altitude
= obstacle clearance
Eplain the difference in altimeter indication between standard (1013) and QNH
91.3.2.7.1 x x x x -
setting
Eplain the difference in altimeter indication between QNH setting and true
91.3.2.7.2 x x x x -
altitude in qualitative terms
Calculate ISA standard temperatures for pressure altitudes using the formula
91.3.2.7.3 x x x x -
T(ISA) in degrees C = 15 - 2 x FL/10
With Pressure ALT, OAT (or temperature deviation from ISA) and QNH given,
91.3.2.7.4 calculate the true altitude (TA) using: 30 ft/hPa for QNH correction and 4% per 10 x x x x -
degrees deviation from ISA for temperature correction
91.3.3 The triangle of velocities x x x - -
91.3.3.1 Construction x x x - -
91.3.3.1.1 Explain the terms 'air vector', 'wind vector' and 'ground vector' x x x - -
91.3.3.1.2 Explain the construction of the 'triangle of velocities (TOV)' x x x - -
91.3.3.1.3 State what parameters have to be given to construct a complete TOV x x x - -
Name and identify air vector, wind vector, ground vector, WCA and drift angle
91.3.3.1.4 x x x - -
from an example sketch of a TOV

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 159 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
91.3.3.2 WCA, heading and ground speed x x - - -
With course or track, TAS and wind/velocity given, resolve the TOV for
91.3.3.2.1 heading/WCA and GS using a mechanical flight calculator (flight planning x x - - -
situation)
91.3.3.3 Wind velocity x x - - -
With heading/TAS and track/GS given, resolve the TOV for wind/velocity using a
91.3.3.3.1 x x - - -
mechanical flight calculator
91.3.3.4 GS, track and drift angle x x - - -
With heading/TAS and wind/velocity given, resolve the TOV for track and GS
91.3.3.4.1 x x - - -
using a mechanical flight calculator
91.4 In-flight navigation x x x x -
91.4.1 Use of visual observations and application to in-flight navigation x x x x -
91.4.1.1 Concept of terrestrial navigation x x x x -
91.4.1.1.1 Explain the term 'terrestrial navigation' x x x x -
Explain the term 'map reading', and describe how to prepare and align a map for
91.4.1.1.2 x x x x -
use in visual navigation
91.4.1.1.3 Describe the term 'visual checkpoint', and give examples x x x x -
91.4.1.2 Use of visual features and limitations x x x x -
Explain which elements would make a ground feature suitable for use for VFR
91.4.1.2.1 x x x x -
navigation, and give examples
91.4.1.2.2 Describe the problems of VFR navigation at lower levels x x x x -
List causes of reduced visibility (e.g. below inversion layers), and explain how to
91.4.1.2.3 x x x x -
proceed with such situations
91.4.1.2.4 Describe the special situation and problems of VFR navigation at night x x x x x
91.4.2 Navigation in cruising flight, use of fixes to revise navigation data x x - - -
91.4.2.1 Off-track corrections x x - - -
91.4.2.1.1 Define the terms 'track error' (or 'track error angle') and 'closing angle' x x - - -
91.4.2.1.2 Calculate the track error at an off-course fix using the 1:60 rule x x - - -
Calculate the heading change at an off-course fix to directly reach the next
91.4.2.1.3 x x - - -
waypoint using the 1:60 rule
For a given situation, determine headings and time correction for a 30 and 60
91.4.2.1.4 x x - - -
degree dog leg, e.g. for bad weather (CB) avoidance

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 160 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
91.4.2.2 ETA revisions x x - - -
With GS observed from visual features enroute, calculate revised time of arrival
91.4.2.2.1 x x - - -
(ETA) at next waypoint
91.4.2.3 Flight log x x - - -
Enter revised navigational en-route data, for the legs concerned, into the flight
91.4.2.3.1 plan: e.g. updated wind and GS and correspondingly losses or gains in time and x x - - -
fuel consumption
92 RADIO NAVIGATION x x x x
92.1 Basic radio propagation theory x x - - -
92.1.1 Electromagnetic waves and antennas x x - - -
92.1.1.1 Characteristics and definitions x x - - -
92.1.1.1.1 State that radio waves are forms of electromagnetic waves x x - - -
State that electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light, being
92.1.1.1.2 x x - - -
approximately 300 000 km/s
Explain the following terms and their relationship: 'amplitude', 'frequency',
92.1.1.1.3 x x - - -
'wavelength', 'phase angle', 'phase angle difference/shift'
Describe the 'Doppler effect' an a phenomenon where the frequency of a wave will
92.1.1.1.4 increase or decrease if there is relative motion between the transmitter and the x x - - -
receiver
92.1.1.2 Frequency bands and modulation x x - - -
List the most importand bands of the frequency spectrum for electromagnetic
waves for ground based systems used in VFR flights: low frequency (LF): 30-300
92.1.1.2.1 x x - - -
kHz, medium frequency (MF): 300-3 000 kHz, very high frequency (VHF): 30-300
MHz
Explain how information using lower frequencies (e.g. voice) can be transmitted
92.1.1.2.2 x x - - -
by high frequency electromagnetic waves using 'modulation'
Describe the terms: 'amplitude modulation', 'frequency modulation', 'pulse
92.1.1.2.3 x x - - -
modulation'
92.1.1.3 Antennas x x - - -
Describe an 'antenna' as an electrical device which converts electric power into
92.1.1.3.1 x x - - -
radio waves, and vice versa

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 161 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
Explain the different sizes of an aircraft's antennas by the different wavelengths
92.1.1.3.2 x x - - -
used by the systems
92.1.1.3.3 Explain the different positions antennas are placed around an aircraft x x - - -
92.1.2 Wave propagation x x - - -
92.1.2.1 Propagation with the frequency bands x x - - -
List and explain the possible paths by which an electromagnetic waves can be
92.1.2.1.1 x x - - -
received: via 'direct (space) wave', 'ground wave' and 'sky wave'
Explain the role of ionospheric layers with 'sky waves', and how day or night time
92.1.2.1.2 x x - - -
may affect the reception
Explain 'fading' by the effect of 'interference' when receiving the same signal via
92.1.2.1.3 x x - - -
different paths (e.g. via ground wave and skywave)
92.1.2.1.4 State that LF/MF waves can propagate as 'ground wave' and 'sky wave' x x - - -
92.1.2.1.5 State that VHF waves (and higher frequencies) only propagate as 'direct wave' x x - - -
92.2 Radio aids x x - - -
92.2.1 Ground DF x x - - -
92.2.1.1 Principles x x - - -
92.2.1.1.1 Describe the use of a ground DF x x - - -
92.2.1.1.2 State that, besides a VHF radio, no further airborne equipment is required x x - - -
92.2.1.2 Presentation and interpretation x x - - -
92.2.1.2.1 Define 'QDM': the magnetic bearing TO the station x x - - -
92.2.1.2.2 Define 'QDR': the magnetic bearing FROM the station x x - - -
Explain that by using more than one ground station, the position of an aircraft
92.2.1.2.3 x x - - -
can be determined and transmitted to the pilot
With example QDM/QDR information given, determine the aprroximate location
92.2.1.2.4 x x - - -
of the aircraft in relation to the station
92.2.1.3 Coverage and range x x - - -
Explain the limitation of range due to the path of the VHF signal (station
92.2.1.3.1 x x - - -
elevation and aircraft altitude)
92.2.1.4 Errors and accuracy x x - - -
92.2.1.4.1 Explain why synchronous transmissions will cause errors x x - - -
92.2.2 NDB/ADF x x - - -
92.2.2.1 Principles x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 162 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
Explain the term 'NDB' (non-directional radio beacon) as the ground part of the
92.2.2.1.1 x x - - -
system
Explain the term 'ADF' (automatic direction-finding equipment) as the airborne
92.2.2.1.2 x x - - -
part of the system
92.2.2.1.3 State that the NDB operates in the LF and MF frequency bands (190-1750 kHz) x x - - -
92.2.2.1.4 Describe the use of NDBs for navigation x x - - -
92.2.2.1.5 Describe the procedure to identify a NDB station x x - - -
Describe the function of the 'BFO' (beat frequency oscillator), and state that on
92.2.2.1.6 x x - - -
modern aircraft, BFO is activated automatically
92.2.2.2 Presentation and interpretation x x - - -
Name and describes the following types of indicators: fixed-card ADF, moving-
92.2.2.2.1 x x - - -
card ADF, radio magnetic indicator (RMI)
Interpret the indications given on RMI, fixed-card and moving-card ADF display
92.2.2.2.2 x x - - -
with regard to relative bearning (RB) and QDM/QDR
Describe how to fly the following in-flight ADF procedures: homing and tracking,
92.2.2.2.3 - - -
interceptions of inbound QDM, determining station passage
92.2.2.3 Coverage and range x x - - -
92.2.2.3.1 State that the power of the transmitter limits the range of a NDB x x - - -
State that the range of a NDB is the largest during night, due to reception of a sky
92.2.2.3.2 x x - - -
wave
92.2.2.3.3 State that there is no warning indication of NDB failure or loss of signal x x - - -
92.2.2.4 Errors and accuracy x x - - -
Describe the typical errors with NDB/ADF: 'fading' or 'twilight effect', 'coastal
92.2.2.4.1 x x - - -
refraction'
State that static electricity from CB clouds and lightning may result in erroneous
92.2.2.4.2 x x - - -
ADF bearing indication
92.2.3 VOR x x - - -
92.2.3.1 Principles x x - - -
Explain the term 'radial', and describe the working principle of a VOR with regard
92.2.3.1.1 x x - - -
to shift between reference and variable phase
92.2.3.1.2 State that radials are referenced to magnetic north (MN) x x - - -
92.2.3.1.3 State that a VOR operates in the VHF frequency bands (108.0-117.975 MHz) x x - - -

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 163 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
State that different types of VOR are in operation (e.g. CVOR, DVOR), but use of the
92.2.3.1.4 x x - - -
signals is the same on airborne side
List the main components of VOR airborne equipment: antenna, receiver,
92.2.3.1.5 x x - - -
indicating instrument (CDI or HSI, electronic display)
92.2.3.1.6 Describe the procedure to identify a VOR x x - - -
92.2.3.2 Presentation and interpretation x x - - -
RMI x x - - -
92.2.3.2.1 Read off the radial on an RMI x x - - -
CDI or HSI x x - - -
State that the deviation indication on a CDI or HSI corresponds to the angular
92.2.3.2.2 x x - - -
displacement from the selected course
State that deviation indication usually is 2 degrees per dot (5-dot display) or 5
92.2.3.2.3 x x - - -
degrees per dot (2-dot display) to the left and right
State maximum deflection corresponds to a deviation from selected course of 10
92.2.3.2.4 x x - - -
degrees or more
TO/FR flags x x - - -
92.2.3.2.5 Explain the relation between TO and FROM flag with position of the aircraft x x - - -
State that TO/FR flags are NOT related to the actual movement of the aircraft 'to'
92.2.3.2.6 x x - - -
or 'from' the station
Read and interpret VOR information (selected course, deviation, flag) as
92.2.3.2.7 x x - - -
displayed on CDI, HSI and RMI
Procedures x x - - -
Describe how to fly the following in-flight VOR procedures: tracking,
92.2.3.2.8 x x - - -
interceptions of a radial, determining station passage
92.2.3.3 Coverage and range x x - - -
Explain the limitation of range due to the path of the VHF signal (station
92.2.3.3.1 x x - - -
elevation and aircraft altitude)
92.2.3.4 Errors and accuracy x x - - -
State that in case no valid signal is reveived, the NAV flag is displayed on the CDI
92.2.3.4.1 x x - - -
or HSI
Describe the 'cone of silence' overhead a VOR station, and how to proceed when
92.2.3.4.2 x x - - -
entering it

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 164 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
92.2.4 DME x x - - -
92.2.4.1 Principles x x - - -
92.2.4.1.1 Explain the principle of determining distance via run-time measurement x x - - -
State that the measured distance corresponds to the direct, radial distance from
92.2.4.1.2 x x - - -
the DME ('slant range')
State the VOR and DME can be co-located to provide bearing and distance at the
92.2.4.1.3 x x - - -
same time
92.2.4.2 Presentation and interpretation x x - - -
State that with a given distance displayed, the aircraft can be anywhere on a
92.2.4.2.1 x x - - -
circle around the station
Explain why DME distance ist NOT zero when the aircraft is directly overhead the
92.2.4.2.2 x x - - -
station
92.2.4.3 Coverage and range x x - - -
State that DME stations usually can respond only up to 100 aircrafts at the same
92.2.4.3.1 x x - - -
time
92.2.4.4 Errors and accuracy x x - - -
92.2.4.4.1 Explain the difference between 'horzontal distance' and 'slant range' x x - - -
92.2.4.4.2 Explain why the GS read-out from a DME can be less than the actual GS x x - - -
92.3 RADAR x x - - -
92.3.1 Ground radar x x - - -
92.3.1.1 Principles x x - - -
92.3.1.1.1 Describe the pulse technique and echo principle used by primary radar systems x x - - -
State that for providing echos to be detected by primary radar, no airborne
92.3.1.1.2 x x - - -
equipment is required
92.3.1.2 Presentation and interpretation x x - - -
92.3.1.2.1 State that primary radar only provides bearing and distance of targets x x - - -
92.3.1.3 Coverage and range x x - - -
State that the theoretical range of a radar is limited by technical factors, e.g.
92.3.1.3.1 x x - - -
pulse length and frequency, transmission power, rotation speed of the antenna
92.3.1.4 Errors and accuracy x x - - -
State that the chance for being detected by primary radar depends on the height
92.3.1.4.1 x x - - -
of aircraft, height of antenna and frequency used

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 165 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
92.3.2 Secondary surveillance radar and transponder x x - - -
92.3.2.1 Principles x x - - -
State that use of secondary surveillance radar (SSR) requires a transponder as
92.3.2.1.1 x x - - -
airborne equipment
Describe how pulses from primary radar triggers an active replay by the
92.3.2.1.2 x x - - -
transponder of an aircraft which is received by a separate antenna
Describe the advantages of SSR over a primary radar regarding the variety of
92.3.2.1.3 x x - - -
information that can be transmitted
92.3.2.2 Presentation and interpretation x x - - -
State that modern ATC systems use inputs from various sensors and SSR
92.3.2.2.1 x x - - -
information to generate the display
92.3.2.2.2 State that an aircraft can be identified by a unique code x x - - -
Explain the use and function of the selector modes: OFF, Standby, ON (Mode A),
92.3.2.2.3 x x - - -
ALT (Mode A, C and S), TEST, and of the reply lamp
92.3.2.3 Modes and codes x x - - -
92.3.2.3.1 State what information is provided by a transponder in modes A, C and S x x - - -
92.3.2.3.2 State there are 4096 different transponder codes, using only numerals 0 - 7 x x - - -
92.3.2.3.3 Describe the use of the IDENT button x x - - -
92.4 GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GNSSs) x x x x -
92.4.1 GPS, GLONASS OR GALILEO x x x x -
92.4.1.1 Principles x x x x -

State that Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS) consist of a constellation of

92.4.1.1.1 x x x x -
satellites which can be used by a suitably equipped receiver to determine position

92.4.1.2 Operation x x x x -
Explain how the signals of different satellites can be used to determine position in
92.4.1.2.1 x x x x -
space
State that a GNSS receiver is able to determine the distance to a satellite by
92.4.1.2.2 determining the difference between the time of transmission by the satellite and x x x x -
the time of reception
State that GNSS supplies three-dimensional position fixes and speed data (using
92.4.1.2.3 x x x x -
doppler shift), plus a precise time reference

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 166 of 167

 90 NAV

Chapter Description PPL(A) PPL(H) SPL BPL NVFR Remarks

NAVIGATION x x x x x
State that the GNSS receiver is able determine position when receiving at least 4
92.4.1.2.4 x x x x -
satellites
Describe the requirement to keep the databases used by GNSS current, and state
92.4.1.2.5 x x x x -
the update cycle
92.4.1.3 Presentation and interpretation x x x x -
State that when using deviation indicators with GNSS, the deviation corresponds
92.4.1.3.1 x x x x -
to the absolute off-track distance (in NM)
State that the scale of the off-track indication varies with the selected procedure
92.4.1.3.2 x x x x -
(e.g. enroute or approach)
State that the indicated speed corresponds to the actual ground speed (GS) of the
92.4.1.3.3 x x x x -
aircraft
92.4.1.4 Errors and factors affecting accuracy x x x x -
Describe 'receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM)' as a technique that
92.4.1.4.1 x x x x -
ensures the integrity of the provided data by redundant measurements
State that basic RAIM requires five satellites, a sixth one is for isolating a faulty
92.4.1.4.2 x x x x -
satellite from the navigation solution
92.4.1.4.3 Explain how RAIM information can be obtain before the flight (e.g. via NOTAM) x x x x -
State that 'geometric dilution of precision (GDOP)' arises from the geometry and
92.4.1.4.4 x x x x -
number of satellites in view
Explain why an automotive GPS or not aviation-specific GNSS system or mobile
92.4.1.4.5 x x x x -
phone app is not an adequate primary source of navigation

PPL Syllabus by AIRCADEMY Page 167 of 167